Home

A35 - Ortec

1. gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make further correc tions in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization Fig 73 DSPEC jr 2 0 Stabilizer Tab To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay enabled even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed High Voltage Figure 74 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high voltage on or off set and monitor the voltage and choose the Shutdown mode The polarity is set in the DIM module The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it The Overload indicator means there is a bad connection in your system The Shutdown indicator means that either the detec
2. Fig 10 Completed Analysis Showing Results Table and Analysis Sidebar 13 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 3 2 3 Loading a Library From the Menu Bar select Library then Select File as shown in Library Fig 11 This will open a list of nuclide libraries in the current directory Select Peak E dit N Select the library file SVDEMO LIB and click on OK to load it The List following message will appear on the Supplemental Information Line at the bottom of the ScintiVision window Fig 11 Load a Library from Menu SVdemo lib 3 Nuclides 13 alloc 5 Peaks 20 alloc This message describes the library just loaded SVDEMO LIB contains 3 nuclides with space for 13 and has 5 peaks with space for 20 This library SVDEMO LIB is now loaded into the computer memory and ScintiVision will use it for all analyses until you choose another library Until you choose another SVDEMO LIB will automatically be reloaded each time ScintiVision is started 3 2 4 Setting the Analysis Parameters Click on Analyze then Settings From Analyze the submenu that opens Fig 12 select Sample Type This will open the Peak Search Report Generator Analysis Options dialog shown in ROI Report Attenuation Coefficients Fig 13 These sample type settings Peak Background Correction gt Entire spectrum in memory allow you to specify the various analysis Su eM parameters for analy
3. Photoelectric Absorption A Characteristic 40 05 X Ra du odi id E 3 37 Par TIN Production e Annmihilation p Photons X Ray Backscatter Peak Peak l INS l E 0 2 0 511 MeV E 4162 Fig 97 Detector with Extended Source The selected source s should contain isolated singlets over the entire energy range of interest If desired the efficiency calibration can be performed using one or more spectra to minimize the difficulty of obtaining the required number of singlets To perform the calibration you need an energy calibrated spectrum of the radionuclides and their source strengths and calibration dates These data are entered into the program in convenient menu type forms and you can review the results of each step Questionable points can be deleted additional points added and the fitting process repeated until you obtain the desired result The Nal analysis package uses a four term polynomial or cubic fit of the logarithm base 10 of efficiency to the logarithm base 10 of energy At least four well separated peaks are needed for the polynomial fit If fewer peaks are provided a quadratic or linear fit is performed With the minimum number of points the fit will be reported as exact for all data points but the calibration could be inaccurate elsewhere 101 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 If the input points are not well separated the best fit to the data points might not be an accurate repre
4. Manually Creating a New PBC Table Open the control menu and click on New This will clear the Edit window so nuclides can be entered manually Click on the Insert button to open the dialog shown in Fig 135 Enter the nuclide name exactly as it appears in the library Now in the right hand peak portion of the dialog click on Insert to open the dialog in Fig 136 Enter the energy of the gamma ray and the counts per second of the background peak The energy must be the same as the library value Peak energies in the PBC Table and not in the library for this nuclide will not be corrected and peak energies in the library and not in the PBC Table for this nuclide will not be corrected 130 5 MENU COMMANDS s Editing svdemol pbc Rank Energy C P S il a rre at Cede Ver Eee 2 1232 50 237 903 Fig 133 PBC Table Editing Dialog Fig 134 Edit PBC Dialog Control Menu Automatically Creating a PBC Table To make a PBC file from the background spectrum analysis results uro file the background count rates are extracted from the analysis results file and inserted in a PBcC file To do this Name K 40 Canca open the control menu and click on Show Background Analysis This will open a standard file open dialog Select the Fig 135 Edit or Manually correct UFO file and click on Open The list of nuclides in the Add Nuclide Name 131 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 analys
5. The Gain Stabilizer Enabled checkbox enables or disables the gain stabilization It can only be turned on after the Suggest button has been used to select a working peak 5 2 10 5 Zero Stabilization The Zero Stabilizer function enables you to control the zero level or offset stabilizer on Detectors so equipped The zero level stabilizer uses a peak in the spectrum to monitor the changes in the zero level of the system amplifier The zero stabilizer controls the offset bias level so the peak will be maintained in its original position The input pulse height to channel number relationship is Channel number Intercept Gain pulse height where Intercept The channel number of the zero height input pulse Gain The relation between pulse height and channel number slope of the curve 86 5 MENU COMMANDS Changes in either the zero intercept or gain can affect the positions of all the peaks in the spectrum When used with the gain stabilizer both the zero intercept and the gain slope are monitored to keep all the peaks in the spectrum stabilized The zero stabilization and gain stabilization are separate functions in the MCB but both will affect the position of the peaks in the spectrum The stabilization operates by keeping a peak centered in an ROI you have defined The ROI should be set symmetrically about the center of a peak with reasonably good count rate in the lower channels of the spectrum The ROI should be about tw
6. not analysis libraries and that you can access NuclideNavigator III directly from the ScintiVision Library Edit submenu if the NuclideNavigator package is installed on your PC 3 2 8 Detector Setup Before starting data collection make sure the detector analog electronics in older systems and MCB are connected and powered on according to their respective hardware manuals The ScintiVision installation program will have already located the Detectors available to this PC Click on the Detector pick list on the right of the Toolbar and select a Detector The spectrum displays will update to show the data in this Detector In the simplest mode of operation data acquisition is Acquire started from the Toolbar simply click on the Start button Acquisition Settings You can use the Acquire menu Fig 27 to check the Start Alt 1 analysis settings while data is being gathered After Start Save Heport acquisition stops the analysis can proceed Stop eut Clear Alt 3 All of ScintiVision s hardware setup controls are now Cop to BOS aie in one MCB specific dialog Depending on your Detector DA d this might include controls for conversion gain amplifier View Stored Spectrum high voltage shaping data acquisition presets and more Field Mode Operation To access this dialog click on Acquire MCB Properties ZDT Display Select F3 or right click the mouse to open its menu and select MCB E MCB Properties Pr
7. 5 MENU COMMANDS rg Peak gt Energy 1173 23 i EnergyUncertainty 0 50683 po Centroid 1175 63 Center 366 347 nlo mhi 329 403 multilo hi 329 452 Fwhm 20 88 67 3 keV FwhmUncertainty 0 327585 FitHeight 408 066 Area 9094 53 Background 8370 Counts 9003 3 Abundance 0 Uncertainty 0 0155928 MD 0 fwPeakFlagl 2 3 0x2000 Ox0000 0x4888 BackLo Hi 143 6 7 54009 qfParaBack 143 6 1 07317 7 54009 Cubic 0 1074706 irpNuclide A CO LI Fig 146 UFO Peak Record Description The FWHM of the peak It is a measured value for single peaks and a calculated value for peaks in a multiplet region The uncertainty of the FWHM as determined in the fit The height of the fitted peak function The corrected net area of the peak For example the PBC correction could be applied to this number The corrected peak background calculated by the program The uncorrected net area of the peak The activity for this nuclide based on this peak only It is zero for unknown peaks or if there is no efficiency calibration The 1 sigma counting uncertainty in the peak net area as a fraction 139 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 MDA The minimum detectable activity for this nuclide based on this peak only It is zero for unknown peaks or if there is no efficiency calibration fwPeakFlag1 2 3 The peak flags described in the File Structure Manual as hexadecimal numbers BackLo Hi The calculat
8. This saves the active Detector or the selected data memory in a disk file It has the same function as Save As under the File menu The file type is determined in the File Settings dialog The disk filename in quotation marks can be any valid DOS filename the drive d path path and extension spc are optional If an extension is not supplied the default extension is automatically determined by the file settings selection Also the current drive and directory are used by default when the optional path specification is not supplied The loop count value can be included in the filename by typing three question marks in the text where the loop count is to be inserted The loop count replaces wherever it appears The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 The optional argument n specifies the spectrum number to save for a CHN or SPE file For the DSPEC Plus in ZDT mode zero a value of zero will switch the display to the normal spectrum before the data is saved and a value of 1 will switch the spectrum to the ZDT spectrum before the save For the DSPEC Plus in ZDT mode one a value of 1 will switch the display to the ZDT spectrum before the data is saved and a value of zero will switch the spectrum to the Error spectrum before the save This parameter is ignored if the DSPEC Plus is not in ZDT mode This parameter is not used when saving data to an spc file since both spectra are automatically saved
9. ZDT deviation is obtained from the Nzre counts in the same peak ROI in the accompanying error spectrum The standard deviation in this case is Np And the standard deviation in the computed counting rate N y Real Time is Nr Live Time The NORM CORR Diagnostic Mode Why is there a NORM CORR mode and why should you avoid using it This mode simultaneously collects the ZDT spectrum and the conventional uncorrected spectrum It is useful for demonstrating that the counts in the uncorrected spectrum divided by the live time is the same counting rate as the counts in the ZDT spectrum divided by the real time in the special case of constant counting rate Because the error spectrum is not collected in NORM CORR mode the standard deviation in the ZDT counts cannot be calculated if the counting rate is 90 5 MENU COMMANDS varying GammaVision provides some protection for users if the ZDT LTC mode is inadvertently selected In this case GammaVision v6 06 ignores the ZDT spectrum and presumes you intended to use the uncorrected spectrum in a constant counting rate application To summarize Use the ZDT Off mode when the counting rate is expected to be constant during the time taken to acquire the spectrum e Use the ZDT CORR ERR mode when the counting rate is expected to change or might change significantly during the time required to acquire the spectrum Avoid using the NORM CORR mode because GammaVision v6 06
10. button Select All Fig 49 Right Mouse Button Menu for Dialogs 43 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 44 5 MENU COMMANDS This chapter describes all the ScintiVision menu commands and their associated dialogs As is customary for Windows menus the accelerator s if any are shown to the right of the menu function they duplicate Also the underlined letter in the menu item indicates a key that can be used together with the Alt key for quick access in the menu So for example the Detector dialog under Display can be reached by the following key sequence Alt D gt Alt D gt The ellipsis following a menu selection indicates that a dialog is displayed to complete the function Finally a small arrow gt following a menu selection means a submenu with more selections will be shown The menus and commands are File Settings Recall Save Save As Export Import Print Compare Exit About ScintiVision Acquire Acquisition Settings Start Alt 1 gt Start Save Report Stop Alt 2 Clear Alt 3 gt Copy to Buffer Alt 5 QA Settings Measure Background Measure Sample Status Control Chart Download Spectra ZDT Display Select F3 MCB Properties 45 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Calibrate Energy Efficiency Description Lower Limit Learn Calibration Sequence Run Calibration Sequence Recall Calibration Save C
11. gt lt Alt gt on the keyboard and Keypad lt Alt gt Alt gt 9 2 15 Screen Capture lt PrintScreen gt The lt PrintScreen gt key captures the entire monitor display to the Windows Clipboard where it is available for use in other applications such as word processors Windows Paint etc Some older keyboards require Alt PrintScreen gt or Shift PrintScreen gt A typical usage would be to set up the display as desired for the snapshot you might wish to use Display Preferences Spectrum Colors to select black or white for all areas rather than colors since they produce clearer printouts then press lt PrintScreen gt Start the desired graphics or word processing application Copy the image from the Clipboard with lt Ctrl V gt or Edit Paste refer to the documentation for the graphics or word processing program See the FullShot manual for other screen capture and screen printing methods 9 3 Keyboard Number Combinations NOTE Only the keyboard numbers will function in the following combinations The keypad number keys will not perform these functions 9 3 1 Start Alt 1 gt lt Alt 1 gt starts the acquisition in the selected Detector Any presets desired must be entered before starting acquisition This accelerator duplicates the Start Toolbar button the Start command on the right mouse button menu and Acquire Start discussed in Section 5 2 2 9 3 2 Stop lt Alt 2 gt lt Alt 2 gt
12. window open 3 2 5 Energy Calibration For this example we will use the spectrum files supplied with ScintiVision to recalibrate the buffer The same procedure is used to calibrate the Detector spectrum The display should be showing the SVDEMO1 SPC spectrum window and Library List window If the complete library peak list is not visible you can click and drag the window edges to resize it From the Calibrate menu Fig 16 select Energy The Energy Calibration Sidebar Fig 17 will open superimposed Calibrate v Efficiency i Description Lower Limit Learn Calibration Sequence Run Calibration Sequence Recall Calibration Save Calibration Print Calibration Fig 16 Start Energy on the Status Sidebar Note that you can move this sidebar by Calibration from Menu clicking and dragging the Calibr title bar You can also move the other windows the same way This time so that we re starting from the very beginning we will destroy the current energy calibration by clicking on the icon to the left of the title Calib This will open the control menu shown in Fig 18 Click on Destroy The Marker Information Line now shows the legend uncal Move the cursor to channel 401 the location of the upper Co peak at 1332 5 keV Do this directly in the Full Spectrum View or by using the f Peak Pf buttons until you get there Click once in the E field at the top of the Calibration Sid
13. 10 JOB FILES The Ask on Save questions as defined in File Settings will be asked each time a SAVE command is executed This will stop execution of the os file until the question is answered As for the Save As function the real time live time start of acquisition and if available calibration data detector description and sample description are stored with the spectrum If the ASK SPECTRUM command has been executed in this JoB file prior to this SAVE command the filename is stored in FullPath SAVE CALIBRATION d path file CLS This saves the current working energy and efficiency calibrations to a cus file It has the same function as Save Calibration under the Calibrate menu The contents of the spectrum are not altered by this operation The disk filename in quotation marks can be any valid filename with optional elements as described for the SAVE command above The default extension is cns The loop count value can be included in the filename by typing three question marks in the text where the loop count is to be inserted The loop count replaces wherever it appears The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 SAVE ROI d path file roi This saves a table of channel numbers that have the ROI set for the active Detector or selected data memory in a disk file It has the same function as Save File under the ROI menu The contents of the spectrum ar
14. STOP I6 C Add 2 to I to advance past the begin and end numbers I I 2 IROI IROI 1 C Keep going until we run out of numbers GO TO 200 260 APPENDIX B FILE FORMATS 1000 STOP END B 3 2 C Language KKK e e e e e he e ehe RK KR ehe e e e RHI e eoe e he e e hee e he e e he e e he e e he e e e e e EEKE Sample program compatible with Microsoft and Borland C to read header and channel data from a CHN data file BR RRR e ehe e ee e hee e hee ehe e ehe e ehe e ehe e He e ke hee e he e e he e e he e e he e e e e e he e e e e e e e e ke include lt stdio h gt define CHN 1 main argc argv int argc char argv l char acq time 32 buffer for time date int f type CHN file type unsigned int chan offset beginning channel number count loop counter mca num 1 4 are valid num chans no of data channels num writ no of bytes written out segment segment number long int livetime 20ms tics of livetime realtime 20ms tics of realtime chan data stores channel data FILE f pointer if argc 2 printf USAGE readchn filename chn n exit 1 f pointer fopen argv 1 rb BR RRR e ehe e ehe e ee e e e e hee e e e e he e e he e e he e ehe e ehe e ehe e eoe e eoe e he e e e e e KEE KE Header Data Output header info from CHN file A A Read filetype 1 CHN fread amp f t
15. and automatically accompanies the spectrum when it is subsequently copied or saved to a file The description also appears in the title bar at the top of the window while the spectrum is displayed For files in the cHN format only the first 64 characters are saved in the spectrum file Sample Description EF j 43d87 539 g Cancel Fig 162 Enter or Edit Sample Description 5 7 3 Menu Passwords This feature of Scinti Vision Fig 163 allows you to protect each of the items on all of the menu bar pull down menus by a password When a menu item is password protected that function cannot be used unless the password is entered Each menu item can have a different password or the passwords can all be the same 151 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 NOTE There is no master password and passwords cannot be determined from the system If the password is lost contact ORTEC Customer Service for assistance Passwords are case sensitive that is upper case and lowercase letters are not treated the same This password protection is valid for all instances of Scinti Vision running on this PC To prevent the use of passwords password protect the Set Password menu item itself If a menu item already has a password there will be an asterisk to the left its item name To set change or clear the password click on the menu item name to highlight it then click on Password to open the next dialog If there is no password f
16. is the same as or greater than the conversion gain of the stored spectra otherwise the downloaded spectra will be truncated at the current conversion gain setting For example if a digiDART was used to acquire 8k spectra in the field and the current conversion gain setting is 4k only the first 4096 channels of data in each spectrum will be downloaded 5 2 9 ZDT Display Select This command is active only when the current Detector is a DSPEC Plus and one of the zero dead time ZDT modes has been enabled on the ADC tab under Acquire MCB Properties When the DSPEC Plus is in a ZDT mode two spectra are collected either live time 63 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 corrected LTC and ZDT or uncertainty ERR and ZDT see Fig 68 and the discussion in Section 5 2 10 6 The spectrum is labeled in the upper right corner of the Full Spectrum View When you choose ZDT Display Select the ZDT spectrum is displayed the ZDT label appears in the Full Spectrum View and this command has a checkmark beside it on the menu This function is duplicated by lt F3 gt mm ze nann ami REEL Fig 68 Example of Uncertainty and ZDT Spectra Showing Labels in Full Spectrum View 5 2 10 MCB Properties ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 applications now use a uniform data acquisition setup dialog called Properties In ScintiVision the Properties dialog opens when you select the Acquire MCB Properties command The MCB properties for the DSPEC jr 2 0
17. test Spc into the dialog box The filename is the name selected in the filename entry dialog File Name can be constructed as file base file extension File Base This will insert the base filename e g test into the dialog box The file base name is the name selected in the filename entry dialog File Extension This will insert the file extension e g Spc into the dialog box The file extension is the name selected in the filename entry dialog Note that the dot is not included Any manually inserted input of the macro form xxx will be included in the argument list without changes Initial Directory The initial directory for the program to use can be specified as directly File Directory entered character strings or the user can select from the list of macros Program Directory in Fig 54 The list is displayed by clicking on the arrow button to the ds test Current Directory right of the Initial Directory field Fig 54 The Initial Directory Macros File Directory This is the directory selected in the filename selection dialog when the export file is selected e g c user spectrum Program Directory This is the directory for the conversion program It is shown in the first entry of this dialog ScintiVision Directory This is the directory where the ScintiVision program is stored Usually this is c Program Files ScintiVision Current Directory This is the current default dire
18. 164 Password Dialog Cancel Verify Old Password Password Fig 165 Verify Old Password Enter a new password as described above To remove the password leave the box in Fig 164 blank not spaces and click on OK 152 5 MENU COMMANDS When finished editing all of the desired passwords click OK Error on the Set Passwords dialog to keep the changes Clicking on Cancel will restore all password states to their previous condition 5 7 4 Lock Unlock Detectors This facility enables you to protect a Detector from destructive N Incorrect Password Fig 166 Wrong Password access e g Start Stop Clear by any program on the PC or network While any program can view the data and read the contents on any Detector in the system locked or unlocked the contents of a locked Detector cannot be changed without knowing the password NOTE There is no master password If the password is lost contact ORTEC Customer Service for assistance in unlocking the detector If the Detector is currently unlocked selecting Lock Unlock will show the dialog displayed in Fig 167 Enter the Owner name Then enter a pass word in the Password field and re enter it in the Verify field the two entries must agree Click on OK The password is not case sensitive that is upper case and lowercase letters are treated the same If the Detector is currently locked selecting Lock Unlock will display the dia
19. 32 v2 A35 B32 The MDA is then given as the following formula MDA MPA n Ex Tx vy where theefficiency at the peak energy T the live time of the acquisition y the yield It should be noted that the MDA value will not always represent the maximum activity of a particular nuclide that might be present in a sample Rather it measures the limit of detection for that particular nuclide Theoretically if a nuclide activity exceeds the detection limit the peak will be found by the peak search and will be matched with a nuclide and or be reported as an unknown peak with an actual activity being reported as much greater than the MDA The subtraction of the PBC area and the recalculation of the percent error can result in the new net peak area being below the sensitivity cutoff and thus eliminating this peak from being used in the activity calculation If the first library peak is rejected the MDA is reported 6 5 Peak Background Correction The Peak Background Correction PBC is used to correct for the presence of an isotope in the background spectrum that also occurs in the sample If the isotope is not of interest in the analysis results there is no need to make this correction The correction subtracts peak counts in the background spectrum from the peak counts in the sample The PBC values in the PBC table are the counts per second at each library energy and these values are subtracted from the counts per second values of
20. 32 v2 A35 B32 The PBC table file is used with the Peak Background Correction in the spectrum analysis Note that the PBC correction is related to the detector and the shield but not to the geometry of the sample Any of the correction table nuclide data include the nuclide name which can be any combination of eight characters but must be consistent throughout all files At startup ScintiVision automatically attempts to load the PBC table last loaded Thereafter it can be replaced at any time using Select PBC It stays resident in memory after it have been loaded Select PBC Use this command to open a standard file Select PBC File open dialog Fig 132 and select a new Lookin Gy User E working PBC file If a PBC file is already a N7 table pbc loaded its name will be displayed in the a ba Phctable pbc 2 play Maa la Pbctest pbc File name field otherwise the default A pins a Pbctest2 pbc PBC will be shown Select the desired file and click on Open File name Edit PBC Files of type Pbc Files Cancel This function is used to create a new PBC Fig 132 Select PBC File file or to change the contents of an existing PBC file To create a PBC file click on Edit PBC to open the Editing dialog shown in Fig 133 Figure 134 shows this dialog s control menu click on the Title Bar icon to open it It contains several of the commands necessary to create and edit PBC files
21. 5 MENU COMMANDS The longest rise time shown in the table is 12 us even though some digital instruments can be set for rise times as long as 23 us If throughput is not an issue because all samples are low rate increasing the rise time beyond 12 us might achieve a small improvement in resolution For planar detectors such as ORTEC s GLP Si Li IGLET and IGLET X Series operating at longer rise times frequently gives improved resolution 5 3 Calibrate The calibration of the system defines three relations 1 Spectrum channel numbers and energy 2 FWHM of the peak and energy 3 Spectrum count rate and activity in becquerels or other units The data collected are in counts unit time channel however to be most useful these data need to be converted to activities i e decays unit time at a given energy The calibration parameters do this conversion These relationships are calculated from spectra user inputs and inputs from libraries and tables The calibration data are merged with the spectrum when it is saved as a spectrum file The information is used in the analysis section to perform the desired analysis NOTE ScintiVision can read spectrum files created by other software products such as MAESTRO 32 and GammaVision 32 It is important that the calibrations both energy and efficiency be done correctly because the calibration results will affect all analyses employing these calibrations The energy calibration data is u
22. 5 2 10 1 DSPEC jr 2 0 Amplifier Figure 69 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the controls for Gain Baseline Restore Preamplifier Type Input Polarity and Optimize NOTE Be sure that all of the controls on the tabs have been set before clicking the Start Auto optimize button The changes you make on most property tabs take place immediately There is no cancel or undo for these dialogs Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain Properties for RANDT266 MCB 132 3 x by selecting from the Coarse droplist High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset then adjust the Fine gain with the Amplifier Amplifier2 AmpliierPRO ADC Stabilizer horizontal slider bar or the edit box r Gain 1 00 r Baseline Restore r Optimize in the range of 0 45 to 1 00 The 0 45 1 00 DL _StartAuto_ resulting effective gain is shown at E A aos Stop Auto the top of the Gain section The Fine 0 5000 Fes Feedba lal SR two controls used together cover the Coarse EN We Cg entire range of amplification from 0 45 to 32 Needs Auto Opti Input Polarity These radio buttons select the preamplifier input signal polarity for the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have a positive signal and GMX n type have a negative signal Fig 69 DSPEC jr 2 0 Amplifier Tab 65 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Baseline Restore This is used to return the baseline of the puls
23. An example is Do not print channel as first number in line default is to print the channel number The channel number is followed by a colon to separate it from the data Number of data columns is n default is 5 Error returned if line width will exceed available space Do not write acquisition or analysis information in output file default is to write this information Do not write header information in output file default is to write this information Import a text file and save as sPc or cHN file If one filename is given default is to convert that file to the other format i e for AAA SPC the output will be AAA TXT If two filenames are given the default is to convert the spectrum to text The TXT file will be overwritten even if the spc file is not located TRANSLT SPC GOODSPEC TXT TEXTSPEC ni nh coll This will make a text file of one column with no header no analysis information and one channel per line For more comprehensive file translation capabilities use our DataMaster Spectrum File Format Translator B49 B32 which allows you to import 16 spectrum file formats including cHN and SPC and translate them into 10 formats 248 APPENDIX A STARTUP AND CONFIGURATION A 1 Startup To start ScintiVision go to the Windows Start menu and click on ScintiVision 32 ScintiVision see Fig 226 You can also start it by clicking on Start Run and entering a command line in the Run
24. Click on OK to overwrite the file 5 8 8 Recall File Recall File sets the ROIs in the buffer or active Detector to the table in the disk file created by ROI Save File Section 5 8 7 Recall ROI File 3 User C Tmpl la N11089ag roi Look in cit E waterford N30201b r0i from the table stored in an sPc file from Eu e lari roi fal Stabs roi the analysis limits in a uFo file or from the Mga a loas roi La Test roi a Testis roi pins laa Mmcbdem roi Es Mmcbdemo rol energies in a library This command opens the dialog shown in Fig 174 prompting you to select a filename refer to Section 4 5 for tips on using this dialog When a file is selected the ROIs in the buffer or active Detector are set to conform to the table in the file The previous ROIs are cleared The data contents of the buffer or Detector are not altered by this operation only the ROI bits in the buffer or Detector File name M mcbdemo roi Files of type ROI Channels hd Cancel Fig 174 ROI File Recall Dialog In ROT spectrum and uFo files the ROIs are saved by channel number Therefore if the spectrum peaks have shifted in position the ROIs in the file will not correspond exactly to the spectrum data For library files the ROIs are generated using the library energies and the energy and FWHM calibrations 5 9 Display Display Detector Ctrl lt Frni gt Two of the
25. If you will also be installing the new version of MAESTRO be sure to install MAESTRO first followed by ScintiVision Install the Driver Update Kit last Note also that CONNECTIONS 32 software products are designed to operate correctly only for users with full Administrator privileges Limiting user privileges could cause unexpected results 1 Insert the ScintiVision 32 CD If it does not autorun go to My Computer navigate to the CD or DVD drive and locate and open Disk 1 Setup exe This will start the installation wizard 2 On the Instrument Setup page mark the checkbox es that corresponds to the instrument s installed on your PC as shown in Fig 1 To see more information on each instrument family click on the family name and read the corresponding Item Description on the right side of the dialog If you already have ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 MCBs attached to your PC they will be included on the Local Instrument List at the bottom of the dialog along with any new instruments Existing previously configured before this upgrade instruments do not have to be powered on during this part of the installation procedure NOTE You can enable other device drivers later as described in Section 2 2 3 If you want other computers in a network to be able to use your MCBs leave the Allow other computers to use this computer s instruments marked so the MCB Server program will be installed Most users will leave this box marked for maximum fle
26. Jump to next higher peak Jump to next lower peak Jump to next higher ROI Jump to next lower ROI Advance to next library entry Recede to previous library entry Jump to higher channel number in 1 16th screen width increments Jump to lower channel number in 1 16th screen width increments Jump to first channel of the full spectrum Jump to last channel of the full spectrum Select Detector i i 1 to 12 in pick list order Switch ROI bit control from OFF to SET to CLEAR In DSPEC Plus switch between the two spectra stored in ZDT mode In DSPEC Plus switch the disk spectrum to compare normal to disk ZDT spectrum or ZDT spectrum to disk normal spectrum Switch between displaying selected Detector and buffer Change vertical scale so that spectrum peaks are smaller Change vertical scale so that spectrum peaks are larger Narrow the horizontal scale Widen the horizontal scale Reset both horizontal and vertical scaling to view complete spectrum Zoom out Zoom in Center expanded display on cursor Switch to logarithmic vertical scale Switch to auto vertical scale Mark the peak region around the cursor as an ROI Clear the ROI Shift the compare spectrum upwards Shift the compare spectrum downwards Start acquisition in selected Detector Stop acquisition in selected Detector Clear data in selected Detector Copy data in the selected Detector to the buffer Switch between displaying selected Detect
27. Keypad lt gt increases the scale of both axes in the Expanded Spectrum View so the peaks appear larger while Keypad lt gt does the opposite making the peaks look smaller The scale value for both axes is always shown on the Toolbar These functions are duplicated by the Zoom In Zoom Out buttons on the Toolbar and Zoom In and Zoom Out under the Display menu See Section 4 1 for a more detailed discussion 9 2 13 Fine Gain lt Alt gt lt Alt gt These accelerators step the internal amplifier up or down by one increment of fine gain on the selected Detector 1f 1t has a software controlled amplifier The new fine gain setting 1s shown on the Supplemental Information Line at the bottom of the screen If the gain stabilizer is active the display of the histogram data might not change The fine gain can also be set with Acquire MCB Properties Section 5 2 10 Shift Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt on the keyboard and Keypad lt Alt gt lt Alt gt 9 2 14 Fine Gain Large Move lt Shift Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt and lt Shift Alt gt step the internal amplifier of the selected Detector if it has a software controlled amplifier up or down by a large increment of fine gain If the gain stabilizer is active the display of the histogram data might not change 206 9 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS The fine gain can also be set using Acquire MCB Properties Section 5 2 10 lt Alt
28. LIB files 144 5 MENU COMMANDS Editing S demo lib EE Creation 4 13 88 10 58 04 AM Co 5 Cobalt Edition 5 10 99 2 42 22 PM Half Life 272 4 Days Coples 5 0000 Edit Co 57 Peaks Peak Flags Rank Energy Percent a ee 07 8 5600E 36 43 EN O600E Insert Cut Edit Cut a Insert Paste lnsert eapy Fig 151 Editing Library Dialog 5 6 3 1 Copying Nuclides From Library to Library To copy nuclides from one library to another library for a example to make a working library from a master library Move click on the Edit window s control menu and select Show eee ica Master Library This will open a file selection dialog Choose Show Master Library the desired disk and file and click on Open Both libraries will New be displayed side by side as illustrated in Fig 153 am ort To copy a nuclide from the master library to the working library Load Library Go to the master library list and click once on the nuclide of Save Liban As interest This will activate the gray Insert Copy button at the Fig 152 Library Edit Dialog bottom of the Editing dialog s nuclide list and change its label Control Menu to Insert plus the name of the nuclide Now in the Editing dialog locate the nuclide immediately below the desired insertion position click on it once then click on Insert nuclide name This will inser
29. Ln ess ke eee ee ene RE E obvios 184 A bra Peas ot ards le bh Bt ects aes diu te redet vestes 185 7 5 Summary of Nuclides in Sample o iuo bes ae A sso ae XR ORARE 187 B QUALITY ASSURANCE Zorras A bet a geen op Nodes teda 189 Sd VIII ce waves Bale At eae owe Se anaes hue eee tna aS pune hee we me es 190 8 1 1 Establishing QA Settings neu ey ct cae Ex M GE et dae EE 190 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 9 8 1 2 Creating the QA Database sa 4 ede US eat ook ERE CHR dee Y 193 85 2 Measure B cksto nd vuoto e So pEU E Reb RE e PE RP Rd 195 5 3 Measule Sample A s Ever vay quee M bene ue eae uet wp qe 196 Sd o SEALUS n uis IN ea cat pire etes uen ote A nee ete 196 8 9 COMM C DAE Ss e rei et A Ud etn 197 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS 2 vc ns koma RR ee me vena EC RA RR ER Ce OE RA ERE UR 201 9 To Introduetfom C essent os dc ex pte e eo se tbe A AS s qa eub Vo ts us 201 9 2 Marker and Display Function Keys lt 0 0000443204 eR ERR ERE ERR R EE EE 201 92 AS Nest ChanBgel c oP get Mpeg A A RES 201 D227 NEX ROL Sete celeste inc RUE e RT A eau ebat rite vd des 204 02 3 Next Peak d ee eau Rhe se ae Cis ai oe deg aequ RES 204 9 2 4 Next Library EBD cete dep diuo ak de tns de RUE ot do dre oA en d 204 92 9 PESO Last Channel 22 2 ASA ad AA ow Ra re hb dts et s d S 204 9 2 6 Jump Sixteenth Screen Width ux ens e de Geen Pb vec Res 205 92 e SATIS EER Oc o cs etae trao A a Und Ried dioe UE O 205 925 Clear ROD usce he RI EQUIS NERONE EU Eu Apr cu ace aed 205 9
30. Report tab to send the appropriate results file to any Windows supported Printer available to the PC a disk File a Program or the optional ScintiVision Report Writer When Printer is selected the RPT file is spooled to the default Windows printer for this PC When File is selected you can specify a new or existing filename click on Browse and select an existing file to overwrite with the new output data or leave the default asterisk in the filename field In this case the report filename will remain the spectrum filename with the extension RPT When Program is selected you can select any 32 bit Windows program to be run with the report filename as an argument on the command line The report filename sent to the program is the spectrum filename with the extension RPT The default program is Windows Notepad Notepad exe In this case when the analysis finishes Notepad automatically starts and opens the RPT file You can also use Notepad to save the RPT file to a different filename if desired or print the report The analysis is not complete until you close the selected program The Report Writer radio button is only active if the ScintiVision Report Writer A46 B32 is installed The Report Writer uses an Access database and Seagate Crystal Reports to produce the desired report Click on Browse to select the report template to be used see the ScintiVision Report Writer s user manual for a complete discussion of tem
31. The next column shows the FWHM of the net peak area This is in energy if the spectrum is calibrated otherwise 1t 1s in channels The next column shows a symbol if the peak is too wide or too narrow as compared to the shape calibration For acceptable peaks or if the spectrum is not calibrated the column is blank 183 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 The last column shows a symbol if the peak is within the deconvolution range of a library peak or peaks If this occurs this region of the spectrum should be investigated to see if the line should be added to the library to ensure that the peak areas are correctly calculated It can also mean that the system is not correctly energy calibrated 7 3 Identified Peak Summary The next section Fig 190 shows the peak energy matrix for the library peaks The library name is printed at the beginning of the list They are arranged in ascending energy order The list can be suppressed It will not be generated if the library is not found or the spectrum is not calibrated LIBRARY USED This shows the name of the library used for the peak list shown below NUCLIDE The first column shows the nuclide name as listed in the library PEAK CHANNEL The second column is the peak channel as determined by the peak finder see page 197 If the peak centroid cannot be found then this is set to 0 along with the remaining entries on this line It is reported to two decimal places but normal variation can
32. To change the path Location of Spectra C User a particular File Type click on the oe eri p ype Libraries C AUsers desired file type to highlight it then Job Files CAUsers Reports DAL sers click on Modify This will open Table Files C User a standard file recall dialog Choose Sample Types riget Calibrations C User a new path and click on Open see Section 4 5 1 for instructions on Modify changing drives and folders When all path changes have been completed click on OK to use them or Cancel to retain the previous settings Fig 58 Directories Tab 5 1 2 Recall This function reads a spectrum file into a buffer window The buffer must be selected first The spectrum files are created by ScintiVision s Save and Save As functions and by any other 54 5 MENU COMMANDS programs that can produce the CHN SPC or SPE format e g MAESTRO 32 GammaVision 32 The buffer is resized to the memory size of the recalled spectrum The Recall Spectrum File dialog Fig 59 shows a list of files as described in Lookin Juss o en S ection 4 5 Cxt SVDemolb spc SVDemo2b spc Mex m SVDemolc spc ls SVDemo2c spc ue Sex Er SVDemold spc Iri SVDemo2d spc Note the Show Description checkbox SvDemolAni fle SvDemo2 An on the lower left of the dialog Use this SvDemolSpc SvDemo2 Spc S Demola spe m SVDemo2a spc to display the sample description format and spectrum size of each file without
33. and 1 keys decrease or increase the vertical full scale of the displayed spectrum so the peaks appear taller or shorter respectively The minimum is 16 counts full scale the maximum is 1024 million counts Each successive key press doubles or halves the full scale until the maximum or minimum is reached Whenever the maximum full scale value is reached the next 1 key press switches to logarithmic scale If the display is already in logarithmic scale the display switches to linear scale In either case the vertical full scale value is always shown on the Toolbar 205 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Note that if the number of counts exceeds the full scale value the data points will be displayed at the full scale value These keys duplicate the function of the lt F6 gt lt F3 gt keys 9 2 10 Move Rubber Rectangle One Pixel lt 1 gt lt gt lt gt lt lt gt In rubber rectangle mode see Section 4 3 3 the arrow keys move the rubber rectangle one channel or one pixel at a time 9 2 11 Compare Vertical Separation lt Shift t gt lt Shift gt In Compare mode the Shift 1 gt or Shift 1 keys decrease or increase the vertical separation between the two spectra Each successive key press will increase or decrease the separation by moving the spectrum read from disk The spectrum from disk can be moved below the first spectrum if it has fewer counts 9 2 12 Zoom In Zoom Out Keypad lt gt lt gt
34. is No or cancel the Detector selection process Cancel Clicking on Yes will open the Detector List Editor dialog Fig 176 Detector Selection List Fig 178 the same dialog accessed through Services Edit Detector List Follow the instructions in Section 5 7 5 158 Pick List is Outdated x A OK to edit Pick List now 1 No Cancel Fig 177 Detector List Warning Detector List Editor MCA Pick List MCB 257 Input 1 00002 MCB 257 Input 2 00003 MCB 257 Input 3 Cancel 00004 MCB 257 Input 4 din 00008 IDM 7325 Master Detector List MCB 257 Input 1 00002 MCB 257 Input 2 00003 MCB 257 Input 3 00004 MCB 257 Input 4 Station 3 Station 4 Eb DSPEC PRO With Nal Add gt Remove lt i Fig 178 Detector List Selection 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 9 2 Detector Buffer This command switches the source of the spectrum and Status Sidebar displays between the selected Detector and the buffer The Full and Expanded Spectrum Views display the data in histogram form The source of the displayed spectrum Detector or buffer is shown on the Toolbar and Title Bar The corresponding descriptors live time real time dead time and start time as well as the presets are shown in the Status Sidebar The marker remains in the same channel when switching between Detector and buffer modes unless the Detector and buffer do not have the same memory size The horizontal
35. spc file description is 128 characters two lines and the cHN file description is 63 characters one line SPECTRUM FILENAME This is the operator input name for the original name of the sprc file SPECTRUM COLLECTION DATE This is the date the spectrum was collected as recorded in the spectrum file SPECTRUM COLLECTION LIVE TIME REAL TIME The live time and real time values as stored in the spectrum file DETECTOR DESCRIPTION The detector description are from the spectrum file The spc file descriptions are 128 characters each two lines and 63 characters each one line for the cun files CALIBRATION The calibration filename and description are from the spectrum file if it is an spc file If the file is a CHN file a message is printed that the calibration is from MAESTRO CALIBRATION DATE FOR ENERGY AND EFFICIENCY This is the date the calibration calculation was performed It is not the collection date of the calibration spectrum ENERGY CALIBRATION FACTORS The energy factors are the offset and slope from the calibration data in the spc or CHN file The quadratic factor is not printed The rest of page 1 is shown in Fig 188 180 7 THE REPORT Library Files Analysis library Main analysis library C USER SVdemo lib Analysis parameters Analysis region Start channel 5 for an energy of 9 25ke Stop channel 500 for an energy of 1698 68keV Activity scaling factor 1 0000E 00 1 0000E 00 1 0000E 00 1 0
36. that is as the data are coming in to the number of counts in the spectrum This technique allows the gamma ray flux to change while the acquisition is in progress yet the total counts recorded in each of the peaks are correct The resulting spectrum has no dead time at all in ZDT mode the data are corrected not the acquisition time Thus the net counts in a peak are divided by the real time to determine the count rate ZDT mode has a unique feature in that it can store both the corrected spectrum and the uncorrected spectrum or the corrected spectrum and the uncertainty spectrum Therefore supported MCBs allow you to choose between three ZDT Mode settings on the ADC tab under MCB Properties Off NORM CORR and CORR ERR see page Off Uncorrected Spectrum Only In this mode only the uncorrected spectrum live time and real time with dead time losses also called the live time corrected or LTC spectrum is collected and stored in the SPC file The LTC spectrum can be used to determine exactly how many pulses at any energy were processed by the spectrometer The corrected spectrum gives the best estimate of the total counts that would have been in the peak if the system were free of dead time effects The uncertainty spectrum can be used to calculate the counting uncertainty channel by channel in the corrected spectrum NOTE When the spectrometer is placed in ZDT mode the throughput of the instrument is reduced some
37. 1 226 5 ara ae eee SS eS Se eS eS eee 7 28 01 Marker 8 12 01 01 01 AM 6 022E 5 Bq 8 25 01 Fig 212 Control Chart On Screen with Fixed Vertical Scale Off RSP 9 2 01 10 22 26 AM 1 DSPEC 075 6 623E 5 Standard Sample Activity 4 822E 5 3 021E 5 1 22E 5 esesessasvassassotoson esotesson 5 813E 4 Ut 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 li 1 1 1 1 i i H 1 1 1 L 1 Pil L 7127101 Marker 8 12 01 01 01 AM 6 022E 5 Bq 8 25 01 Fig 213 Printout of Control Chart with Fixed Vertical Scale Off 200 9 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the ScintiVision accelerator keys The keys described in this section are grouped primarily according to location on the keyboard and secondarily by related function 9 1 Introduction Table 6 provides a quick reference to all of the ScintiVision keyboard and keypad functions These accelerators are also illustrated in Fig 214 and discussed in more detail in the remainder of the chapter The accelerators are available only in the ScintiVision window The Title Bar must be highlighted with the active title bar color as set up in Windows Control Panel In addition the active cursor or input focus must be in the spectrum window Similar to other Windows applications the focus can be switched between ScintiVision and other applications by clicking on the Windows Taskbar pressing lt Alt Tab gt or if the inactive window is visible pointing with the mous
38. 17 cps values displayed are continuously updated with new values based on the new data The background on the low channel side of the peak is the average of the first three channels of the ROI see Fig 118 The channel number for this background point is the middle channel of the three points The background on the high channel side of the peak is the average of the last Marker 11 341 1 835 76 kev 9314 Cnts three channels of the ROI The channel number Peak 11343 01 1836 09 keV Library Y 88 at 1836 01 2113 06 Bq for this background point is also the middle Grose Area 154290 Net Arse HASUTT 2028 channel of the three points These two points on Fig 117 Peak Info Displayed at Top of Peak each side of the peak form the endpoints of the straight line background 113 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 l h Fig 118 Background Calculation Details The background is given by 1 2 h h I1 Be Ce se E 5 i l i h 2 6 where B the background area 1 the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit C the contents of channel i 6 the number of data channels used three on each end The gross area is the sum of all the channels marked by the ROI according to the following h A 7 2 C 6 where A the gross counts in the ROI the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit C the contents of channel i The adjusted gross area is the sum of all the channels marked by the ROI but not used in the backgrou
39. 2 Once the desired spectrum file is selected the spectrum window shows both spectra as illustrated in Fig 63 Note that the spectra in this illustration are displayed in Fill All mode in which all of the area under the peaks is filled with a color different from the background see Display Preferences Fill All Section 5 9 10 1 For the DSPEC series instruments that have ZDT mode both spectra live time corrected LTC or uncertainty ERR and ZDT are compared Normal refers to LTC or ERR Corrected refers 57 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Start Real Live Dead tl Library a ORTEC Maker 206 649 94 keV 14 025 Cnts O COMPARE Shift Up or Shift Down changes offset ESC cancels Fig 63 Compare Mode Screen to ZDT Use lt F3 gt to switch between Normal and Corrected for both spectra that is to show Normal Normal or Corrected Corrected To switch only the comparison between Normal and Corrected use lt Shift F3 gt that is to show Normal Corrected use lt Shift F3 gt The Compare spectrum is offset from the starting spectrum and can be moved up and down incrementally with the Shift 1 and Shift l gt accelerators In addition the vertical scale of both spectra can be simultaneously changed with 1 and 1 Note that the Compare spectrum s ROIs if any were saved with the file are not marked in this mode Figure 64 is a detailed view of a portion of Fi
40. 4 DISPLAY FEATURES 4 3 2 The Right Mouse Button Menu Figure 38 shows the right mouse button menu To open it position the Start mouse pointer in the spectrum display click the right mouse button then Stop use the left mouse button to select from its list of commands Not all of the me EE commands are available at all times depending on the spectrum displayed and whether the rubber rectangle is active Except for Undo Zoom In all n i of these functions are on the Toolbar and or the Menu Bar Peak Info Unde Zocn In Input Count Rate and Sum are only on the Menu Bar under Calculate Mak Fol See Section 5 10 for more information on the commands Clear ROI Peak Info 4 3 3 Using the Rubber Rectangle gol Count iets The rubber rectangle is used for selecting a particular area of interest oe MCB Properties within a spectrum It can be used in conjunction with the right mouse button menu in Fig 38 for many functions To draw a rubber Fig 38 Right rectangle Mouse Button Menu for Spectra 1 Click and hold the left mouse button this anchors the starting corner of the rectangle Drag the mouse diagonally across the area of interest As you do this the mouse will be drawing a reverse color rectangle bisected by the marker line Note that when drawing a rubber rectangle the marker line combines with a horizontal line inside the rectangle to form crosshairs Fig 39 They make it easy to select the center cha
41. 45 AM Fri 5 3 02 Marker 43 125 62 keV 115 595 Cnts Analysis Results ESC or Close Sidebar to Cancel Fig 15 Display Analysis Results Now click on piihin iif to go to the next highest energy peak in the library for Co The within Nuclide buttons are useful for checking if other peaks for the nuclide exist so that you can confirm their identity The at uai button moves the marker in reverse order through the peaks for the selected nuclide The Unknown buttons are used to select the spectrum peaks that are not associated with a library energy This is useful to see if there are any unidentified spectrum peaks that should be considered in the complete analysis The f Mutiplet buttons are used to select the regions with overlapping peaks With these you can easily check how the analysis of complicated regions was handled Now select Library and Select Peak to show a list of the peaks in the current library You can use this list of peaks to move around in the spectrum Click on the Library List window s This may be a different library than the one used in the analysis of the spectrum 17 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 down arrow to scroll down to 122 keV Co Now click on this entry and the display will update to this peak Exit this analysis session by clicking on the Analysis Sidebar s Close button Xp This will close the Analysis Sidebar and the Analysis Results List window Leave the Library List
42. 95 2 Auto Manual reis E ee he ie es Bon Rg res At al Mita e Se MACs a ied 210 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 9 59 95 CENETA ote a uda bd edu rd e qu abd S phat p scr D e 210 9 54 Zoom MELO OUt ont goed ee eek P CEDE E PES Siu 210 OSD Fine Gail ater deus ely Ree ele SEO eee ess HSE Sue 210 10 JOBBIEBS TS oed a e dot intentus a ep dicimus dt sU recent 211 10 1 Summary of JOB Commands sq pod v ROC De OPER bends RR Oma es 212 10 2 JOB EUS Variables ars dor ena hemes QUE te a Ree eU URS 218 10 3 JOB Programming Example 5 0 29x pts e m e pde te xir fea deos eene 219 10321 Improve the JOB ecce efe peat een ex torta estos 221 10 4 JOB Command Details sss E ie Ghd PRS A DREGE RI BS 223 DE TLE ATES s tete v et eb Mee hae qud ate it ew L0 Pd ame Pes 241 js a0 0a cd 0 hc San dd daa 241 REATUS AAA AAA A A 242 T 1 2 OPONE tte ipe d dU xe Ee sd Ee 244 DICIS A eine diis aen lend ade elnino ean ru e Codi e uiri ad 244 ROI ov Sees Gah ad E A ata 245 ES 245 H z ntal dei si a o e was e We 245 Vertical ds AAA BS HERES 246 11 1 3 Command Line Interface ii rera ERE AA AE 246 ER RPO SEE sec di aly Lm Rao dhe as Sy 247 APPENDIX A STARTUP AND CONFIGURATION seeeeeeee ees 240 Ale STAR eho ke ates Ue St ee CRI ED EROR EE RI xe E XS 249 A 1 1 Command Line OpUOHSS A A eee Beale eke HERE 249 Dz Analysis Setup eoo ed s bead o ed bd died ento aod a ag ed edad ba cia qa 250 Ad OS Progra Serene eas du OP note vU Side esae te
43. Also SET DETECTOR without an argument is used to switch to the previously selected Detector If a Detector is selected that does not exist no change is made The Detector number is the number shown on the Toolbar and the Detector pick list This command for values 1 to 12 has the same function as lt Ctrl F1 through lt Ctrl F12 gt For value 0 or no argument at all it duplicates the Detector Buffer toggle under the Display menu F4 and lt Alt 6 gt SET NAME STRIP file chn This can be used before STRIP to select a disk filename to be used subsequently by the STRIP command It is not necessary to use this command because the filename can be supplied as part of the STRIP command itself however the command is included for backward compatibility with MAESTRO II command files No other action is taken by this command The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 SET PRESET CLEAR 234 This clears the presets for the active Detector The clearing should be done to ensure that unwanted presets are not used by the Detector when the Detector is started NOTE For the Models 916 17 18 Detectors the new presets including CLEAR can be loaded at any time but are not put into effect until the Detector goes from STOP to START For most other MCBs the presets can only be changed when the unit is not counting 10 JOB FILES The Detector should be selected by the SET DETECTOR commands before the
44. By looking at the list of steps above and the explanations below the necessary commands can be determined and written down The first step in the process is to initialize the Detector to the condition needed of 1000 seconds live time These are SET DETECTOR 1 SET PRESET CLEAR SET PRESET LIVE 1000 CLEAR Note that all the presets were cleared before setting the live time preset This is to ensure that no previous presets left over from other users will interfere with this analysis Now start the acquisition and wait for completion of the live time START WAIT 2 WAIT During this time the display manipulation keys are active so that the spectrum can be studied while collection is taking place WAIT 2 is necessary to ensure that the acquisition has started before the wait command is reached It is also necessary to add WAIT 2 after the ANALYZE and RUN commands Now move the spectrum from the Detector to the buffer Select the buffer for the computational step FILL BUFFER SET DETECTOR 0 In this step the nuclide peak of interest is being marked by reading in an RoI file This ROI file has been previously defined by looking at the spectrum and marking the peak or the region around the peak This ROI data is saved on the disk under the name DECAYPK ROI This JOB file will work on different peaks or nuclides just by changing the Rot file RECALL ROI DECAYPK ROI The peak areas of the marked peak or peaks is prin
45. Calibration File 5 3 8 Save Calibration Save Calibration allows you to save the I ILIA EJES working calibration for a single Detector to a disk on file in the cns format see Fig 113 All items in both the energy and efficiency tables are saved File name 5vDemot cls Save as type Cls Files b Cancel Fig 113 Save Calibration 111 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 5 3 9 Print Calibration This prints all the calibration data in the working calibration to a printer or disk file see Mies A A Name HP DeskJet 550C Printe Properti Fig 114 If the calibration tables exist they D AM ELM ill 1 b d Status Default printer Ready will also be printed Type HP DeskJet 550C Printer Where LPT1 Print to file Comment Print to display Cancel Fig 114 Print Calibration to Printer or File 5 4 Calculate The Calculate menu Fig 115 provides useful analytical tools for Calculate spectrum manipulation Smooth and Strip are only available in buffer ii mode Peak Info Input Count Rate Sum 5 4 1 Settings Smooth Strip This dialog Fig 116 displays the x factor used by the Peak Info Fig 115 Calculate command to calculate full width at 1 x maximum FW 1 x M for the Menu ROI peak marked by the marker The background is subtracted before starting the calculation see Section 5 4 2 Enter the factor x an integer from 2 to 99 This number wil
46. Conversion Gain This control sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings for the DSPEC jr 2 0 Upper and Lower Level Discriminators In the DSPEC jr 2 0 the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for storage 69 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Stabilizer The DSPEC jr 2 0 has both a gain xi stabilizer and a zero stabilizer High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset Amplifier Ampliier2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer eee T Ban Siaiesion Enabled T Zero Stebizaion Enabled the current values for the stabilizers O Center Chan D The value in each Adjustment section Width 1 Width 1 shows how much adjustment is cur rently applied The Initialize buttons Suggest Region Suggest Region set the adjustment to 0 If the value Adjustment Adjustment approaches 9046 or above the amplifier niisize 0 niaize 0
47. Description Detector SQL_INTEGER Detector ID number Primary Key DetName SQL_CHAR 32 Detector Pick List Name DetDesc SQL_CHAR 64 Detector Description Creation SOL TIMESTAMP Date Time this record created NumMeas SOL INTEGER Measurement counter all types for this detector NumBack SQL INTEGER Background type only Measurement counter for this detector SamFile SOL CHAR 64 Sample Type File Name SamType SOL CHAR 64 Sample Type Description LibFile SOL CHAR 64 Nuclide Library File Name Setup SQL SMALLINT Setup Flagword Limits SOL SMALLINT Limit Settings Flagword MinBack SOL REAL Min Background CPS Acceptance Limit 256 LowBack BigBack MaxBack MinActivity LowActivity BigActivity MaxaActivity MinShift LowShift BigShift MaxShift MinFWHM LowFWHM BigFWHM MaxFWHM Operator SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_CHAR 64 APPENDIX B FILE FORMATS Low Background CPS Excursion Warning Level High Background CPS Excursion Warning Level Max Background CPS Acceptance Limit Min Total Activity Acceptance Limit Low Total Activity Excursion Warning Level High Total Activity Excursion Warning Level Max Total Activity Acceptance Limit Min Average Peak Shift Acceptance Limit Low Average Peak Shift Warning Level High Average Peak Shift Warning Level Max Average Peak Shift Acceptance Limit Min Aver
48. Detector Collect the spectrum of the second source Calibrate by adding the new lines to the existing ones which are retained DURO The process can be repeated for additional sources When completed the calibration should be saved on disk The individual spectra can be saved used in other application software and the calibrations in the spectra updated by recalling each in turn recalling the complete calibration and re saving the spectrum To use more than one stored spectrum to make a single calibration Calibrate using one spectrum Exit the calibration function Save the calibration in a file Recall the second spectrum Recall the calibration because recalling the spectrum has replaced the first calibration with the calibration from the spectrum 6 Select Calibrate Energy and enter the peak energies for the second spectrum te ca The process can be repeated for additional spectra 5 3 2 Efficiency 5 3 2 1 Introduction The Efficiency calibration function calculates the detection efficiency of the NaI Detector system as a function of energy The efficiency of the Detector is the relation between the number of gamma rays emitted from the source to the number of gamma rays collected in the full energy peak see Fig 96 The Nal Detector system efficiency includes effects from the Detector itself the Detector source geometry the materials surrounding the Detector and absorption in the source materia
49. Fig 67 Acquisition Settings If the Auto Increment box is not checked the same file is used for every analysis and the previous data are overwritten with each Start Save Report The analysis uses the settings from Analyze Settings Sample Type Section 5 5 1 1 60 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 2 1 2 Ask on Start Options Sample Type Defaults The sample type file which contains many of the parameters needed for analysis and acquisition can be specified here The file is created in the Analysis Options dialog Section 5 5 1 1 When specified the file is read and the values in it are the defaults for this dialog If the Ask on Start box is checked ScintiVision will ask for the sample type when Detector acquisition starts and the values in that file will be used Click on Browse to show the available files Acquisition Presets If the Ask on Start box is checked the presets are asked when the Detector is started the dialog is the same as the Preset tab for this Detector s MCB Properties dialog Only the non zero presets can be changed during the start Sample Description The sample description can be entered here and it can also be asked for when the spectrum is saved If the Ask on Start box is checked the description entered here will be presented as the default at the start of data acquisition This feature is handy when processing a number of similar samples the common part of the description can be entered here and the un
50. Library Entry Alt gt lt Alt gt These keys move forward or backward through the nuclide library to the next closest library entry Each button press advances to the next library entry and moves the marker to the corresponding energy Also instead of indexing from a previously identified peak the marker can be positioned anywhere in the spectrum and these keys used to locate the entries closest in energy to that point If a warning beep sounds it means that all library entries have been exhausted in that direction or that the spectrum is not properly calibrated for reaching the energy with the marker In any case if an appropriate peak is available at the location of the marker data on the peak activity are displayed on the Marker Information Line These functions are duplicated by the Library indexing buttons on the Status Sidebar 9 2 5 First Last Channel lt Home gt lt End gt These keys move the marker to the first or last channel of the spectrum 204 9 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS 9 2 6 Jump Sixteenth Screen Width lt PageDown gt lt PageUp gt lt PageDown gt and lt PageUp gt jump the marker position to the left to lower channel numbers or right to higher channel numbers respectively 1 16 of the window width regardless of the horizontal scale The status of the ROI bit is not altered when the marker is moved with these keys that is the Mark UnMark Off state is ignored The marker channel contents and Marker In
51. OK 197 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 You can perform additional off line processing of the QA data RONALDKE MCB 1 base including detailed trend analyses outside of ScintiVision CONAIE EOS The database format used is well documented and compatible SINGLEY DSPEC 01 with a number of popular software products including Microsoft re Access 92x 0Z2MCALLISTER DO NOTE We strongly recommend that you back up any ScintiVision database files before performing manipulations on them outside of ScintiVision The Options menu Fig 209 includes an Always On Top a command which keeps the QA window on top of all other Fig 208 Detector Pick List windows no matter which window in ScintiVision or any other program might be active The Fixed Vertical Scale command adds flexibility in displaying Options control charts both on screen and on printouts for comparison with Always On Top other charts Fixed Vertical Scale Fig 209 QA Chart e Fixed Vertical Scale Off no check mark In this mode the HU MEME vertical scale of the graph is adjusted so that all points are shown to scale All points are black If one or more data points are substantially out of range the graph could be quite compressed vertically e Fixed Vertical Scale On check mark In this mode the vertical scale of the graph is set to show the upper and lower alarm limits as full scale The data points within the alarm limits are colored black Out of
52. Paste button To move a nuclide to the end of the library list Cut the nuclide from the list highlight the end entry and click on the Paste button Editing Nuclide Peaks When a nuclide is selected in the working LIB file the right half of the Editing dialog shows the peak list Note the column headers Rank Energy and Percent To sort the peak list by a particular parameter in the list click on the appropriate header To edit a peak either double click on the peak in the right hand list or click once on it then click on the Edit button This will open the Edit Library Peak dialog Fig 158 The Energy keV Gammas per 100 Disintegrations Photon Flags and Peak Flags will already be listed The Photon Flags are used to show the origin of the peak Only one can be selected at a time Gamma Ray G and X Ray X mean the peak energy is due to a 148 Edit Library Peak FT Associated Nuclide Cd 109 Energy ke RIT Gammas per 100 Disintegrations 3 61 DO Photon Flags C Gamma Ray G C X Ray K C Positron Decay P C Single Escape 5 C Double Escape D Peak Flags Key Line K Notin Average Cancel Fig 158 Edit or Manually Add Library Peak Values 5 MENU COMMANDS nuclear or atomic transition respectively Positron Decay P is used for the 511 keV peak Single Escape S peaks are peaks for which a single 511 keV photon has escaped the detector This can only occur for full
53. ROI DECAYPK ROI REPORT PRN SET DETECTOR 1 END LOOP These few examples have shown some of the possibilities of the JOB language in ScintiVision 222 10 JOB FILES 10 4 JOB Command Details ANALYZE spectrum filename This analyzes the spectrum in the same manner as the menu commands With no argument the spectrum in the display either the MCB or the buffer is analyzed according to the settings in the Analyze Settings Sample Type dialog With a spectrum filename as argument thespectrum on disk is analyzed according to the settings in the spectrum file The filename can include any of the variables shown in Section 10 2 To change the settings used in an analysis load the spectrum into the buffer using the RECALL command recall the new settings using the RECALL SETTINGS command then ANALYZE the spectrum in memory no filename The complete entry is passed to WAN32 as the command line so any of the command line options of WAN32 can be used The JOB file does not wait until the analysis is complete before proceeding to the next command however the results will be automatically output according to the settings printed file or program when the analysis is complete To force the JOB to wait until the analysis is complete put a WAIT 2 then a WAIT WAN32 EXE command after the ANALYZE command The JOB command might exit after the ANALYZE command but the QUIT command should not be used as the results will
54. ScintiVision s basic operations and move on quickly to full use We will cover the following functions Recalling a spectrum file from disk Performing a simple analysis of the spectrum Loading a nuclide library Using the library editor Energy calibration Efficiency calibration Getting a Detector ready for data acquisition To display help for any of the dialogs put the mouse pointer on the item and click the right mouse button to display the Whats This button Now click the left mouse button to display the help message After reading the help message click the left mouse button to close the message box To make the discussion easier and more realistic the sample files supplied on the Scinti Vision CD ROM will be used in the following examples Use Windows Explorer to verify that the following files have been copied to your working directory c User during installation SVDEMO1 SPC SVDEMO EFT SVDEMO2 SPC SVDEMO LIB SVDEMO ENT Before we actually begin here is a short note on the Detector and buffer concept used in ScintiVision A spectrum can exist in three places in ScintiVision e Inan MCB which we call a Detector e In computer memory a buffer e Inafile on disk The Detector is where the data are gathered from the HPGe detector Data can be displayed and manipulated directly in the Detector memory or a buffer They can be copied from the Detector to either the buffer or disk Actions on the data in the buffer or s
55. System tab of y M Collection Date 14 30 02 Time 112 05 52 PM the Analysis Options dialog M d yy h mm ss tt Analyze Settings Sample Type Cancel The collection date and time are the time used in the decay correction If the decay correction is enabled see the Sample tab of the Analysis Options dialog this is the date used in the correction formula Fig 51 General Tab Click on OK to use these settings until the next time they are changed See Acquire Acquisition Settings Section 5 2 1 and Analyze Settings Sample Type for other adjustable parameters If the collection date and time is before that of the spectrum acquisition the spectrum will be activity corrected back to the sample collection time While this is the normal use of this input if the collection date and time is after the acquisition time the decay correction will be made forward in time 49 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 5 1 1 2 Export The Export tab Fig 52 is used to specify the program arguments and file directory to be used when the Export function is selected Choose any program that can accept the spectrum filename as an argument on the command line Click on Browse to automatically select the complete proper path for the program Arguments The Arguments to the program can be specified as directly entered character strings or the user can File Settings General Export Import D
56. The only inputs required are Spectrum data to be searched e Anestimate of the FWHM of the peaks this can be a full FWHM calibration or just a single constant FWHM value approximating the expected width of peaks to be found The peak search provides e A list of peak centroids e Initial estimates of the background and peak area s computed as if these peaks were pure Gaussian singlets superimposed on a simple linear background Note that these centroids are accurate only for pure singlets therefore subsequent peak fitting see below is normally recommended for complete peak information in all cases 167 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 6 1 1 Peak Search Algorithm The spectrum is smoothed then a filtered spectrum F is calculated at channel i from the smoothed spectrum S F i S i 0 5x S i FWHM S i FWHM i where FWHM i is the calibrated FWHM value at channel i Around a Gaussian peak the filtered spectrum has a maximum when the center point of the window coincides with the center point of the peak i e when i center of peak If the smoothed spectrum contains a peak then the filtered spectrum will contain a minimum on each side of the peak These minima are negative The maxima obtained in this filtering process identify possible peak locations These peak candidates are further processed as discussed below 6 1 2 Background Method and Initial Peak Estimates Peak limits are obtained duri
57. These two windows are the central features of the ScintiVision 32 screen All other windows and most functions relate to the spectrum windows The Full Spectrum View shows the entire data memory of the Detector as defined in the configuration In addition it has a marker box showing which portion of the spectrum is displayed in the Expanded Spectrum View The Expanded Spectrum View contains a reverse color marker line at the horizontal position of the pixel representing the marker channel This marker can be moved with the mouse pointer as described in Section 4 3 1 and with the lt gt lt gt and lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt keys The spectrum display can be expanded to show more detail or contracted to show more data using the Zoom In and Zoom Out features Zooming in and out can be performed using the Toolbar buttons the Display menu commands or the rubber rectangle see Section 4 3 3 The rubber rectangle allows the spectrum to be expanded to any horizontal or vertical scale The baseline or zero level at the bottom of the display can also be offset with this tool allowing the greatest possible flexibility in showing the spectrum in any detail The Toolbar and Display menu zoom commands offer a quick way to change the display These change both the horizontal and vertical scales at the same time For Zoom In the horizontal width is reduced by about 6 of full width ADC conversion gain and the vertical scale is halved The Zoom In
58. To exit the InSight mode and return to the PHA display press Esc or go to the Insight section on the Amplifier 2 tab and click on the Stop button on the toolbar or Acquire Stop The PHA mode is set to STOP when in the InSight mode The Status Sidebar changes from the PHA mode controls to the InSight controls for adjusting the peak display Fig 87 On the left is a vertical scrollbar for adjusting the vertical offset of the waveform The value of the offset is shown on the display Double clicking the mouse in the scrollbar will set the vertical offset to the vertical value of the channel at the marker position This is to conveniently zoom in on a particular part of the waveform such as the tail for pole zeroing In the Auto trigger mode the display is updated every time a new pulse exceeds the trigger level To keep a single pulse displayed select Single Click on Reset to refresh the display to see the next pulse There will usually be one or two pulses in the pipeline that will be displayed before any change entered will be seen If the trigger is turned off the display will be redrawn periodically even if no pulse is there The Delay setting is the time delay between the pulse shown on the display and the trigger level crossing The value of the time delay is shown on the display Just as for the PHA mode display the vertical scale can be adjusted with the vertical adjustments The display can be set to Log mode but the pea
59. Wd ORE Sia eet T11 DD sus PEE OVE EDITED ON 78 Stabilizer 5i oro AT BR eg bee RE eae 79 Hich V OWACS oc onda Pee ane d RE EE RAO PANE ghee RRA 80 ADUT eS She Sie ner hb ea aie BAS Re eke ee ESSE MES 80 SAWS EEUU 81 PrESetS a E ARAS ROT Rada SU MUT a 81 5 2 10 3 InSight Mode v raso hers see hate eb UR Op ER tra cei a n 82 Mark Types coca lalo bas wine Won s bra e decode Br a ien e 84 23 2 10 4 Gain Stabilization cx uueseceey EC eO ERI AA 85 3 72 40 5 Zero staan 2 ates bee p X RR RI NX a eee pe hdd 86 5 2 10 6 ZDT Zero Dead Time Mode 0 0 0 00 87 ChoosngaZDI Mode 221224 pe Rd E RM ed 90 The NORM CORR Diagnostic Mode 90 More Information osos a eo ce tend ath ese E esce pem 91 5 2 10 7 Setting the Rise Time in Digital MCBs 4 91 do Calibrate Sae ne piso eid guia Ma A dra Oe SEE Oia a Bak 93 SOT Bnet ey A A yea EE hdd ed Meee tes Ree 94 Salil Introduction 4 ote seeded vis Ba at aaa gu ng esed deeds ens 94 5 3 1 2 Performing the Energy Calibration 0 00000 o 95 5 3 1 3 Speeding Up Calibration with a Library 04 97 5 3 1 4 Using Multiple Spectra for a Single Calibration 99 32 2 TCA Veo eese eh age aa eee stg nce an bre cD bi a entr uh E 99 3 52 T ATCT OIC UO Sos Wied aor betur Seba eder ra Wi tats de de Ue ag e ves 99 5 3 2 2 Performing the Efficiency Calibration 04 102 Saving the Efficie
60. ae wer d E EE xor ar RA 54 recall spectrum cesse er eoe e x mms 54 SAVE spectrum x ive o eae dpud ao e x oe a oad 55 Ele Dialog ik et bho eee eee E ae asa 40 EE MENO raros ae 48 Pile SCUINGS eL ic aco er CREE m x dee m Med 48 collection date and time 49 sample description 08 49 sample quantity car m ith 49 PING CAD na Avan d adc stt etti age de it 206 Flattop oti dra etti sata 68 83 85 SANG niai d cure ex oan adt ds ve aine 66 68 85 A O eL ER pu ag 67 68 85 Fraction Limit Test ina eet wee awk ea aloes 175 Pull Spectrum View ica sche rx otis 33 Sizing and moving 04 38 EWM ati Dtos ott a e RR 112 EWHM shoe atten top cond adeat or e 20 170 183 G30WINDSNI 63 66 2e sad RR ean 250 251 Gain I Sie ca TP 206 Gain stabilization o oo ooooooo 70 AA mat eati O 70 Gain Stabilizer dor ti 85 Gating ata aa 69 84 SAD tt olas Rotae caer 250 Halflife les nodo to bra a a E 103 Help Question mark o o oooo o o 42 Whats IS vc sitial a leit ew 41 high voltages ria p e ERE 26 70 Horizontal Scale 5 24h ot ER ERES 209 COME eii tog ate deat ake eti put ata a SecA 36 Insight mode dena etr tn ek wd Rie 83 ZOOM ts Rest eit ic RO ted ees 37 ZOOTE IB eie ace ae RR et orc pae om iets Reo 39 ZOOM UE coi i aho tte e pie Ro E RR 36 Import ares zie sehr s seas aeter a Re x ais 52 lile ure sot Mae Pon Breuer cas eo 52 SEU lit 52 sp ctum AAA orav qn deo 57 Inde
61. allow you to edit nuclide libraries in either ScintiVision or NuclideNavigator HI Microsoft Access format and the ability to use NuclideNavigator libraries as master libraries but not analysis libraries In addition all hardware setup including presets acquisition settings and multichannel buffer MCB settings is now performed in one dialog The multi nuclide MDA preset is available for the DSPEC Plus and other new MCBs Multiple windows allow you to view several spectra at once for easy comparison or to monitor the acquisition of several sample spectra ScintiVision has numerous automation features including powerful automated command sequences or job streams You can even create a desktop icon for a particular data collection and analysis job stream one double click that runs the entire procedure All sample analyses can be controlled from a single screen even across a network Remote PC workstations can control analyze and view the data being gathered in the counting room ScintiVision is designed to analyze spectra generated by any ORTEC MCB directly from the spectrum on display or from spectrum files on disk in any of several file formats including the advanced and archivable spc format In addition ScintiVision now includes the capability to directly read and write spectral data files in the sPE ASCII file format This release of ScintiVision offers two analysis engines In the primary analysis method a library direc
62. analysis steps if they do not meet the minimum criterion expressed by the Critical Level 169 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Critical Level 2 33y Background Variance 16 The net area of each peak is tested against this value and marked as PRESENT only if it exceeds this level In the case of peaks involved in multiplets the test will be repeated as necessary after the peaks have been deconvoluted 6 2 Peak Fitting After locating the peaks the FWHM must be more accurately determined as well as the position and net area for each peak The list of peaks found in the peak search is combined with the library list for further fitting Library peaks not located in the peak search are inserted into the peak list positions and FWHM s calculated with the calibration coefficients The first step in peak fitting is to divide the spectrum into regions containing one or more overlapping peaks Peaks and background in these regions are fitted alternately the appropriate type of background being determined by the energy and number of peaks in the region The peak amplitude width and position are found by minimizing x 6 2 1 Background Fit Two types of backgrounds are used in fitting Nal spectra polynomial and stepped At low energies the background is typically represented by a polynomial with up to 4 coefficients calculated by a weighted least squares fit At higher energies the background is linear with steps added at the centroid o
63. current Detector This duplicates Acquire Start and lt Alt 1 gt Stop Acquisition stops data collection This duplicates Acquire Stop and lt Alt 2 gt E 18 Clear Spectrum clears the detector or file spectrum from the window This duplicates Acquire Clear and lt Alt 3 gt Mark ROI automatically marks an ROI in the spectrum at the marker position according to the criteria in Section 5 8 4 This duplicates ROI Mark Peak and lt Insert gt ES Am Clear ROI removes the ROI mark from the channels of the peak currently selected with the marker This duplicates ROI Clear and Delete The next section of the Toolbar Fig 34 contains the buttons that control Era tog A the spectrum s vertical scale These commands are also on the Display menu In addition vertical scale can be adjusted by zooming in with the PIE Si Verteal 1 Scaling Section of mouse see Fig 40 Toolbar Log Vertical Log Lin Scale switches between logarithmic and linear scaling When switching from logarithmic to linear it uses the previous linear scale setting Its keyboard duplicate is Keypad lt gt Al Vertical Auto Scale turns on the autoscale mode a linear scale that automatically adjusts until the largest peak shown is at its maximum height without overflowing the display Its keyboard duplicate is Keypad lt gt The field to the left of these two buttons displays LOG if the scale is logarithmic or indicates the current vertical
64. duplicated Alt M and by F2 which toggles between Off Mark and UnMark ROIs can also be marked with the rubber rectangle and right mouse button menu see Section 4 3 3 and as described in Section 5 8 4 5 8 3 UnMark This sets the ROI status to the unmark or reset condition In this state the channels are unmarked with the ROI bit as the cursor is moved with or lt gt into the channel Moving the marker with the mouse does not alter the ROI in this mode This function is duplicated by Alt U gt and by F2 which toggles between Off Mark and UnMark 155 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 5 8 4 Mark Peak This function marks an ROI in the spectrum at the marker position in one of two ways 1 Ifthe spectrum is calibrated the region is centered on the marker with a width of three times the calibrated FWHM There does not need to be a peak at the marker position 2 Ifthe spectrum is not calibrated the region is centered on the peak located within two channels of the marker and as wide as the peak If the peak search fails or if the peak is not well formed no ROI is marked There is no limit on the size of a peak or ROI therefore in some uncalibrated spectra large ROIs could be marked ROIs can also be marked this way with the ROI Ins button on the Status Sidebar the Mark ROI button on the Toolbar Keypad lt Ins gt and Insert See also Mark ROI on the right mouse button menu Section 5 10
65. energy peaks above 1 022 MeV Double Escape D peaks are peaks for which two 511 keV photons have escaped the detector Both single and double escape peaks are broader than gamma ray peaks Neither can be used for activity calculations because the intensity of the peak is not related directly to the intensity of the full energy peak Nonetheless these can be included in the library to account for the peak in the spectrum The Not In Average A flag in the Peak Flags section of the dialog should be set for these peaks All the peaks marked as Key Line K must be present before the nuclide will be listed as present on the report If no lines are marked as key lines the nuclide will be listed as present if the first line is in the spectrum Some old libraries might have these flags set in an unwanted manner These libraries should be checked before use Adding Nuclide Peaks To add a peak Click on the peak just below the desired insertion point in the peak list then click on Insert This will open the Edit Library Peak dialog all the fields will be blank Enter the necessary information for the peak and click on OK Rearranging the Peak List The entries in the peak list can be rearranged with the Cut and Paste buttons Several peaks can be cut at one time from the list then pasted back into the list into a different order Cut peaks remain queued up for pasting last one first Each relocated nuclide will retain its energy and count
66. energy to gamma rays emitted by other isotopes in the sample The peaks from the two gamma rays cannot be separated correctly using conventional analysis so the activity for one isotope cannot be correctly determined ScintiVision can perform library based peak stripping as an alternative to deconvolution to obtain peak areas of the components of a multiplet This alternative method also referred to as peak interference correction uses peak areas from other parts of the spectrum to determine the areas of some of the components and calculates the remaining areas Library based peak stripping uses the library specified on the Sample tab under Analyze Settings Sample T ype As the first step ScintiVision searches the library for isotopes with severely overlapping gamma rays The criterion for severe overlap is that the peaks are within two channels of one another regardless of the energy per channel For peaks this close the peak areas will be more accurate if they are found indirectly Any such peaks are automatically marked in the library as being too close together For example the only useful gamma ray emitted by Ra is 185 99 keV The peak overlaps the 185 72 keV peak of U If these two isotopes are both in the library Ra and the 185 72 keV 25U peak are flagged when the library is read Table 5 shows some other common examples These energies are from Erdmann and Soyka Other references might use different energies but the overl
67. first source are marked each one for all Detectors If there is a second source the Ready to count source dialog will open again for beginning the count on the second calibration source Place the source on the Detector and click on OK When the count is done the PC will beep 109 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 The Mark Peak dialog will again be displayed this time for the first peak of the second source at the energy specified earlier for the first Detector Locate Source 1 Cs 137 in small bottle at 661 60 the peak in the spectrum window expand the display to show the peak clearly and mark the peak as an ROI Click on Marked after the peak is marked Fig 110 Mark Peak Dialog The same screen appears for marking the same peak for the other Detectors For each Detector click on Marked after the peak is marked Continue this sequence until all peaks for the second source are marked each one for all Detectors If more than two sources are used continue this sequence until all peaks for each source are marked each one for all Detectors This calibration sequence will then be saved and can accessed later with the Run Calibration Sequence menu item 5 3 6 Run Calibration Sequence This command allows you to access the learned calibration sequences discussed in the previous section for quick and easy routine calibrations The same source s can be used many times to quickly run the p
68. full scale linear value The horizontal scaling section Fig 35 follows next It includes 4056 l j Ed ki a field that shows the current window width in channels and the Zoom In Zoom Out Center and Baseline Zero buttons These commands are also on the Display menu In addition horizontal scale can be adjusted by zooming in with the mouse see Fig 40 Fig 35 Horizontal Scaling Section of Toolbar B Zoom In decreases the horizontal full scale of the Expanded Spectrum View according to the discussion in Section 4 1 so the peaks appear magnified This duplicates Display Zoom In and Keypad lt gt 35 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 H Zoom Out increases the horizontal full scale of the Expanded Spectrum View according to the discussion in Section 4 1 so the peaks appear reduced in size This duplicates Display Zoom Out and Keypad lt gt Center moves the marker to the center of the screen by shifting the spectrum without moving the marker from its current channel This duplicates Display Center and Keypad lt 5 gt i Baseline Zero switches to autoscale mode and sets the baseline of the Expanded Spectrum View to zero Autoscale is then switched off NOTE In addition to the preceding commands note the Full View command on the Display menu duplicated by lt Alt F7 gt This function adjusts the horizontal and vertical scaling to display the entire spectrum in the Expanded Spectrum View The right mos
69. has not been properly set up Refer to the Control Panel Printers function install the appropriate printer and select it as outlined in the Microsoft Windows documentation Detector Error Macro Micro An unresolved error originating in the Detector The offending Detector command is shown together with the macro and micro error codes If the error persists the error codes should be recorded and the factory should be contacted These error codes are explained in the hardware manual for the Detector Detector busy or Segment not responding This indicates the Detector was unable to respond within a certain time limit due to other activities such as multiple instances of ScintiVision accessing the Detector at the same time or otherwise heavy use of the Detector interface Detector Error The selected Detector could not be STARTed or STOPped due to some unresolved error condition Detector Not Located A Detector could not be located at the configured address 266 APPENDIX C JOB FILE ERROR MESSAGES Do you want to save buffer A function that would destroy the buffer such as COPY or EXIT queries you unless the buffer has not been modified since last being saved Do you want to save Library The nuclide library has been modified by the library editor but you have not yet saved the changes DOS 4 0 Application WinExec error 13 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other applic
70. having to open it Spectra up to 16k Filename SETE 16384 channels can be recalled and Files of type Integer SPC j Cancel analyzed J Show Description Integer Data Format 512 Channels Co 60 Co 57 amp Cs 137 20 ml bottles on endcap S N 1721 1759 When the spectrum is successfully recalled ScintiVision loads its descrip tors start time live time real time Detector and sample descriptions and calibration information if any and displays the filename on the Title Bar Fig 59 Recall a Spectrum File For spectrum files containing multiple spectra such as ZDT mode in the DSPEC Pro or Plus both spectra are automatically recalled 5 1 3 Save Save As These functions save the current spectrum to disk The Save Spectrum File dialog Save in amp User El Al exi Fig 60 opens when Save As is m SVDemoZa spo selected when Save is selected for a a emocc spc spectrum that has no previous filename SvDemolAn svDemoZd soc associated with it or after any operation SvDemol Spe R S Demola spe is performed that can alter the spectrum SVDemolb spe SVDemolc spc zos SVDemold spc Enter any valid filename consisting of an SyDemo2 Anl optional drive and directory a filename SvDemo2 Spc and an optional extension in the File name field and click on Save refer to Filename SvDemo25pc Section 4 5 for details on using this dialog The recommended and default extension are s
71. here to make the desired plots or to be used in the command line mode Recall a settings file 21 xi Lookin E Trl q4 El ex zz E a RedPlot set File name RedPlot set Files of type Settings Files Cancel Fig 219 The Recall a Settings File Dialog The Print Plot dialog is shown in Fig 220 The printer can be selected here from the list of available Windows printers The Properties button displays a dialog for setting the printer properties and is different for each printer The number of copies can be selected to make multiple copies This number is reset to 1 after every print session 243 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Print Plot x m Printer Name HP DeskJet 550C Printer H Status Default printer Ready Type HP DeskJet 550C Printer Where LPT1 Comment Number of copies fi OK Cancel Fig 220 The Print Plot Dialog 11 1 2 Options The Options menu is shown in Fig 221 These menu items control the Options plot settings and WINPLOTS operation Plot Save Settings on Exit 11 1 2 1 Plot Always on Top The Plot Options dialog is shown in Fig 222 These settings are all Fig 221 The Options Menu stored in the default settings file and reloaded when WINPLOTS is next started The Title is printed at the top of every plot just above the sample description If no title is specified a default title is generated which is composed of the spectru
72. is referred to as the Decay Limit Test and the limit is entered on the Options tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type Section 5 5 1 1 6 4 4 Nuclide Activity After all the peaks have been properly identified and decomposed the nuclide activity is calculated The individual peak activities are calculated first starting with the net area of each peak divided by the acquisition live time to give the counts per second detected This is then adjusted by the calibrated efficiency supplied to give the disintegrations per second at the source This is then divided by the yield branching ratio for the peak to give the activity in becquerels The attenuation correction is also applied The nuclide activity is computed as an average of the individual peak activities weighted by the yields of these peaks as follows _ y Peak Activity x Branching Ratio Nuclide Activity y Branching Ratio 22 The uncertainty in this value is computed by adding the peak uncertainties in quadrature as follows E Uncertainty E Y PeakUncertaintyy 23 Number of Peaks The nuclide activity can also be decay corrected which is based on the time elapsed between sample collection and data acquisition and the nuclide half life 176 6 ANALYSIS METHODS 6 4 5 Statistical Detection Limits These are only used in connection with library peaks not found in the spectrum to provide a lower limit for activities based upon the counting statistics
73. is to specify the base filename of the save file File Prefix and MCB Properties whether the filename is to be automatically incremented after each Fig 66 Acquire Menu use Auto Increment The File Prefix can be up to eight alphanumeric characters However if Auto Increment is specified the limit is seven ZDT Display Select F3 characters The first one to seven quien SORUDUR FE Start Save Report characters of the filename arethe i ns iClear at Start Save File o file prefix The remaining charac Rey et iaei lten E 4 i ix ance ters are the sequence numbers This Mas Fie Pref emen starts with the number entered in Ask on Start Options the Save File field The number mm o increments to the number of allowed characters e g AAAAAA99 Acquisition Presets then restarts at zero e g AAAAAADO rs T i detector P409348 with Co amp 0 3 inches from enc f ample Description The prefix must be short enough to accommodate the number of Sample Size 1 00000 Kg expected files The filename is l expanded to eight characters with F Colection Date 5 2 02 Bien 12 08 52 PM zeros If the Auto Increment box alate Tenes 1s checked the filename will be incremented by 1 each time the Start Save Report is done For example if 0 were entered for prefix svx the first filename would be svxooooo the second would be Svx00001 and so on
74. learn more about exceptions to the Windows Firewall click on the What are the risks of allowing exceptions link at the bottom of the dialog 4 Click on OK to close the dialog No restart is required ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 5 Windows Firewall x General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is blocking incoming network connections except for the programs and services selected below Adding exceptions allows some programs to work better but might increase your security risk Programs and Services File and Printer Sharing O Remote Assistance L Remote Desktop L UPnP Framework Add Program Add Patt Edit Delete IV Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program What are the risks of allowing exceptions Fig 3 Turn on File and Printer Sharing 2 2 Enabling Additional ORTEC Device Drivers You can enable other device drivers later with the Windows Add Remove Programs utility on the Control Panel Select Connections 32 from the program list choose Add Remove then elect to Modify the software setup This will reopen the Instrument Setup dialog so you can mark or unmark the driver checkboxes as needed close the dialog restart the PC when instructed then re run the MCB Configuration program as described in Step 8 on page 6 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL 3 1 Introduction This chapter provides a series of straightforward examples to help you become familiar with
75. manipulation comparison and analysis tools Password protection allows you to secure both operator menus and access to hardware controls All menu commands can be password protected 1 1 MCA Emulation An MCA in its most basic form is an instrument that sorts and counts events in real time This sorting is based on some characteristic of these events and the events are grouped together into bins for counting purposes called channels The most common type of multichannel analysis and the one of greatest interest to nuclear spectroscopists is pulse height analysis PHA PHA events are signal pulses originating from a detector and the characteristic of interest is the pulse height or voltage which is proportional to the particle or photon energy An analog to digital converter ADC is used to convert each pulse into a channel number so that each channel corresponds to a narrow range of pulse heights or voltages As pulses arrive over time the MCA will collect in memory a distribution of the count of pulses with respect to pulse height a series of memory locations corresponding to ADC channels will contain the count of pulses of similar although not necessarily identical height This distribution arranged in order of ascending energies is commonly referred to as a spectrum To be useful the acquired spectrum must be available for storage and or analysis and is displayed on a graph whose horizontal axis represents the height of the
76. most important functions of the ScintiVision program are to display the spectrum data and to provide an easy and straightforward way to manipulate the data This is accomplished using the Display menu functions shown in Fig 175 and their Y Logarithmic Keypad associated accelerators The Display functions are available in Automatic Keypad both the Detector and buffer modes Baseline Zoom Zoom In Keypad 5 9 1 Detector Zoom Dut Keypad Center Keypad 5 Selecting this function opens the Pick Detector list shown in Eull View Alt F7 Fig 176 Click on a Detector on this list to display its memory in the Full and Expanded Spectrum Views The Pick Detector list shows the available Detectors listed by Detector number and a brief description Detector Buffer F4 or Alt 6 Preferences Fig 175 Display Menu 157 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 This is duplicated by the droplist on the Toolbar see page 36 In addition the first 12 Detectors on the list can be selected by pressing lt Ctrl F1 gt for the first Detector in the pick list 0000106 DART Portable unit 3 Ctrl F2 for the second Detector and so on through Ctrl F12 gt see Section 9 4 7 The current pick list is selected from the Master Detector List using Services Edit Detector List as discussed in Section 5 7 5 Whenever the system is reconfigured Fig 177 will be displayed so you can remake the list Yes leave it as
77. new material the Attenuation Table of coefficients will be displayed Otherwise a Check the mass attenuation data list for missing elements message will be displayed 127 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 8 Click on the Constituents droplist and check spelling and spacing against the Worksheet s droplist To correct an entry click on it to load it into the bottom section of the Absorber Definition dialog make the corrections click on Enter then click on OK to close the dialog Return to the Attenuation Worksheet and click again on Calculate 9 Once the new absorber s attenuation coefficients have been calculated the final step is to either save the new absorber to the database click on Save at the bottom of the sidebar or delete the new entry Delete Absorber If you save it the absorber list at the top of the Worksheet will become active and will now list your new material 10 To close the Attenuation Coefficient feature including Worksheet table and graph click on the Worksheet s x box NOTE The Linear and Mass attenuations are stored separately in the database If you wish to use both each must be added calculated and saved Editing or Deleting the Constituents in an Absorber Suppose that in our example we used an incorrect chemical formula for sodium iodide Na I instead of Nal and now wish to correct the error To do this 1 On the Attenuation Worksheet sidebar select NalI TI from the Absorber dr
78. not be printed if ScintiVision is not running ASK CALIBRATION This asks for the name of a file containing the calibration to be used as the internal calibration After entering the filename the file is read and the calibration is loaded ASK COLLECTION This asks for the date and time for the decay correction It is the same as the date and time entry in the Acquire Acquisition Settings dialog If any Ask on Start options are checked the START command in the gos file will also open this dialog ASK CONFIRM lt text gt This opens a dialog showing the text and waits until you click on OK ASK DESCRIPTION This asks for the sample description to be put in the spectrum file and on the report It is the same as the sample description entry in the Acquire Acquisition Settings dialog and the sample description entry in the File Settings menu If the Ask on Start option is checked 223 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 the START command in the gos file will also open this dialog If the Ask on Start option is checked the SAVE command in the Jos file will also open this dialog ASK LIBRARY This asks for the name of the library to be used as the internal library After entering the filename the library file is loaded ASK OPERATOR This asks for the operator s name to be put in the spectrum file and on the report It is also stored in the Registry ASK OPTIONS This asks for the svp sample defaults file filename of t
79. not connected or the detector is warm The detector might require 3 6 hours after filling before it is cold enough to take bias 3 2 8 4 Amplifier Settings Click on the Amplifier tab Fig 30 The amplifier shaping time can be set Amplifier abc Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Preset ee ee Gain 19 50 Shaping Time Pole Zero ae low to moderate count rates ps REM de sonus j ferm The value of the shaping time in us is given in the hardware manual Fine 0 4874 Resistor Feedback Coarse Ix 40 i Preamplifier Type If you have a transistor reset pre amplifier Plus Series select it from Needs Auto PZ the Preamplifier Type droplist Skip the following subsection on pole lose zeroing and go to the discussion on Fig 30 The 92X II Amplifier Tab adjusting amplifier gain Click on Close to apply the new MCB hardware settings Automatic Pole Zero Select Acquire then Start to start the Detector counting Next place a Pulse Ht Analysis source such as Co of sufficient strength to produce a few percent dead ise eere time in the Detector During data collection the dead time is shown on the Hu s center right of the display as in Fig 31 Live 30000 00 Dead 358 Next return to Acquire MCB Properties and click on the Amplifier tab Fig 31 Go to the Pole Zero section of the dialog and click on St
80. on the scroll bar button and drag it slowly across the different colors When the desired color is displayed in the box beside the OK button release the mouse button The spectrum window will immediately change color To cancel a color change return the slider button to its starting color or close the Spectrum Colors palette by clicking on Cancel or pressing lt Esc gt To reset the color values to the original ScintiVision colors click on Defaults To accept the color changes click on OK These color changes will be recalled the next time ScintiVision is started NOTE TheSpectrum Colors affect only the spectrum windows The colors of the remaining features on the screen must be changed using the Windows Control Panel which will also of course affect the appearance of all other Windows applications on this PC 5 9 10 4 Peak Info Font Color This function opens the Font dialog see Fig 183 It allows you to select the font type size and color used to display Peak Info data in the text box in the spectrum windows see Section 5 4 2 Fig 117 l i21 x Font style Size q 10 Cancel Small Fonts 12 System 14 Y Tahoma 18 iT Times New Roman 24 Y Verdana zi Effects Sample Strikeout e Underline TM Color MA Teal Y Script Westem Fig 183 Peak Info Font Selection 162 5 10 Right Mouse Button Menu Figure 184 shows the right mouse button menu To open it position the mouse
81. pole zero As with any system the DSPEC jr 2 0 should be optimized any time the detector is replaced or if the flattop width is changed For optimization to take place the DSPEC jr 2 0 must be processing pulses The detector should be connected in its final configuration before optimizing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate causes a dead time of 5 Dead time is displayed on the DSPEC jr 2 0 front panel and on the Status Sidebar during data acquisition Select either the Resistive Feedback or Transistor Reset option and click on Start Auto The optimize command is sent to the DSPEC jr 2 0 at this time and if the DSPEC jr 2 0 is able to start the operation a series of short beeps sounds to indicate that optimization is in progress When optimizing is complete the beeping stops During optimization pole zeroes are performed for several rise time values and the DSPEC jr 2 0 is cycled through all the rise time values for the determination of the optimum tilt IU S Patent 5 212 825 U S Patent 5 872 363 U S Patent 5 821 533 66 5 MENU COMMANDS values As all of the values for all the combinations are maintained in the DSPEC jr 2 0 the optimize function does not need to be repeated for each possible rise time The optimization can take from 1 to 10 minutes depending on count rate You should repeat the optimization if you change the flattop width The effect of optimization
82. real time for collection Real time 510 Dead time 41 12 Detector Geometry IDs De 0 Detector description Detector system Nal detector 1 lead shield Efficiency date Calibration a Filename SvDemol Spc Created 07 May 1998 12 01 07 07 May 1998 13 30 05 Energy date Energy calibration Zero offset 5 897 keV Gain 3 026 keV channel factors Quadratic 0 767E 03 keV channel 2 Fig 187 ScintiVision Analysis Report Page 1 PROGRAM NAME This is the name of the program that produced this report it does not change LABORATORY NAME This is the name of the laboratory as entered under Analyze Settings Sample Type INPUT REPORT CODE This number represents the operator input requests and the status on the program s ability to fulfill these requests Normally this code just confirms that the proper analysis was performed In the case where the output report does not appear to be the correct form this code can help locate the difficulty 179 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 ANALYSIS VERSION NUMBER As updates to the internal algorithms are made this number is changed It is only useful when requesting assistance for a particular spectrum The second line of the header is specified on the System tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type The top two lines are repeated on each page of the report ANALYSIS DATE The date the analysis was performed SAMPLE DESCRIPTION The sample description is from the spectrum file The
83. remain ing functions are performed automatically Mark the Overwrite repeat previous Background QA Measurement Ensure that detector is free of any samples and press OK Start to continue Cancel Overwrite repeat previous background measurement Fig 200 Begin Count for Background QA background measurement check box click on it if the previous measurement was in error For example if a problem was detected and fixed and this run is to verify the repairs check the box so the bad value is not kept in the database Click on OK If the background is outside the set limits a warning similar to Fig 201 is displayed QA Acceptance Threshold Has Been Violated EJ Eg m Violation Total Background Minimum Maximum 5 000 174 40 50 00 Status r Recommendation Correct conditions contributing to the excursion of this parameter and or obtain supervisor assistance in establishing new threshold value s NOTE that any further data acquisition may be inhibited on this detector until this violation has been eliminated Fig 201 Background Warning Message 195 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 8 3 Measure Sample This command opens the Sample QA Measurement dialog Fig 202 It contains a reminder to place the QA source on the Detector Click on Overwrite to replace the last measurement Click on OK Start to begin the count The QA source spectra are collected for
84. stops acquisition in the selected Detector This duplicates the Stop Toolbar button the Stop command on the right mouse button menu and Acquire Stop discussed in Section 5 2 4 9 3 3 Clear lt Alt 3 gt Alt 3 clears the displayed Detector s histogram data and its descriptors e g real time live time This accelerator duplicates the Clear Spectrum Toolbar button the Clear command on the right mouse button menu and Acquire Clear discussed in Section 5 2 5 207 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 9 3 4 Copy to Buffer Alt 5 gt Alt 5 copies the histogram data from the selected Detector to the buffer along with its descriptors e g live time real time and displays the spectrum in a new window This duplicates the Copy to Buffer command on the right mouse button menu and Acquire Copy to Buffer Section 5 2 6 9 3 5 Detector Buffer Alt 6 Alt 6 switches the display between the histogram of the spectrum in the selected Detector and the spectrum in the buffer The buffer will have the memory size of the spectrum that was last transferred from Detector or disk file The Detector list on the right side of the Toolbar indicates whether the buffer or a particular Detector is currently displayed and the Status Sidebar shows the presets for the displayed data This duplicates F4 and Display Detector Buffer see Section 4 6 2 9 3 6 Narrower Wider lt gt lt gt The lt gt key increa
85. tab under File Settings The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 LOAD LIBRARY name lib This loads the nuclide library specified and duplicates the function of Select File under the Library menu The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 LOAD PBC name pbc This loads the Peak Background Correction specified and duplicates the function of Select File under the Library menu The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 221 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 LOCK Pwd Name This locks the current Detector using Pwd as the password If the optional Name parameter is missing the Locked name defaults to Job This password is retained in the JOB file and used with any JOB commands so that the user does not need to re enter the password LOOP lt repetitions gt END LOOP This pair executes multiple times all the commands between LOOP and END LOOP The number of execution times is specified by lt repetitions gt Each command must be given on a separate line A value of 0 executes once A LOOP with no END LOOP statement executes once The loop count value can be included in any text by typing three question marks in the text where the loop count is to be inserted The loop count replaces with three characters using leading zeros if necessary The loop variables Loop and LOoP1 can be included in any te
86. the analysis program In the Assay from Certificate section select the Date field and enter the calibration date from the source data sheet as well as 102 Calibr 7 X1 m Efficiency fo 04067811 at 1661 62 keV Table 2 Pairs Recall Save Mode Linear Fig 98 Efficiency Calibration Sidebar 5 MENU COMMANDS the calibration Time Enter the gammas second from the source in the Activity field and set the units to GPS The Uncertainty is the total uncertainty for the nuclide as given in the source certificate This includes the uncertainty for the activity the half life and the yield Advance to the Nuclide Half Life box Efficiency Calculation Worksheet Lt Ext and enter the half life in days for this sj nuclide if the value from the library is i igieney 0 04067811 Cancel not shown The use of the Library r Assay from Certificate m Peak Measured from Spectrum checkbox is discussed in Section 5 3 2 3 Date or Oct1997 120000 Date 30 0ct97 11 52 48 Note that the peak count rate value M d yy h mm ss tt CPS 1058 8 Counts Sec in the Peak Measured Nuclide from Spectrum section is already Activity 26076 0 fars Half Life 10334 025 Days filled in based on the selected peak Uncertainty 5 0000 Gammas 100d 9 9982E 0 From Library IV Cs 137 When the values are correct click on Calculate Efficiency The e
87. the preset time and analyzed automatically The analysis results are compared with the limits If the result is outside the limits a warning is displayed The results are also stored in the QA database Sample QA Measurment i2 x Sample Type Qa47321 sdf This is QA for the 473214 11 sample Cancel Overwrite repeat previous sample measurement NOTE Ensure that the correct sample is properly mounted at the Detector and press OK Start to continue Fig 202 Starting Sample Type QA Measurement 8 4 Status The QA status for the currently selected Detector is displayed as shown in Fig 203 Click on OK to close the dialog QA Status for this Detector Measurements Recorded for this Detector Background only 0 Total Sample type and Background 0 21x Minimum Low Background CPS 0 5 000 Total Activity Bq 0 50000 0 80000 0 25000 0 90000 Peak Shift keV Av FWHM Ratio Latest Measurement 9 LOW D 9 ox 700000 o k 0 25000 1 200 0 50000 1 500 Fig 203 Showing Status of QA Measurements for a Detector 196 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE 8 5 Control Charts The Control Chart functions display the PERMAN data stored in the QA database as a control p chart The displayed data can be scrolled 1 DSPEC 075 backward or forward across the screen so eee TEGE
88. the acquisition and analysis parameters into the working set for the selected Detector or buffer This is the same as recalling a svp file in the Analyze Settings Sample Type type dialog The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 RECALL ROI file roi This marks the ROI channels in the selected data memory or Detector to conform to the table in the disk file which can be an ROI UFO SPC or LIB file The data contents of the Detector or buffer are not altered by this operation The previous ROIs are cleared The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 This command has the same function as Recall File under ROI This command can be used in generating reports that look for specific nuclides library directed as opposed to peak search directed For example a calibration spectrum is run containing Co and Cs and ROIs marked on the 122 keV and 662 keV peaks The calibration is saved as spectrum file coBcs cHN and as ROT file coBcs Ror The command sequence is RECALL CALIB COBCS CHN RECALL ROI COBCS ROI REPORT COBCS RPT These commands report the values only for the 122 keV and 662 keV peaks Compare with the example for MARK_PEAKS As usual the loop count value can be included in any text by typing three question marks in the text where the loop count is to be inserted REM Text This line is a comment remark and is ignored during command pro
89. the changes 250 APPENDIX A STARTUP A 2 1 GSA Program The GSA program performs the analysis of a complete spectrum This analysis engine is run by ScintiVision and can also be run by other programs GSA reads the command line to control the analysis The command line is GSA file SPC DEBUG file INI file SPC This is the spectrum filename and it must be the first argument For a complete analysis it must contain all the analysis parameters and calibrations The output files are the input file name with the extension of uFo for the binary output and the extension of RPT for the text output DEBUG This optional parameter controls the output of debugging information on the GSA window ScintiVision sets this parameter when ScintiVision is run in debug mode This produces considerable output and significantly slows the execution It must be the second or third argument file INI This optional file is the INI file such as B30WINDS INI for controlling the analysis It overrides the normal default file If the file cannot be found or read the default file name is used If the default file cannot be found or read the internal options are used By selecting different INI files for different spectra different analyses can be produced A 2 2 G30WINDS INI The G30WINDS INI file contains initial or default values for the analysis done by GSA It is read by GSA before the spectrum file is read The contents are shown below The f
90. the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the Detector is currently locked with a password see the password discussion in the MAESTRO user manual Read Write indicates that the Detector is unlocked Read Only means it is locked x Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset RANDT266 MCB 132 Sample Acquisition Start Time Access 15 09 06 Monday September 22 2003 Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode D5J2 001 00123 PHA Fig 75 DSPEC jr 2 0 About Tab 71 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Status Figure 76 shows the Status tab There xi are 21 values monitored at all times Amplifier Amplifier2 AmpifierPRO ADC Stabilizer You can select any six of these to be High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset displayed simultaneously en the Status ral ERR Power Failure Error tab You would normally pick the six M DIM 24V State Of Health ERR that are most important to you The values you select can be changed at DM 12V State Of Heath ERA any time so you can view any of them z DIM 12V State Of Heath ERR as needed Two types of values are v DIM 24V State Of Health ERR presented OK or ERR and numeric Jor Temperature State Of Health ERR value The state of health SOH are all OK or ERR If the state is OK the paramet
91. the file REM Text This line is a comment remark and is ignored during command processing REPORT filename Writes the ROI marked peak report not the analysis report to the disk filename or to the printer PRN RUN program Executes a Windows application program or non Windows application See your Microsoft documentation for more details RUN MINIMIZED program Same as the RUN command above except that the application is run initially as an icon minimized rather than as a normal window SAVE file chn n Saves the current spectrum to disk in the format specified in the File Settings menu SAVE CALIBRATION file CLS Saves the current energy efficiency and TCC calibrations to the specified crs file SAVE ROI file roi Saves the table of ROIs in the display to the specified disk file 215 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 SEND MESSAGE text Sends the text as a command to the Detector SET BUFFER Selects the buffer same as SET DETECTOR 0 SET DETECTOR number Selects the Detector or buffer 0 SET NAME STRIP file chn Sets the strip file See STRIP below SET PRESET CLEAR Clears all presets in active spectrum SET PRESET COUNT cn Sets the ROI Count preset to n counts SET PRESET INTEG lt n gt Sets the ROI Integral preset to n counts SET PRESET LIVE lt t gt Sets the live time preset to t seconds SET PRESET REAL lt t gt Sets the real
92. the largest peak shown is at its maximum height without overflowing the display It also toggles the vertical scale of the spectrum display between the automatic and manual modes If 139 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 the logarithmic scale was enabled the display is switched to linear This function is duplicated by Keypad lt gt and the Vertical Auto Scale Toolbar button 5 9 7 Baseline Zoom Baseline Zero switches to autoscale mode then sets and keeps the baseline of the expanded display at zero counts Autoscale is then switched off This function is duplicated by the Baseline Zoom Toolbar button 5 9 8 Center This function forces the marker to the center of the screen by shifting the spectrum without moving the marker from its current channel This function is only required when moving the marker with the mouse the keyboard functions for moving the marker automatically shift the spectrum to center the marker when the marker travels past the end of the current expanded display Center is duplicated by Keypad 5 and the Center button on the Toolbar 5 9 9 Full View Full View adjusts the horizontal and vertical scaling to display the entire spectrum in the Expanded Spectrum View This command is duplicated by Alt F7 5 9 10 Preferences This displays the options available for selecting the screen colors Points and spectrum display options The submenu is shown in Fig 180 Fill ROI e Fill 5 9 10 1 Points Fill
93. the same function as the Live Time field on the Presets tab under Acquire MCB Properties Section refer to the discussion describing that dialog for additional information SET PRESET REAL seconds This sets the real time preset for the active Detector The preset is set to the entered value With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when the real time reaches this limit This command has the same function as the Real Time field on the Presets tab under Acquire MCB Properties Section refer to the discussion describing that dialog for additional information 235 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 SET PRESET UNCERTAINTY lt limit gt lt low chan high chan This sets the statistical preset to the uncertainty based on the counts in the region between the low and high channels This is only available in some MCBs e g DSPEC 92X II See Section 4 2 1 1 for details on the calculation The low channel must be greater than 1 and the high channel must be greater than the low channel plus 7 SMOOTH This smooths the data in the buffer its function is the same as Smooth under the Calculate menu five point area preserving binomial smoothing algorithm is used The original contents of the buffer are lost START This initiates data collection in the selected Detector This function is the same as Start under the Acquire menu The Ask on Start questions as defined in Acquire Acquisition Settings will be aske
94. the sample spectrum before the above corrections The PBC value is added to the background and the new error is calculated by multiplying the percent error by the ratio of the uncorrected area to the corrected area This method improves on older PBC methods because the peak count rates are stored in the PBC table for each energy in the spectrum and not the average rate for an isotope This removes the dependence on the efficiency calibration in the PBC table yielding more accurate results because the nuclides in the background are not in the same geometry as the sample meaning that the efficiency calibration is not the one to be used 178 7 THE REPORT A typical ScintiVision report is shown in Figs 187 through 192 The exact details of the report depend on the options selected the spectrum the calibration and the libraries 7 1 First Page The first page of the report Fig 187 shows all the bookkeeping data that are stored with the spectrum files along with other messages about the analysis Input Report code Analysis version number Analysis date Program name ORTEC s V I 0 GSAS I1W95 18 O1 MAY 2002 17 04 14 Page 1 Laboratory name ORTEC Spectrum name svdemol spc Sample description Sample description Co 60 Co 57 amp Cs 137 20 ml bottles on endcap S N 1721 1759 Spectrum Filename user 4svdemol spc Acquisition information Spectrum collection date Start time 07 May 1998 09 35 17 Live time 300 Live and
95. the scale factor The column label is entered by the operator If decay correction is requested the decay corrected activity is also printed If the nuclide is not found the MDA value is printed with a lt symbol after the nuclide name and no error The total activity is the scaled sum of the decay corrected activity if present or the time of count activity The MDA values are not included in the total 187 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Counts uncertainty ORTEC S V I ORTEC 0 GSAS I1W95 18 0l MAY 2002 17 04 14 Page 3 Spectrum name svdemol spc FRENTE SUMMARY OF NUCLIDES IN SAMPLE ttrt TIME OF COUNT UNCERTAINTY 1 SIGMA NUCLIDE ACTIVITY COUNTING TOTAL Total uncertainty Activity in sample Bq Kg o A O O A A RT RT ETT TT TTL HHHH 4 9016E 03 0 18 5 56 5 8764E 03 0 54 5 40 9 6778E 03 0 26 5 57 papa o RA SUMMARY Sea Sse saa ASAS RNA TOTAL ACTIVITY 9 3 to 1698 7 keV 2 0455644E 04 Bq Kg Analyzed by Callie Kitts Total activity in sample Sign off Reviewed by Supervisor Laboratory ORTEC Fig 192 Final Analysis Summary 188 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE The accuracy and reproducibility of results of a data acquisition system should be verified on a periodic basis Quality assurance QA in ScintiVision supplies a means for doing this in accordance with ANSI N13 30 and N42 14 The detector shield background detector efficiency peak shape and peak drift can be tracked with warning and accept
96. the selected nuclide in Update the library aes A 3 MDA Preset Coefficients The MDA field is labeled Correction Correction cA A 0 000000 because MAESTRO does not use Nuckde ag 10M gt Sr efficiency In this case the Eff value ty kev LITEET is set to 1 0 The Yield value is taken from the library If the Correction value entered is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally Fig 78 DSPEC jr 2 0 MDA Preset Tab 76 5 2 10 2 digiBASE Amplifier Figure 79 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the controls for Gain and Shaping Time The amplifier coarse gain is set to 1 3 or 9 by changing a jumper setting see the digiB ASE user manual Once the coarse gain is set adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 4 to 1 2 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two con trols used together cover the entire range of amplification from 0 4 to 10 8 In almost all cases the default Shaping 5 MENU COMMANDS Properties for SINGLEY_LIZ MCB 129 Ed About Status Presets Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabiizer HighVoltage Gain 0 50 Shaping Time TNR DEDO 060 DAD COSO 1 Fine 0 5000 Fig 79 digiBASE Amplifier Tab Time 0 75 us is the preferred setting However the digiBASE supports shaping times from 0 75 us to 2
97. the sum of all counts in all channels for this Detector marked with an ROI reaches this value This has no function if no ROIs are marked in the Detector The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample may be lower than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channe
98. this allows you to zoom in on a particular part of the spectrum and see it in more detail You can change the expanded view s vertical and horizontal scaling and perform a number of analytical operations such as peak information marking ROIs or calibrating the spectrum This window contains a vertical line called a marker that highlights a particular position in the spectrum Information about that position is displayed on the Marker Information Line see item 10 below ROI Status Area on the right side of the menu bar indicates whether the ROI marking mode is currently Mark UnMark or Off This operates in conjunction with the ROI menu commands and arrow keys see Section 5 8 4 DISPLAY FEATURES 9 Status Sidebar on the right side of the screen providing information on the current Detector presets and counting times the time and date and a set of buttons that allow you to move easily between peaks ROIs and library entries see Section 4 4 10 Marker Information Line beneath the spectrum showing the marker channel calibration and contents 11 Supplementary Information Line below the Marker Information Line used to show library contents the results of certain calculations warning messages or instructions 4 1 Spectrum Displays The Full and Expanded Spectrum Views show respectively a complete histogram of the current spectrum whether from a Detector or buffer and an expanded view of all or part of the spectrum
99. this peak only 186 7 THE REPORT HALF LIFE IN DAYS This is the half life for this nuclide in days This and the next column can be suppressed by modifying G30WINDS INI Section A 2 2 BRANCHING RATIO This is the yield for this energy for this isotope See Half life PEAK CODE The next column might contain a symbol which shows whether or not the peak passed various tests These symbols can be used to determine how to change the analysis in order to obtain better results The symbols have the following meanings The 1 sigma counting error was greater than the user set sensitivity cutoff value The abundance for this peak was lower than the critical level P Peak background subtraction was done on this peak The next column might contain a symbol that indicates which peaks were used in the average activity calculation for this nuclide There might be a symbol in the previous column indicating that the peak did not pass a test but if the is present it was used in the activity calculation COMMENTS This column contains the half life in days followed by the yield This might be overwritten by other messages 7 5 Summary of Nuclides in Sample Figure 192 shows the last page of the report which lists the activity in the sample If the spectrum is not efficiency calibrated or the library is not found this table is suppressed The nuclides are arranged in library order The activity is the average activity multiplied by
100. to the marginal state of the system which might result in other errors Invalid Command or Missing Argument JOB Error 4 A syntax error in a JOB meaning that a command could not be interpreted usually the result of misspelling Invalid Device or Segment This message arises as a result of a Detector execution error with micro code 134 indicating that an invalid device or Segment was selected Invalid EXE file WinExec error 11 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Invalid File Format A function to recall a file could not obtain data in the proper format Invalid library format An attempt was made to load a nuclide library from a file which was not in the proper format Invalid LOOP count JOB Error 7 The LOOP statement could not be executed properly in a JOB Invalid Start Date Time Battery Backup Lost A Detector contained an unrecognizable start date This is usually an indication that the backup power was lost Invalid Start Record No valid Start Record file could be found to provide the start date time for an installed 917 or 918 Detector JOB Aborted or Premature EOF JOB Error 1 A JOB was aborted by the user or an End Of File was encountered while trying to obtain a command from the executing JoB file 269 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 JOB Error A generic error message indicating that an error was encountered while executing a JOB file Usually some
101. us in steps of 0 25 us Amplifier 2 Figure 80 shows the Amplifier 2 tab which accesses the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode For the more advanced user the InSight mode allows you to directly the digiBASE s advanced shaping parameters and adjust them interactively while col lecting live data To access the InSight mode click on Start then refer to the discussion in Section 5 2 10 3 When you are satisfied with the settings Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data Once Properties for SINGLEY_LIZ MCB 129 Ea About Status Presets Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Fig 80 digiBASE Amplifier 2 Tab data acquisition is underway the advanced user might wish to return to this tab and switch to the 77 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Insight mode to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well ADC This tab Fig 81 contains the Gate Lower Level Discriminator and About Status Presets Upper Level Discriminator controls Ampliier Ampliier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage In addition the current real time and Gate Conversion Gain IR Y 1 1 1 Enable hd live time are monitored at the bottom H EE of the dialog Upper Level Disc E 023 The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this func tion Off no gating is performed tha
102. with locked Detectors the first time a destructive command is used on the locked Detector you are prompted for the password From that point while the Jos file is 211 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 running the password is retained and you are not prompted When the JOB file quits the password is forgotten ee 22 In the following descriptions a variable filename or text is enclosed in and a variable number is enclosed in lt gt anything enclosed in square brackets is optional 10 1 Summary of JOB Commands This section provides a quick reference to the JOB commands for more detailed information see Section 10 4 ANALYZE spectrum filename Analyzes the spectrum in the same manner as the menu commands ASK CALIBRATION Asks for the internal calibration filename then reads the file and loads the calibration ASK COLLECTION Asks for the date and time for the decay correction ASK CONFIRM text This displays text and waits for the user to click on OK ASK DESCRIPTION Asks for sample description ASK LIBRARY Asks for the name of the internal library then loads it ASK OPERATOR Asks for the user s name ASK OPTIONS Asks for the Sample Description Filename of the analysis options ASK PASSWORD Asks for password used to lock Detectors ASK PBC Asks for the name of the Peak Background Correction file then loads it 212 10 JOB FILES ASK_PRESET Asks for the p
103. 0 Amplifier 2 Tab Use the up down arrows to adjust the Rise Time within the range of 0 8 to 23 0 us After all the controls have been adjusted return to the Amplifier tab and click on Start Auto The most recent settings are saved in the DSPEC jr 2 0 firmware even when the power is turned off For the more advanced user the InSight mode allows you to directly view all the parameters and adjust them interactively while collecting live data To access the InSight mode go to the Insight section on the Amplifier 2 tab and click on Start The InSight mode is covered in Section 5 2 10 3 67 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 The Rise Time value is for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop from 0 3 to 2 4 us The Tilt adjustment varies the flatness of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively the optimize feature on the Amplifier tab can set the tilt value automatically This automatic value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSight mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The optimize feature also automatically adjusts the pole
104. 000E 00 MDA factor MDA Factor 2 5300000E 00 Fraction limit Fraction limit 7 O000000E 01 Half life decay method Decay limit 8 0000000E 00 Background method Background width average of three points Library match width Peak acceptance width 5 0000000E 00 Corrections Status Comments Decay correct to date NO Operator selected Decay during acquisition NO corrections Peaked background correction NO Absorption Internal NO Fig 188 ScintiVision Report Page 1 continued LIBRARY FILENAME The analysis library filename is printed If the library was not found then a not found message is printed here MDA FACTOR This is the factor used in the MDA calculation as set on the System tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type ANALYSIS REGION This is the start stop channels as input by the operator The analysis region in energy is printed at the end of the report NORMALIZATION FACTOR This is the factor to change the output activities to the requested units from the internal units of becquerels It is the quotient of the input multiplier and input divisor A value of 1 0 leaves the activities in becquerels FRACTION LIMIT This is the value used in the analysis to reject isotopes as set on the System tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type 181 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 HALF LIFE DECAY LIMIT This is the decay limit for rejecting isotopes as set on the System tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type BACKGROUND M
105. 029 Taller SBoltetz cuoc bs xe ee say eee gh es he hedaed XC STRE Meese 205 9 2 10 Move Rubber Rectangle One Pixel 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee 206 9 2 11 Compare Vertical Separation o bio eroe E Abe 206 92 12 Zoom LOOM O t RARA AAA AA D EORR 206 9 2 1 3 DI dll eus our to cask e d we s um n aa b ed eene 206 9 2 14 Fine Gain Large Move eee e RE De RR RR Ies p baer ERR Y a 206 OZ AS Green CAPITA eise epu Cees 207 9 3 Keyboard Number Combinations 20 0 00 eee eee ences 207 9 Od E M px Aaa eT De 207 O32 SIOD Lid e uote dll ia etd qu d ed tod die n boa a qua 207 SEC ME GI pM OT p E 207 93 Copy to BUTEN ss tesla oh a PES QNS EE dare ud e eae 208 9 3 3 Detector Butter ausu etra biete etr Se e rmt tubae 208 9 3 6 Narro Wer W ISE ceo usta e OO ie In ewe edem ot SAUCERS visit 208 9 4 Puncta Keys usen xem EU rem ERE E 208 BST ROL cat orks x etal eaten Bact celts casks mesa ta sm Deu pe ste TTE 208 9 32 1271 LN OPA Ce 5 42 8 eo ees ree 8th p EP RE ERE RM E beet ass 209 DAS LAD Compte cer ev v qeu EE AE REO quee PSE Ae mU Ru detis 209 9 4 4 Defecto BUSES E NEC PNE REDE 209 9 3 Tallei Slotter opt b e rr Soto eire beet 209 9 4 6 Narrower Wider ay Socken PES IPRC a DS E oO LEN DG 209 OU Select Detector rers enc es cuna Vecchia 4 non CARER ORR Ra e Ron i 209 9x Keypad REVS gt sev das Cis sete vu Ree BRR doe Gd V Meee a vie dixo Rute E eas 210 OD he VAS LANGA 2 eco eeu ees nee hh eit ees ES he e eee RUNE IU es 210
106. 2kE 001 1250 00 6684E 001 1500 00 9273E 001 2000 00 2284E 001 3000 00 8057E 001 Marker 379 1 251 00 keV 417 Cnts ZL Fig 127 Attenuation Worksheet Table for Absorber Coefficient Table Next decide whether to describe the ratio of components in the material as a percentage or amass ratio this will determine which radio button should be marked in the Units section of the Absorber Definition dialog e If you know the relative number of atoms or molecules of each constituent in the absorber for example NaI click on Amounts entered are multiplied by the atomic weight of the constituent and normalized to 100 e Click on Mass Ratio if you know the relative amounts of constituents by weight for example 90 sand 10 lead Nal contains sodium and iodine in a 1 to 1 ratio Therefore it should be entered in the Absorber Definition dialog as two separate Constituents Na and I each in the relative 5 MENU COMMANDS Amount of 1 Similarly ALO would be entered as Absorber Definition x aluminum in the amount of 2 and oxygen in the amount EM of 3 Constituents y Cancel e In the Constituent section enter Na and an amount T 2s of 1 then click on Add The Constituent droplist qr in the upper part of the dialog will now list Na as a UIS component of Nal Fig 129 Clicking on Add m7 twice for the same constituent will add it to the list twice Amount o Eme Delete e Retur
107. 3 Quality assurances 4c ae xa 189 EI ILy soe eiae be E Od p aa x alae ati 189 ANSI N13 30 and N42 14 189 background 2 4 ewe hp ak eh xe ane 189 background measurement 195 229 COMMON chart i cas aa 197 database cu es snot ace ret f ate e Rcs 193 FWHM ratio 21x ice tta e ER es 189 Lock Acquire on Violation s 190 peak Shift iese Pace oae te eun plat sees 189 sample measurement 196 229 E 190 SUS ias Pto does 196 AA pes net INEO ACORN 75 Recalibration 254 d ncn te P we M RC 100 Recall load library a xa ox ate ox et D E D ace oe 143 read spectrum 4e ace ware d e aee gx at bes 54 ROL arar ice teak ey aleta 157 Region of interest see ROI 155 Resistive beedback ceci ox ex 66 Resolution 4 cioe ver week p act 67 68 84 85 Right mouse button menu 37 163 C Tea es bod caca Seok ate otii re a v ator ate 3 163 Clear ROL aes io eet panes Port 164 Copy to Buffers css oui d petat xot 163 Mark ROL o oca natio es Rota 164 Peak MO ue idt RR EI 164 Start acquisition e 163 Stop acquisition esie en A 163 Undo Zoomi Itb oi sod ace oat te o Ex R 164 LOMA 12512 valet set out aca ts 163 164 Zoom OUT sala to e haves ca 164 A AA xia t et bo re ub 67 68 85 ROD 2d sie athe ine Onan ave dati putate 40 155 204 Clea Pot acres i foon ace Muti t a 156 164 205 Clear All duet O nau wx abs 156 A ai Shad week 155 156 164 205 Mark Peak aac dod ave esta ege
108. 32 v2 A35 B32 166 6 ANALYSIS METHODS ScintiVision incorporates the analysis engine GSA DLL GSA is an acronym for Gamma Spectrum Analysis GSA DLL provides the kernel of functions necessary for analysis of gamma ray spectra acquired with Nal detectors This chapter describes the calculations performed and the algorithms employed by this analysis engine Nal detector spectra are characterized by significantly poorer resolution caused by fewer ADC channels combined with broader peaks and therefore more interference overlapping peak areas along with poorer signal to noise ratios than corresponding HPGe spectra Therefore Nal spectra inherently require significantly different algorithms for proper peak extraction and activity analysis The GSA DLL analysis engine was developed with such limitations of Nal spectra in mind Its main features include Peak search algorithms appropriate to Nal spectra Activity analysis algorithms appropriate to Nal spectra for multiplet decomposition and for identifying and quantifying the activities of nuclides present 6 1 Peak Search Each peak is located in a spectrum using a variable Gaussian cross correlation method discussed below whereupon a working model of the background is obtained based on the endpoints of the peak envelope detected Estimates for the background subtracted net area and centroid are computed based on this model and the counts in the spectrum in that vicinity
109. 53 master password 0 0000 00 153 Lock Unlock Detectors cs a et arr ase 153 BOG WOKE oia E e x Fh hat 83 Logarithmic scale o vox em E att 35 Lower level discriminator LLD 69 Mark InSight mode 66 83 84 Mark ROLD oda 3 e ea 155 156 164 MARK PEAKS Peak search 229 Mak t A ele at sient bte ce alot ake te 33 moving with the mouse 36 MCA Emulation 62 i s ont bee oe ou pura e e Pace a 2 NMCA CBPGTS dao oY ota 250 MCB ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Select tend Mires ee ate etie rd aen 157 MODA D ssi as Fita t guae ES 177 MA Presets Ro eit ea t e o ae 76 Menu ACUTE te id vae a Door ae atiende p a d n 59 Ger MPH pc P 112 DISDIBV e sd best etii eek aei ge x ott 157 Pile en oud Makes shoe ate notior buta a dcc on 48 EIBEdE 6 Miche eh et ate etii teta ge x eats 142 master password 000 less 152 right mouse button 37 163 A fetu tub ES TEE 155 o ied ico eS eld ake Watton ta heath aa eek 150 Menu bara nua ace te Mi pto an deoa 31 Minimum Detectable Activity 177 MOUSE eses ot a at etat estie puto ae deat 36 moving the marker 36 Right mouse button menu 37 43 rubber rectangle colas heed n 37 MultiChannel Analyzer MCA 2 Multichannel buffer MCB 2 INCE JM Qe i adii dicato rotas ta 170 Noldor wee taka ke pith 66 Notepad ice et stele ote Pn sh on e
110. 5E 001 0 218547 0 14 0 02470823 5 6180E 002 0 055152 1 117324 2 4708E 002 2 m uu 2 2 3627E 002 0 022278 EE Enter Calc Table 4 Pais Delete E B SyDemo1 An1 Co 60 Co 57 amp Cs 137 20 ml bottles on endcap S N 1721 1759 E I Moge z Quadratic y ORTEC 1 59 58 PM Mon 5 13 02 Efficiency E E D Emm 5 Marker 358 1175 59 keV Calibrating Close Sidebar to Finish or ESC to Cancel ZA Fig 23 Polynomial Efficiency Fit We will accept this calibration and close the calibration session by clicking on the Calibration Sidebar s Close button Now save this calibration to disk Restore by selecting Calibrate and Save Calibration Give the calibration file Move the name SVDEMO ScintiVision will attach the default cLs extension to D the filename M ayimize Close Alt F4 3 2 7 Changing a Library Linear Select Library Edit ScintiVision Editor from the Menu Bar This will Sees open the Editing dialog Fig 25 which allows you to change add or delete ae nuclide and gamma ray values in the currently loaded nuclide library file Fig 24 Efficiency Fit Window Select the nuclide Co from the left hand section of the dialog All the Control Menu gamma ray energies or peaks for this nuclide will then appear in the Peaks section select the 23 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 1332 5 keV peak Click on Edit in the Peaks section This will open the Edit Librar
111. 64 INTEGER 2 BEGREC ENDREC INTEGER 2 TLRTYP IS INTEGER 4 SPCIN 32 LVETME RLTIME REAL 4 ENG 2 FW 2 X1 CHARACTER 1 SRTTME 4 SRTSEC 2 SRTDTE 8 OUTPUT 30 C C START C WRITE 0 100 100 FORMAT 29X SPECTRUM PRINT ROUTINE C Open the spectrum file OPEN 1 FILE STATUS OLD ACCESS DIRECT RECL 32 C Read the first 32 bytes first record from the file READ 1 REC 1 TYPE MCA SEG SRTSEC RLTIME LVETME 1 SRTDTE SRTTME STRTCH LNGTDT C Check to see if the first word is a numeric 1 if not Cc then quit IF TYPE NE 1 GO TO 1000 C It s good so write out all the data from the header C note that the start time is split into two parts WRITE 0 150 TYPE MCA SEG RLTIME 50 1 LVETME 50 SRTTME SRTSEC SRTDTE STRTCH LNGTDT 150 FORMAT TYPE 14 MCA 4 I2 SEGMENT I3 REALTIME I10 SECONDS LIVETIME I10 SECONDS DATA COLLECTED AT 2A1 2A1 31 241 ON 2A1 3A1 3A1 STARTING CHANNEL 16 NUMBER OF CHANNELS I6 C The first trailer record is after the last channel data Divide the length by 8 because there are 8 channels per C record LREC 3 CHNLEN 1 8 C Read the first trailer record TLRTYP is the record type The variables IS and X1 are dummys maintain the position C in the file READ LUN REC LREC ERR 100 TLRTYP 1IS ENG 1 ENG 2 1 X1 FW 1 FW 2 WRITE 0 160 ENG FW 160 FORMAT ENERGY ZERO E14 8 ENERGY SLOPE 1 E14 8 FWH
112. 8 5 8 5 Clear This clears the ROI bits of all ROI channels contiguous to the channel containing the marker This is duplicated by the ROI Del button on the Status Sidebar Keypad lt Del gt the Delete key and the Clear ROI Toolbar button See also Clear ROI on the right mouse button menu Section 5 10 9 5 8 6 Clear All This resets all the ROI bits in the displayed spectrum i e removes all ROI markings from the spectrum However it does not affect the ROI status of Mark Unmark Off 5 8 7 Save File This allows you to save to disk a table of the Save ROI File channel numbers for the current spectrum Savein User amp J e s s that have the ROI set The contents of the C3 Tmpl laa N11089ag i cit E waterford a N30201b roi spectrum are not changed Cxt je Blank roi la Stabs roi J Mga t loax roi jn Test roi J pins la Mmcbdemi ro a Testeswx roi Selecting Save File displays the dialog in E fa Mmcbdemo roi Fig 173 Refer to Section 4 5 for tips on using this dialog Enter the File name The ile name 2 ROI file extension is recommended and is Flepene Save used by default An invalid or null filename Oo EZ cea will abort the Save operation Fig 173 Save ROI File Dialog 156 5 MENU COMMANDS If the file already exists the system will display a warning message asking whether you want to overwrite the data in the existing file or cancel the save
113. B32 ScintiVision SvDemol Spc Co 60 Co 57 amp Cs 137 20 ml bottles on en 01 xj ER File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window ale x Sul eu x tes al Aur x Pulse Ht Analysis Start 9 35 17 AM 5 7 38 Real 508 54 Live 300 00 Dead 41 12 X 125 52 keV 115 585 Cnts f Fig 7 Calibrated Spectrum Recalled from Disk File 3 2 2 The Simplest Way To Do An Analysis Select a portion of the SVDEMO1 sPC spectrum for analysis by positioning the mouse on or near the 1332 keV peak in the Full Spectrum View Fig 8 which will be located near the upper left edge of the window and clicking the left mouse button This will move the marker to the mouse pointer The Expanded Spectrum View will now show this part of the spectrum Now zoom in on this part of the spectrum by going to the Toolbar and clicking on the Zoom In button A five or six times As you click note that the Full Spectrum View will show the portion of the spectrum that you are zooming and the Expanded Spectrum Fig 8 Full Spectrum View View will display this part of the spectrum see Fig 7 If the 1332 keV region is not on the screen click on the peaks in the right side of the Full Spectrum View to reposition the zoomed region 12 Once you have zoomed in on the 1332 keV peak go to the Menu Bar and click on Analyze then Interactive in viewed area see Fig 9 ScintiVision will automatical
114. C QUINCE E QE e xdi dos o Ode E ge hg eas 5 2 1 Acquisition Settings 5 2 1 1 Start Save Report 5 2 1 2 Ask on Start Options Sample Type Defaults Acquisition Presets Sample Description Sample Quantity Collection Date and Time 2 3 Start Save Report 2d LOD coti op he are ve den reps epus DOS PI A E E A E E E 2 6 Copy to Buffer 2 8 Download Spectra 2 9 ZDT Display Select uu Un CA Un Ur UY Un UN NNDDWDDDDDDDDDDDDADAAANMAANnANanainaiainn ana nainaa ann fp fH LH Lf O32 O9 P2 F2 F2 F2 F2 l2 RR TTOUMOUONINANNA NFA HBPWNHNNNKRKR C C OOo OO OO tA TABLE OF CONTENTS 52 10 MCB Properties cca ska s eade giae eat AE 64 9 2 IO T 3DSPBC 20 25 voc onthe ehh baie wae ow Re tae Rea e erat ee PES 65 ADDE es eun cet warn dr en eure Ree Rete 65 Amper 2 PET 67 Dm Her PRO ans ptr idm aet quu name Sod 68 UD s E 69 Stabilizer PROPTER 70 High Voll dBe s care A Sip Cutis Vides bere 70 ADOUG uds mecha ree n hort Ce etie Rr x 71 SAS RUE 72 E A ea a vie a n ee le E E tet A ER 74 MIDAS Preset Sendo ta TO ep em qo Rea e BEEK 76 S22 I0 7 di BAS Eaa ertet ha ed Han Sw REPRE haod uc UR ER D UR ESSE 77 AMPER OR EA O 77 AMPIE ees Dese Dose XII Suet
115. ETHOD The background method selected by the operator is shown here LIBRARY MATCH WIDTH This is the peak acceptance width set by the operator in the Analysis Settings dialog CORRECTIONS All of the available corrections are listed along with the on off status DECAY DATE The decay corrected activity is corrected to this date If the decay correction is off this is blank DECAY DURING ACQUISITION If the decay during acquisition was enabled then this is on The correction could be small due to the ratio of the half life to the real time so the effect might not be seen in the output activity 7 2 Unidentified Peak Summary Figure 189 shows the second page of the report The first section of this page provides the peak energy matrix of the unidentified peak summary You can suppress this report PEAK CHANNEL The first column is the peak channel as determined by the peak finder see page 197 It is reported to two decimal places but normal variation can be in the tenths of a channel CENTROID ENERGY The second column shows the peak centroid in energy if the spectrum is calibrated zero otherwise This is the first column converted to energy according to the energy coefficients in the calibration data This too is reported to the nearest hundredth of a channel Peaks are included in the unknown list if they are too far from a library peak so these extra digits might be of use LIST OF PEAK FLAGS This is a list of the flags that ar
116. FWHM Cal Linear FWHM Maker 42 122 53 keV 95 724 Cnts FWHM 20 909864 Library Co 57 Cobalt at 122 07 8387 97 Bg Fig 95 Speeding Up Calibration with a Library Rather than manually entering the peak energy in the energy entry box click once on the peak energy in the library list to automatically enter that library energy value in the E field For a spectrum with an energy calibration double clicking on a library peak will cause the spectrum cursor to jump to the channel which corresponds to that energy If the calibration as it now stands is not sufficiently accurate the channel which corresponds to that energy might be off by a channel or two If this is not the correct peak channel move the cursor to the correct channel click once on the library peak and press lt Enter gt To exit the calibration function click on the Energy Calibration Sidebar s Close button x This will close the calibration function and the new calibrations will be held in memory available for subsequent spectra gathered on this Detector If a calibration is to be saved permanently to disk select Save Calibration from the Calibrate menu 98 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 3 1 4 Using Multiple Spectra for a Single Calibration To use more than one source when simultaneous collection is not possible to make a single calibration Collect a spectrum with one source Calibrate with this spectrum Exit the calibration function Clear the
117. Fig 22 Efficiency Worksheet Calibration F3 Efficiency 2 4124E 002 at 1332 51 66 keV Calc Table 10 Pairs Delete Ent Recall Save Mode Above Polynomial Below None Kee Fig 21 Efficiency Calibration Sidebar 21 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Enter the date and the time from the calibration Table 2 List of Peak Energies certificate see Table 2 as 30 Oct 92 and Reference time 12 00 GMT 30 Oct 1992 12 00 00 Enter the gammas per second 19671 from the calibration certificate for Co at Nuclide Energy keV Gammas sec 1332 5 keV Select GPS from the units drop list Co 122 1 15920 Note that the from Library box is checked this 137Cg 661 63 15598 shows that the half life came from the library 9 Co 1173 2 19640 9 Co 1332 5 19671 At this point the Calculate Efficiency button at the top of the worksheet should be active black rather than gray If it is gray one or more of the data inputs is either incorrect or has not been entered When you have completed all fields and Calculate Efficiency is activated click on it to obtain the efficiency value at this energy Click on OK to insert the value in the efficiency table You will see that the value appears in the Efficiency Table window You could repeat this process for all other peaks in the calibration certificate data but there is an easier way All of the information from t
118. M ZERO E14 8 FWHM SLOPE E14 8 C Ask the user for the channel number to print out WRITE 0 200 200 FORMAT Enter channel number C Get the channel number a uP WN FH a 259 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 READ 0 210 I CHNNL 210 FORMAT I5 C Calculate the block of 8 channels that this one is in C There are 8 channels in a record of 32 bytes CHANEL I CHNNL 1 ENDREC CHANEL 8 BEGREC CHANEL 8 C This is only one record in this example but could be any number of records The 2 is the offset past the header C and the records start at 1 So the first data record is 2 DO 450 I BEGREC 2 ENDREC 2 C Read the 8 channels READ 1 REC I SPCIN K K 1 8 C Print the 8 channels along with the channel number of C the first channel WRITE 0 410 14 8 I 2 SPCIN K K 1 8 a 410 FORMAT 1X 15 8I9 450 CONTINUE CLOSE 1 1000 STOP END B 3 1 2 ROI Files INTEGER 2 LUNROI LSTREC IBEGIN IEND C WRITE 0 100 100 FORMAT 29X ROI PRINT ROUTINE C Open the ROI file OPEN 1 FILE STATUS OLD ACCESS DIRECT RECL 2 C Read the ROIs I 0 IROI 1 C Add 2 to skip past the header 200 READ 1 REC I 2 IBEGIN C If the entry is 0 then this is the end of the list IF IBEGIN LE 0 GO TO 1000 C If the beginning is there then the end is also READ 1 REC I 3 IEND C But its one too many IEND IEND 1 C Write them all out WRITE 0 220 IROI IBEGIN IEND 220 FORMAT ROI 4 13 START 16
119. NCA ae wie ei aod ome e evi n whee 35 159 logarithmic sas 54 of ace once y e er en 35 159 da nce ne URP RC Blade a 37 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 warning lr ts 4 os o ew A 192 Yield itio das ra tal ses 176 LOT 39008 1718 o ob ae Siege alee wee oe whe 87 view ZDT spectrum 00 63 zero dead time see ZDT mode 69 Zero Stabilization 70 86 Iniallze eS rocas tette ahd Ren aca 70 V MP 33 37 Zoom Ii a ls AAA 35 159 Zoom QUE oor S ches th atn ue YA 36 159 282
120. OB COMO tr Itt Ear utt vn mnm 150 5 7 2 Sample Description ou petro CE e e ap tubo at ied 151 5 7 3 Menu Passwords duc eR Rer a rem obl eos Leuk eee C ob ER DR Te e OR e 151 5 7 4 Lock Unlock Detector La o ast eee Ende oe e md e tte Vaio dee wus 153 o kJ Edit Detectot Lists eroticas 154 Joa RO NA ER ERAN EI A ate ee rales 155 A E TN E 155 2 0 2 Mark Ate oes e er tb OPE eO EHE e E e EE dE 155 35 9 Ln MADE sou tart eet ede Eun tex do osx Sd 153 5 8 4 Mark Peak cius ect Re aa Acer eR RC RR E Eon ee OE oe dms 156 3 9 9 amp 5 MORE ot Stehen ese tese ES Gene isti uo dm ufa med arene 156 OO CAR UIE sacra stn aed ode AE PE ON RAIN 156 Sus doc d VeSsEIleus ota eae aa ae Ru np Ep Mu Suara nh sellin ange Sasi MEA Gaetan acute 156 NA IS E 157 3 9 DIS Play 20 o DR ns Pto LES Oa e RPM ener as OME 157 ML Delicias ts da das eee 157 5 9 2 Detector BUS ca er otra ASIS AAA A 159 3x9 3i ZOOMIN A A ES A Vnd sime lined meee CRIA TR sec IA 159 3 0 4 OO OU o Das ebat vae dade ada Wik baba eR od AAA 159 295 LO Sar soos ese tb eue UE hang Ae Rh woman Slee aw nee ens 159 NO PRULOMANC s scot bet we lee AL are ROLL EE easter E PES 159 3 9 Baseline ZOOM sranie mi naea EA BIO ee oA PO RE 160 5 9 8 COMED otis se Dedede Rieti needed Piet d qnd dg 160 IT UU VIS aco Ie e CUR E BEE CA OREM ERE Eo ORS Ae ER 160 5 9 TO a A hate cue idee ker suele ats De ees sie etd 160 5 9 10 1 Points Fill ROI Fill AI 0 eee 160 5 9 10 2 Fill Singlets Fill Multipl
121. ORTEC ScintiVision 32 for Windows 2000 Professional and XP Professional MCA Emulation and Analysis Software for Scintillation Detector Spectra A35 B32 Software User s Manual Software Version 2 Printed in U S A ORTEC Part No 777810 1209 Manual Revision F Advanced Measurement Technology Inc a k a ORTEC a subsidiary of AMETEK Inc WARRANTY ORTEC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE NOT EXPRESSLY SET FORTH HEREIN IN NO EVENT WILL ORTEC BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS EVEN IF ORTEC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THESE DATA Copyright 2009 Advanced Measurement Technology Inc All rights reserved ORTEC is a registered trademark of Advanced Measurement Technology Inc All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners TABLE OF CONTENTS D INTRODUCTION aia 1 TT MC Ac EOI R S E otra SOROR a adt NER HERR AE 2 1 2 PC Requirements ose petuo Pede ones ER Silane gn ea eine qud 3 1 3 DOtpetoES n ertag eset nn ae Te ee db ORE Pees ewe ae ad E ART RAE Ra s roe dos 3 2 INSTALLING SCINTIVISION 32 4 9 p04 obo eGR ys aa be TC SPEO ee 5 2 1 If You Have Windows XP Service Pack 2 and Wish to Share Your Local ORTEC MCBs Ac
122. Quality Assurance 62 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 2 8 Download Spectra This command supports standalone MCBs such as Detective family instruments trans SPEC digiDART and DART and is used to download the spectra from the MCB to the computer disk Note that downloading the spectra does not erase them from the MCB The files are stored in the folder and spectrum file format defined on the Directories tab under File Settings Section 5 1 1 4 They are named according to the format sss iiiiiiii ddddddddd ttttttttt ext where sss is the sequence number as shown on the digiDART spectrum list display or the storage sequence in the DART iiiiiiii is the ID string entered on the digiDART when the spectrum was saved and shown on the digiDART spectrum list display or the text string from the barcode reader in the DART ddddddddd is the date the spectrum was collected as recorded in the MCB ttttttttt is the time the spectrum was collected as recorded in the MCB ext is the extension for the file type selected If any Ask on Save options are set in the file settings dialog they will be asked for each spectrum individually Note that if you cancel an ask on save prompt for a particular spectrum any remaining ask on save prompts for that spectrum are not displayed and the spectrum is not saved to disk NOTE Before downloading make sure the current conversion gain setting for this MCB see the ADC tab under Acquire MCB Properties
123. RE that all collected data can be viewed A typical chart is shown in Fig 204 The short dashed lines represent the warning limits and the long dashed lines represent the acceptance threshold limits Figure 205 shows the control chart s File menu which contains the Print Graph 9 amp 7 aa OOT T AE EE da command for printing the current graph on the current printer a standard Windows Print Setup command that allows you to select the printer and its setup features such as landscape vs portrait layout paper size number of copies and device control options the Exit command for closing the QA Chart Program this duplicates the dialog s upper right Close box and an About box providing version information about the chart program Fig 204 Control Chart Example Choose the chart s time period Week Month or Quarter from the Scale menu Fig 206 The Plot Variable menu Fig 207 contains functions for selecting Activity Peak Energy Peak Width Half Max or Background File Scale Plot Variable Print Graph Week Activity Print Setup Month Peak Energy Exit Quarter Peak Width Half Max gt About 04 Chart Program BackGround Fig 206 Scale Fig 205 QA Chart File Menu Fig 207 Plot Variable Menu Menu The Detector menu item opens the list of Detectors for which background and sample measurements have been made Fig 208 Select a Detector for this control chart and click on
124. ROI Fill All Y Fill Singlets Fill Multiplet Peaks Use these functions to select the histogram display mode for both or Fl M bci Coronas spectrum windows Spectrum Colors Peak Info Font Color In Points mode the data are displayed as points or pixels on the screen in the colors chosen for Foreground and ROI under Display Preferences Spectrum Colors see Section 5 9 10 3 Fig 180 Display Preferences Submenu In Fill ROI mode the unmarked regions of the spectrum are displayed as points while the ROIs are filled from the baseline to the data point with the ROI spectrum color In Fill All mode all the data points are filled from the baseline to the data point with the Foreground and ROI spectrum colors 160 Figure 181 shows a comparison of the three display modes Note that the point pixel size in the Point and Fill ROI mode illustrations has been exaggerated to make them easier to see Users will find that the display update speed is dramatically affected by the display mode the more areas filled on the screen the slower the screen will update Therefore the preferred modes for normal operation will most likely be Points and Fill ROI because of their faster update Fill All might be reserved for screen captures because of its greater clarity of presentation 5 9 10 2 Fill Singlets Fill Multiplet Peaks Fill Multiplet Composites The peaks detected during analysis can be displayed as contrasting solid lin
125. S energy The nuclide library data include the nuclide name half life and half life uncertainty The nuclide names can be any combination of eight characters but must be consistent throughout all files The library peak data include the energies and yield or gammas disintegration for each energy The default file extension is LIB At startup ScintiVision automatically attempts to load the library last loaded the first time you run ScintiVision the library DEFAULT LIB is used Thereafter this working library can be replaced at any time with Library Select File The library stays resident in memory after it has been loaded In the analysis report the nuclides are listed in the order they are in the library Libraries by the analysis program are limited to 200 peaks Master or reference libraries e g MASTER LIB from A53 BD from which the working libraries are built can be of any size NOTE Some old libraries might need to be rebuilt by copying the complete library to a new library with the Library Edit feature Section 5 6 3 Do this if you see the Can t read library error 5 6 1 Select Peak This opens a window containing a list of the library peaks in energy order Fig 150 This list shows the nuclide name energy gammas 100 disintegrations and half life Clicking on any field moves the marker line to that energy in the spectrum The Library List can be sorted by nuclide energy percent or half life by cli
126. SET PRESET CLEAR command is given as in the following SET DETECTOR 1 STOP SET PRESET CLEAR START SET PRESET COUNT counts This sets the ROI peak count preset for the active Detector The preset is set to the entered value With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when any ROI channel s content reaches this value If no ROIs are marked in the Detector then that Detector never meets this condition This command has the same function as the ROI Peak Count field on the Presets tab under Acquire MCB Properties Section refer to the discussion describing that dialog for additional information SET PRESET INTEGRAL counts This sets the ROI Integral Count preset value for the active Detector The preset is set to the entered value With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels marked with an ROI reaches this limit If no ROIs are marked in the Detector then that Detector never meets this condition This command has the same function as the ROI Integral field on the Presets tab under Acquire MCB Properties Section refer to the discussion describing that dialog for additional information SET PRESET LIVE seconds This sets the live time preset for the active Detector The preset is set to the entered value With this condition the Detector stops counting when the live time reaches this limit The live time is the real time minus the dead time This command has
127. T NUCLIDE AVERAGE PEAK ACTIVITY ENERGY ACTIVITY CODE MDA VALUE Becquerels keV Beqquerels Becquerals COMMENTS HH A O A hd bt hd tet itetit oo do tet tet c0 57 4 90165E 03 122 07 4 902E 03 t l l839E 01 2 72E 02 8 56E 01 136 43 0 000E 00 2 2969E 02 1 06E 01 c0 60 5 87638E 03 1173 24 5 463E 03 4 6392E 01 1 93E 03 9 99E 01 1332 50 6 290E 03 4 9521E 01 1 00E 02 C3 137 9 67781E 03 661 62 9 67868E 03 3 0262E 01 1 10E 04 85 46 01 This peak used in the nuclide activity avarage Peak outside analysis energy range r1 d Wu A I Feakbackground subtraction Peak activity lower than critical level Fwhm is more than 20 from calibrated value Legend for peak codes Peak codes Half life in days Fig 191 Library Peak Use Summary NUCLIDE The first column shows the nuclide name These are arranged in library order The nuclides are separated by a blank line AVERAGE ACTIVITY The second column shows the average activity in becquerels or other units This number has not been normalized by the scaling factors but does include the decay during acquisition correction ENERGY keV The third column shows the peak energies for each nuclide in the library order This is the library energy ACTIVITY The next column shows the activity based only on this peak For a nuclide with only one peak this is the same as the entry in column 2 MDA FOR THIS PEAK This is the MDA for this nuclide based on
128. T DETECTOR 0 SAVE MONTE CHN SET DETECTOR 1 CHANGE SAMPLE END LOOP CLEAR This clears erases the data the real time and the live time for the selected Detector The presets are not changed This command has the same function as the CLEAR function under the ACQUIRE menu The command would logically be preceded by the SET DETECTOR commands as follows 226 10 JOB FILES SET DETECTOR 1 CLEAR DESCRIBE SAMPLE description This accepts a 63 character description of the sample being analyzed This description is saved with the spectrum using the SAVE command function and is included in the REPORT printout This performs the same function as the Sample Description function under the Services menu The loop count value can be included in any text by typing three question marks in the text where the loop count is to be inserted The loop count replaces with three characters wherever it appears END LOOP see LOOP EXPORT filename This executes the Export function with the filename specified The remainder of the options are defined on the Export tab under File Settings The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 FILL BUFFER This transfers the active Detector data to the buffer This command has the same function as Copy to Buffer under Acquire IMPORT filename This executes the Import function with the filename specified The remainder of the options are defined on the Import
129. This asks for the sample size and units to be stored in the spectrum file and used in the analysis It is the same as the sample size entry in the Acquire Acquisition Settings dialog and the sample size entry in the File Settings menu If Ask on Start is checked the START command in the gos file will also open this dialog If Ask on Save is checked the SAVE command in the gos file will also open this dialog BEEP lt freq gt lt duration gt This produces an audible tone at a pitch of lt freq gt Hertz lasting for lt duration gt milliseconds For example BEEP 1000 1000 is a suitably annoying alarm while BEEP 50 50 is a short burp This command is disabled by Windows if any sound software is used It should be used with caution if other sound producing software is running BEEP ID A numerical ID is given based on a desired system event For example BEEP 7 will exit Windows ID Event 0 Beep Speaker 1 Default Beep 2 Start Windows 3 Asterisk 4 Exclamation 5 Critical Stop 6 Question 7 Exit Windows BEEP String String can be a wav file or any event defined in the Registry CALIBRATE EFFICIENCY file eft Performs an efficiency calibration using the active spectrum and the data in file eft The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 225 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 CALIBRATE ENERGY file ent Performs an energy calibration using the active spectrum and the data
130. a PBC file LOCK Pwd Name This command locks the current Detector using Pwd as the password If the optional Name parameter is missing the Locked name defaults to Job LOOP lt reps gt END_LOOP Executes all the commands between LOOP and END_LOOP lt reps gt number of times LOOP SPECTRA END_LOOP This command executes the commands within the loop once for each spectrum stored in the Detector hardware MARK_PEAKS Sets ROIs on all peaks in the buffer QABACKGROUND This command executes the background QA test without displaying prompts or violations QASAMPLE This command executes the sample QA test without displaying prompts or violations QUIT Terminates this copy of ScintiVision RECALL file Reads the spectrum data file into the buffer 214 10 JOB FILES RECALL CALIB file Loads both the energy and efficiency calibration data from the disk file to the selected memory calibration parameters The spectrum is not changed RECALL EFFICIENCY file Loads the efficiency calibration data from the disk file to the selected memory calibration parameters The spectrum is not changed RECALL ENERGY file Loads the energy calibration data from the disk file to the selected memory calibration parameters The spectrum is not changed RECALL OPTIONS file svd Sets the analysis options from the table in the file RECALL ROI file roi Sets the ROIs from the table in
131. able only for SMART 1 detectors Battery voltage This is not used in the DSPEC jr 2 0 Battery full This is not used in the DSPEC jr 2 0 Battery time remaining This is not used in the DSPEC jr 2 0 Presets Figure 77 shows the Presets tab MDA xi presets are shown on a separate tab Amplifier Ampliier2 AmplifierPRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset The presets can only be set on a l SI eene Detector that is not acquiring data nas s eq d Preset in during acquisition the preset field Live Time backgrounds are gray indicating that Start Chan 0 ROI Peak they are inactive You can use any Width 1 or all of the presets at one time To ROI Integral Suggest Region disable a preset enter a value of zero Overflow If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped Fig 77 DSPEC jr 2 0 Presets Tab When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the Detector to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide th
132. actually make the plot Recall ROI Print Plot Once a file has been selected using the Recall Spectrum function see the file recall dialog shown in Fig 218 it e RUE oe Save Settings As is automatically previewed using the current settings This is the exact PI e ia plot that will be printed There are minor differences between display Exit AFA and printer fonts and colors Fig 217 The File Menu The sample description format and number of channels are shown at the bottom of the dialog to aid in selecting the correct file 242 Recall a spectrum file for plotting Lookin E User Ej Ex ES MN Mantlel spc N71back spc P5041901 spe Testl spc Mcbdemo spc N 1calb spc in pa234m16 Spe ih Test2 spc Mk40 spc te nail 0030 Spc ia Qed gmy spe iu Test2job s Mna22 spc iu nail0031 Spc in Qedigmy1 spe iu uran16h sp N11089ac spc in P10633ab spc in Bcdlmgv spc N30201b spc bye p20666ac spc in Test spc um n File name N71 calb spc Files of type sec Format Spectra Bd Cancel M Show Description Integer SPC Format 15384 Channels Gamma calibration source on endcap Fig 218 The Recall Spectrum File for Plotting Dialog 11 UTILITIES Figure 219 shows the Recall a settings file dialog All of the settings specified on the Options Plot dialog can be saved in the settings file The file is saved in the Save Settings menu item Various groups of settings can be saved and recalled
133. age FWHM Ratio Acceptance Limit Low Average FWHM Ratio Warning Level High Average FWHM Ratio Warning Level Max Average FWHM Ratio Acceptance Limit User s name last entered under ScintiVision s system dialog at start of latest measurement B 2 2 Application Information Table One of these tables for entire database one record for ScintiVision Field Name ModelNumber SerialNumber AppName AppVersion Laboratory SQL Data Type SQL_LONG SQL_CHAR 32 SQL CHAR 16 SQL CHAR 8 SQL CHAR 64 Description Product Model No 1 e 66 Product Serial No Application Name i e Scinti Vision Version Revision 1 e 2 22 or greater Laboratory name entered under ScintiVision s system dialog B 2 3 M d Measurements Table s Where d is the detector number in decimal from the Detectors table above There is one of these tables for each detector covering all measurements whether background or standard sample type The total number of records in this table is denoted by NumMeas in the Detectors table which is also the measurement number of the last record in this table The records are stored sequentially by measurement number 257 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Field Name SQL Data Type Description Measurement SQL_INTEGER Measurement Number Primary key MeasTime SOL TIMESTAMP Date Time for this measurement MeasType SOL SMALLINT Activity analysis 1 or Background 0 LiveTime SQL REAL Acquisi
134. alibration Print Calibration Calculate Settings Peak Info Input Count Rate Sum Smooth Strip Analyze Settings gt Sample Type Report Generator Attenuation Coefficients Geometry Correction Peak Background Correction Select PBC Edit PBC Peak Search ROI Report Entire Spectrum in Memory Spectrum on Disk Display Analysis Results Interactive in Viewed Area Library Select Peak Select File Edit gt ScintiVision Editor Nuclide Navigator List 46 5 MENU COMMANDS Services Job Control Sample Description Menu Passwords Lock Unlock Detector Edit Detector List ROI Off lt F2 gt or lt Alt O gt Mark lt F2 gt or lt Alt M gt UnMark lt F2 gt or lt Alt U gt Mark Peak lt Insert gt Clear lt Delete gt Clear All Save File Recall File Display Detector lt Ctrl Fn gt Detector Buffer lt F4 gt or lt Alt 6 gt Logarithmic Keypad Automatic Keypad Baseline Zoom Zoom In Keypad Zoom Out Keypad Center Keypad 5 Full View Alt F7 Preferences Points Fill ROI Fill All Fill Singlets Fill Multiplet Peaks Fill Multiplet Composites Spectrum Colors Peak Info Font Color 47 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Right Mouse Button Menu Start Stop Clear Copy to Buffer Zoom In Zoom Out Undo Zoom In Mark ROI Clear ROI Peak Info Input Count Rate Sum MCB Properties 5 1 File The File menu giv
135. ance limits The latter use a check source These results are stored in a database and can be displayed and charted The database can be accessed with commercially available database products including Microsoft Access The information stored in the database for each detector includes Total Background count rate counts sec which is taken without a source The background should be monitored to verify that the detector and shield have not been contaminated by radioactive materials The value stored is the total count rate which is independent of the count time and any specific isotopic contamination A background analysis report is printed after the analysis completes Total Activity of all nuclide s for a given calibration source decay corrected The total activity of a calibration or check source checks the efficiency calibration currently in use and the general operating parameters of the system including source positioning contamination library values and energy calibration This activity calculation uses the general analysis program to ensure that the total system is checked Average FWHM ratio FWHM spectrum FWHM catipration for a list of peaks present on a calibration source The FWHM value checks the electronic noise and pole zero adjustment of the amplifier The peak shift checks to verify that the system gain and zero offset have not changed Average peak shift average of the deviation of actual peak centroids from expected libr
136. and digiBASE are described here ScintiVision will operate with any ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 compliant MCB To see the Properties dialogs for other CONNECTIONS compliant MCBs refer to the corresponding hardware manual or to the MCB Properties Manual Depending on the currently selected MCB the Properties dialog displays several tabs of hardware controls including ADC setup parameters acquisition presets high voltage controls amplifier gain adjustments gain and zero stabilizers pole zero and other shaping controls and 64 5 MENU COMMANDS access to the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope In addition the Status tab for certain MCBs monitors conditions such as alpha chamber pressure detector status charge remaining on batteries and the number of spectra collected in remote mode Find your Detector s setup section here or in the MCB properties manual move from tab to tab and set your hardware parameters then click on Close Note that as you enter characters in the data entry fields the characters will be underlined until you move to another field or until 5 seconds have lapsed since a character was last entered During the time the entry is underlined no other program or PC on the network can modify this value If the Detector is locked see Section 5 7 3 you must know the password before you can modify its MCB properties To view a locked Detector s properties in read only mode click on Cancel when the Unlock Password dialog opens
137. and vertical scales remain the same in both views This function is duplicated by the accelerators lt F4 gt and lt Alt 6 gt The Toolbar s Detector list can also be used 5 9 3 Zoom In Zoom In adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Expanded Spectrum View to view a smaller portion of the spectrum The vertical scale is divided by two and the horizontal scale is reduced by about 6 of the full horizontal scale The current horizontal and vertical full scale values are shown on the Toolbar see Fig 179 This command is duplicated by Keypad lt gt the Toolbar s Loaf A yo p Zoom In button and Zoom In on the right mouse button Fig 179 Vertical and Horizontal menu Full Scale Setting on the Toolbar 5 9 4 Zoom Out Zoom Out adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Expanded Spectrum View to view a larger portion of the spectrum The vertical scale is doubled and the horizontal scale is increased by about 6 of the full horizontal scale This command is duplicated by Keypad lt gt the Toolbar s Zoom Out button and Zoom Out on the right mouse button menu 5 9 5 Logarithmic Logarithmic toggles the vertical scale of the Expanded Spectrum View between the logarithmic and linear modes This function is duplicated by Keypad lt gt and the Log Linear Display button on the Toolbar 5 9 6 Automatic Automatic switches the Expanded Spectrum View to a linear scale that is automatically adjusted until
138. aps will still occur Table 5 Gamma Peak Overlap Examples Isotope Energy Probability Isotope with keV close energy sd e 140 99 89 3 Mo Ra 241 00 3 90 Sr Ra 185 99 3 28 1 4 Am 26 35 2 9 Y 4Am 33 20 0 11 Ce Am 59 54 36 3 zu The spectrum is then analyzed as described with one exception any peaks that are marked as too close are not used in the isotope activity calculations Instead the activity of one isotope is based on other gamma rays from that isotope That activity is then used to calculate the contribution to the overlapped peak of this isotope That contribution is subtracted from the total peak area to obtain the peak area due to the other isotope 174 6 ANALYSIS METHODS In the example above the activity of U is calculated from the area of the peak at the next most probable energy i e 143 keV Then the area of the 185 72 keV U peak is calculated using the yield branching ratio of that gamma ray the efficiency and the activity The U area is subtracted from the area of the peak at 185 keV to give the area due to Ra From this the activity of Ra in the sample is calculated 6 4 Peak Identification After the peaks in a spectrum have been properly located and measured using the searching and fitting procedures discussed above the next step is to identify these peaks with the emitting nuclides and ultimately to compute the activities of these nuclides 6 4 1 Peak Ident
139. are assigned by ScintiVision and users cannot change the name format The report names are not captured into the QA database 192 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE Click on OK ScintiVision will check the measurement limits to determine if they are set consistently If they are the dialog will close if not a message will be displayed on the Marker Information Line and the dialog will remain open so the limits can be changed QA data can now be collected using Acquire QA Measure Background and Acquire QA Measure Sample 8 1 2 Creating the QA Database Figure 196 shows the first wizard screen Mark the second radio button User Data Source Applies to this machine only Click on Next Create New Data Source Select a type of data source File Data Source Machine independent C System Data Source Applies to this machine only Selecting File Data Source creates a file based data source which is shareable between all users with access to the database Cancel Fig 196 First QA Database Wizard Screen The second wizard screen is shown in Fig 197 Leave the highlight on the first entry Microsoft Access Driver mdb then click on Next 193 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Create New Data Source Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Name Version AE 350350200 Microsc Microsoft dBase Driver dbf 3 50 360200 Microsc Microsoft Excel Driver
140. art Auto This will Dead Time tell the Detector to automatically adjust the pole zero of the amplifier While the pole zero adjustment is in progress you will hear a periodic beep and see the message Auto PZ in progress The time needed for the pole zero depends on the activity 5U S Patents 4 866 400 and 5 872 363 27 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 of the source and how far the pole zero is out of adjustment No more than a minute or two should be required Remember that if you change the shaping time you must pole zero the Detector again Click on Close to apply the new MCB hardware settings Adjusting Amplifier Gain Now adjust the amplifier gain to achieve the desired energy range across the Detector display Most commonly a range of 0 3 MeV is used If you have a Co source the 1332 keV peak should be set at approximately channel 1816 for conversion gain of 4096 and channel 3632 ofor 8192 see Fig 32 A source with only one or two lines e g Cs or Co should be used for the initial test spectrum so you ll be able to easily see the correct pattern of the peaks To set the gain for the 92X II as well as the DSPEC Plus DSPEC 92X DART and NOMAD Plus ScintiVision SyDemo2 Spc Co 60 Co 57 amp Cs 137 20 ml bottles on endcap S N 1721 REI EG x File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window 8 x mim 0 0 14 4 00 os a Cn eleje ewe zl Pulse H
141. ary energies within a specified range Optionally the Actual centroid energies of all the library peaks ORTEC Application Note 55 see http www ortec online com pdf an55 pdf contains more information and help on starting and running QA for gamma spectroscopy The three parts of QA in ScintiVision are 1 2 Establishing and entering the settings or ground rules for QA Measuring background and sample You perform this periodically and it is automatically logged into a database by the program 189 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 3 Analyzing the QA database and generating reports This includes Settings ScintiVision s Status and Control Chart features which allow you Measure Background to view the current status of measurements for the Detector and or Measure Sample view and print the data stored in the database as a control chart display Status Control Chart Figure 193 shows the QA submenu under the Acquire menu He PICA 8 1 Settings The QA settings are the limits for the acceptance of the results of the QA data That is if the QA result is outside of these limits the system is not in correct operation ScintiVision has warning and alarm limits determined respectively by the Low High and Minimum Maximum values you enterin the Quality Assurance Settings dialog If the QA result is outside the warning limits a warning dialog will be displayed If the QA result is outside the alarm li
142. as the analysis can 48 5 MENU COMMANDS be reproduced from this file The integer format stores the spectrum as 4 byte integers and the floating point format uses the 4 byte exponential format used in the hardware math coprocessor e g 80387 and most languages for the PC The analysis and calibration formats are defined in the File Structure Manual The sPE format is used by the Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty Organization CTBTO and is described in the ORTEC file structure manual The Sample Description can be entered here It can also be asked for when the spectrum is saved If the Sample Description box is checked the entry here will be the default presented in the file save dialog This would save time when working with several similar samples the common description could be entered on this dialog and the unique descriptors added on this dialog If the output activity is to be File Settings 2 x normalized to a volume or weight or any other factor the sample m quantity can be entered here along nteger Chn Integer Spc Floating point Spe ASCII Spe with the reporting units This will normalize the activity and the report General Esport Import Directories Ask On Save Options A 100 detector P409348 wi i i will be in normalized units This Sample Description ne aid Rom on normalization is in addition to the normalization done by the multiplier Sample Size 1 00000 Kg and divisor on the
143. asy to use ScintiVision maintains one or more buffers in the computer memory to which spectra can be moved from the Detector memory for display and analysis while another spectrum is collected in the Detector As much as possible a buffer duplicates in memory the functions of the Detector hardware on which a spectrum was collected Also data can be analyzed directly in the Detector hardware memory as well as stored directly from the Detector to disk 1 2 PC Requirements ScintiVision is designed for use on PCs that run Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP4 or XP SP2 or higher For PCs with a legacy memory mapped MCB interface no other interface can use memory mapped into page D of the PC memory map See the accompanying ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual P N 931001 hereinafter called the MCB Properties Manual It is supplied either as hardcopy or on disk Data can be saved or retrieved from any number of removable or fixed drives 1 3 Detectors Supported front end acquisition hardware includes ORTEC MCBs interfaced to the computer via USB port Ethernet Dual Port Memory DPM interface serial port or printer port An ORSIM II or III can also be used to connect DPM MCBs directly to the Ethernet ScintiVision can control and display an almost unlimited number of ORTEC CONNECTION 32 compatible Detectors either local or networked in any combination The limit depends on system resources ScintiVision will cor
144. at the E 661 62 keV in the Clear table Calibration Sidebar already has the appropriate energy from the library and Des you need only accept it by marking an ROI and clicking on Enter The re Edit File fitted calibration curve is automatically displayed Fig 18 Energy Calibration Sidebar Control Menu ScintiVision SvDemol1 Anl Co 60 Co 57 4 Cs 137 20 ml bottles on endcap S N File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window EXT ae 5i i Energy Table ol xi gt Energy Graph Ef x Energy Channel Delta 1915 32 19 11 61 8 87 122207 42 99 2 86 EE 62 FEM 41 Bra 04 EE 24 FEM 83 Bra 16 1332 50 401 90 0 11 Fit ke 29 33 1257256 E 34 Hus 40 1333 99 keV No FWHM Cal Linear FWHM ORTEC 4 31 17 PM Mon 4 29 02 ERA ee nn ERA ee nn ren Sidebar to hg d Ed to Cancel 1 Nuclide Peaks 2 Unknown Peaks 95 724 Cnts FWHM 20 909864 Fig 19 Energy Calibration Display 19 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Proceed through the library list see Table 1 adding the following Table 1 Source Energies peaks in any order into the calibration To do this double click on Nuclide Energy keV the peak energy in the library list look at the display to see that the Y 1836 01 cursor is on the peak then click on Enter Co 122 07 Co 1173 2 If you decide that you don t want one o
145. ata i e where each pixel corresponds to exactly one channel the scale should be expanded until the number of channels is less than or equal to the size of the window Note that the marker can be moved by no less than one pixel or one channel whichever is greater at a time In the scenario described above where there are many more memory channels being represented on the display than there are pixels horizontally in the window the marker will move by more than one memory channel at a time even with the smallest possible change as performed with the lt gt and lt gt keys If true single channel motions are required the display must be expanded as described above In addition to changing the scaling of the spectrum the colors of the various spectrum features e g background spectrum ROIs can be changed using the Display menu 4 2 The Toolbar The row of buttons below the Menu Bar provides convenient shortcuts to some of the most common ScintiVision menu functions S The Recall button retrieves an existing spectrum file This is the equivalent of selecting File Recall from the menu E Save copies the currently displayed spectrum to disk It duplicates the menu functions File Save or File Save As depending on whether the spectrum was recalled from disk and whether any changes have been made to the spectrum window since the last save 34 4 DISPLAY FEATURES e Start Acquisition starts data collection in the
146. atabase and create and maintain Peak Background Correction PBC files 5 5 1 1 Sample Type This opens the Analysis Options dialog which has five tabs Sample Sample Type System Report Options and Corrections The fields on this set of Report Generator screens define a complete set of ScintiVision analysis settings Once Attenuation Coefficients defined they can be saved to a Sample Description svp file This Peak Background Correction gt SVD file can then be used in Jos files the Ask on Start dialog the Fig 121 The Settings QA analysis and other places within Scinti Vision Submenu To create an svp file complete all five screens of the dialog then return to the Sample tab Click on the Save As button in the upper right of the dialog This will open a standard file save dialog Enter the path and new filename then click on OK to return to the Sample tab Click again on OK to close Analysis Options NOTE This settings dialog applies to the active Detector only Each Detector must be selected and its settings changed individually 117 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Sample Tab Sample settings Fig 122 are those for which values are generally different for each sample type When an svbD file is recalled the date of Creation and last date the file was updated Edition are displayed Analysis Options 124 x Sample System Report Analysis Corrections Fe Browse Sa
147. ation program Error opening file If trying to write a file this would indicate a disk controller problem such as a full disk If trying to read a file this would indicate that the filename specified could not be found Error reading file STRIP aborted Could not read the file requested for stripping Error reading file File read error is usually a result of damaged media Error writing file File write error is usually a result of damaged media or full disk EXE for earlier version of Windows WinExec error 15 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Failure obtaining ROI or Peak A function that requires a defined ROI or Peak in the case of the Calibrate function when the marker is not placed in a channel with an ROI bit set and if a Peak is not very close by Failure of Detector function JOB Error 12 This error arises from a JOB that encounters an error when trying to access a Detector File already exists If the file output function requested would write a file with the same name as another file that already exists you are prompted for confirmation of the operation by this warning See also OK To Overwrite Existing File 267 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 File is wrong size Can t STRIP The STRIP function requires a compatible file for stripping from the spectrum in memory i e must contain the same number of channels File Not Found WinExec error 2 Er
148. be in the tenths of a channel CENTROID ENERGY The third column shows the peak centroid in energy if the spectrum is calibrated zero otherwise This is the first column converted to energy according to the energy coefficients in the calibration data This too is reported to the nearest hundredth of a channel Peaks are included in the unknown list if they are too far from a library peak so these extra digits might be of use BACKGROUND COUNTS The fourth column shows the background under the peak In most cases this is the straight line background but can be the stepped background in a deconvoluted region NET AREA COUNTS The fifth column shows the net area which is the gross area minus the background area The area is calculated by the summation method for singlets and by the fitting method for multiplets 184 7 THE REPORT Library used 1 sigma peak uncertainty This section based on library C USER SVdemo lib HKHKKEKAKEKETE TH EN TIFIED PEAK SUMMARY ERRERRRARNA NUCLIDE PEAK CENTROID BACKGROUND WET AREA INTENSITY UNCERT FWHM CHANNEL ENERGY COUNTS COUNTS CTS SEC 1 SIGMA keV Hd o tata tate O tite t itt ite t itt itt ito o tite t ite o o o o ho do odo c0 57 41 85 122 07 104066 467239 1557 463 0 18 11 653D c0 57 0 00 136 43 D 0 000 0 00 0 000 25 137 209 42 661 38 67268 230138 767 127 0 26 46 626 co 60 357 34 1173 24 44672 74122 247 074 0 55 62 703D co 60 401 49 1332 50 35493 71366 237 953 0 53 AUN 3 P
149. be the Internal working file or a File on disk If the Internal box is not checked a filename must be entered The working file is the one loaded with Analyze Settings Peak Background Correction Select PBC which is discussed beginning on page 130 The correction is explained in detail in Chapter 6 5 5 1 2 Attenuation Coefficients This command lets you add to modify and view the absorption correction database The attenuation database supplied with ScintiVision has many common materials already defined There are two ways to add new materials to this database e Define a new material that is composed of two or more materials already in the database ScintiVision will then calculate the new attenuation curve from the existing attenuation data e Define acompletely new material that is one not composed of materials in the database In this case you will enter the attenuation data in the Attenuation Worksheet sidebar and save the new material and its attenuation data it to the database Selecting Coefficient Table opens the Attenuation Worksheet Sidebar Attenuation Table and Attenuation graph window as illustrated in Fig 127 To select an absorber from the Attenuation Worksheet click on the down arrow button in the Absorber section to display the list of materials in the database and click on the desired entry Selecting a material loads the attenuation values and redisplays the Attenuation Table and graph Clicking the mouse
150. bels and the text Description from the file can be printed The description includes the sample detector and acquisition description Horizontal If the spectrum to be plotted is calibrated the plot can be either in Energy or Channel numbers If the spectrum is not calibrated this value is set to channel and cannot be altered Tic Marks small lines indicating the scale on the axes can be included Including them makes the plot more readable Grid Lines can also be included The grid lines are lines across the complete width of the plot at the major tic marks The plot can either be the complete spectrum or any part of the spectrum Unmarking Full Scale will enable Enter the Flange forte Horona fede the Range button Selecting Range will open the dialog shown in Fig 224 where the limits for the plot are set From E a Th f the pl ither in Channel iii e range of the plot can be either in Channels or Te fsizomonao Channels 6 Energy independent of the plot labeling In order to easily compare spectra the energy can be set to values Cancel below the first channel in the spectrum In this case the data below channel 0 are plotted as 0 Fig 224 Horizontal Range Options Dialog 245 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Vertical One of the two choices Log and Linear can be selected by clicking on the appropriate radio button The linear scale is set by clicking on Range Tic Marks small lines ind
151. buffer as we have done here directly from disk or in the Detector memory when the Detector is not counting If more than one window is open at one time the spectrum in the active window will be the one analyzed Analysis Options x Sample System Report Analysis Corrections File C UserSVDemol svd Browse Save s Creation Edition Description f Decay Correction Analysis Range 29 Apr 2002 From 110 To 18000 Collection date time Background Type During Acquisition s s SP Nuclide Library Calibration Internal v Internal v CAUSER Scx SVdemolib JEXUSERAScxiSvDemol Spe Browse Browse Fig 13 Analysis Options Dialog Sample Tab 15 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Analysis Options 21x Sample System Report Analysis Corrections Reporting Options Uncertainty Reporting Y Unknown peaks f Percent f Counting fe Activity Total v Library peak list v Library peak matrix Confidence level iw Nuclide abundance le 1 f 2 3Sigma Output re Printer Display Analysis Results Browse f Program Browse A Browse z m Fig 14 Analysis Options Dialog Report Tab While the analysis is taking place put the marker on the peak at 136 keV and expand the display horizontally with Zoom In After the analysis is complete the results will be printed or saved to disk according to your selection on the Report tab on the A
152. button and menu item zoom to a minimum horizontal scale of 646 of the ADC conversion gain For Zoom Out the horizontal width is increased by about 696 of full width ADC conversion gain and the vertical scale is doubled These replace the Narrower Wider and Shorter Taller commands in older versions of ScintiVision 33 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 The Keypad lt gt and Keypad lt gt accelerator keys duplicate the Zoom In and Zoom Out Toolbar buttons and Display menu commands The lt F5 gt lt F6 gt and lt gt lt 1 gt keys change the vertical scale by a factor of two without changing the horizontal scale The lt F7 gt lt F8 gt and keyboard lt gt lt gt keys change the horizontal scale by a factor of two without changing the vertical scale Depending on the expansion or overall size of the spectrum all or part of the selected spectrum can be shown in the expanded view Therefore the number of channels could be larger than the horizontal size of the window as measured in pixels In this case where the number of channels shown exceeds the window size all of the channels cannot be represented by exactly one pixel dot Instead the channels are grouped together and the vertical displacement corresponding to the maximum channel in each group is displayed This maintains a meaningful representation of the relative peak heights in the spectrum For a more precise representation of the peak shapes displaying all available d
153. by peak search n almost all cases this should be set as true Library based peak stripping Not used in ScintiVision APPENDIX B FILE FORMATS This appendix describes the file structure for the database files See the File Structure Manual for complete descriptions of the formats for these files including sPC CHN and uFo files This appendix also includes two program examples that show how to access the spectrum files Our Analysis Results Programmer s Toolkit A12 B32 can be used to develop user written programs to read the analysis results B 1 1 CFG SCX SVD STR B 1 2 CHN SPC AN1 ROI CLS LIB B 1 ScintiVision File Types DetectorPATH Files ConFiGuration System Detector configuration information used by Detector DLL modified by Configuration function binary format ScintiVisionConteXt a context file automatically created for each Detector device to remember all extra information required for analyses calibration etc binary format Sample type defaults Created in the Analyze Settings Sample Type function binary format STaRt Start Date Time for Detector types which cannot store this information internally binary format Spectrum Files CHaNnels Old MAESTRO style spectral data file binary format SPeCtrum Spectrum with full analysis settings calibration descriptions etc Inform type binary format Alte
154. by the Zoom In Zoom Out Toolbar buttons 9 5 5 Fine Gain Keypad lt Alt gt lt Alt gt These accelerators step the internal amplifier up or down by one increment of fine gain on the selected Detector 1f 1t has a software controlled amplifier The new fine gain setting 1s shown on the Supplemental Information Line at the bottom of the screen If the gain stabilizer is active the display of the histogram data might not change The fine gain can also be set with Acquire Adjust Controls Section and Keypad lt Shift Alt gt Shift Alt gt and keyboard Alt gt lt Alt gt and Shift Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt 210 10 JOB FILES The ScintiVision JoB file consists of one or more lines of ASCII text representing a series of commands that can automate most of the functions described earlier in this manual The details of the commands and the required syntax are given in this chapter To create a new JoB file use Windows Notepad or another ASCII editor or open an existing JOB file from Services Job Control edit it and save it under a new name A JOB file can be started from the Job Control dialog or by including the name of the Jos file e g GVDEMO JOB on the command line when ScintiVision is first started see Section A 1 1 JOB files are used for the following types of functions e Performing a repetitive task such as running a sequence of experiments without user int
155. c All Rights Reserved Fig 65 About ScintiVision If you are connected to the Internet click on the Visit ORTEC OnLine button to browse our website which in addition to our product catalog includes application notes technical papers information on training courses and access to our Global Service Center 5 2 Acquire The Acquire menu is shown in Fig 66 Access to the various functions depends on whether the software is in Detector or buffer mode Download Spectra is only available for the digiDART and DART View ZDT Corrected is only valid for the DSPEC Pro DSPEC jr 2 0 and DSPEC Plus NOTE Insome cases a Detector option might be grayed because it is disabled for the current Detector while it might still be valid for some other Detector in the system or for this Detector under different conditions 59 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 5 2 1 Acquisition Settings Acquire Acquisition Settings This command opens the Acquisition Settings dialog Fig 67 which allows you to control a number of questions that can be Start a M uH Start Save Report asked on start when a Detector is started and their default Stop Alte values Clear Alt 3 Copy to Buffer Alte5 5 2 1 1 Start Save Report QA 7 For the Start Save Report function there are two selections to be Download Spectra made One is to select the automatic clear of the Detector before the Detector is started Clear at Start and the second
156. cal Level Peak Rejection Criteria 20 0 cece eee 169 0 2 Peak Fitting haste Rl athe cen dco nae ia p ders b iot eae 170 0 27 Backeround EIb a dha aie cians Se Oe reca b es dui d 170 6 2 1 1 E3near Backgrounds atea mea vest usu de OOo Rire E e 170 DUG PERENNEM ERE Bias eee 170 hilos ger c c n ee 171 Polynomial backgrounds 060 ee eee ee eee 172 Sparse peak TEO at bus ect ye de 172 0 22 The Peak EH eoe Steele cde ne hae b eee alo nee e 172 6 2 2 1 Adding and Removing Peaks c 22 6 si 0 4 weds eve ad 173 6 2 2 2 Directed Fit Metliod twas sus 2 RR ROMAE E Ree et 173 6 3 Libraty Based Peak Stripping sita cadence RO De Rer aon De Ne TRO eee CR Y aces 174 6 4 Peak Ide nBfleatlons aue om eno ete Siti Mes Wie hn ade e eee ide 175 OL T Peak Identification osea hid pi xa he SUS eRe Rede sae QS aos 175 6 4 2 Fraction Limit Tests E Bek Bae Eee Rae 175 64 3 Decay Limit Test usados b ie a een e et t meu iod eve 176 645 Nue mde CUY aodio UO ERU ea i po aO E ERE EAS ARA 176 6 4 5 Statistical Detection Limits 4 2 hag veces xu DX DS a 177 6 4 5 1 MDA Minimum Detectable Activity o ooooooooo o 177 6 5 Peak Background Correction co bss Iosis 178 PIE REPORT a ne Gren waste ah erm Sted Buea meu vete dde 179 Tai First Pape E were ate lone eens erase VOLUI Cae NM raft ohne wee E 179 7 2 Umdentitied Peak Summary ais hec eee Ae ne eee A AAA EE CARA 182 73 gt Identitied Peak Summary
157. cessing The REM command allows entering descriptive comments into script files or disabling commands during testing of scripts REPORT filename This prints the sample and detector descriptions the Detector number real time and live time and the date of the selected data memory The format of the report is described in the 231 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 discussion of the File menu for the Report function This command has the same function as Report under Analyze The output can be printed on the printer PRN or sent to a disk file which can be used by other programs or printed later The loop count value can be included in the filename by typing three question marks in the text where the loop count is to be inserted The loop count replaces in the filename The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 RUN program This executes an application named program This is typically an ExE filename Note that the program will not run to completion before returning to ScintiVision unless it is run at higher priority or the WAIT command is used The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 Any arguments to the program can be included in the quotation marks RUN MINIMIZED program Same as the RUN command above except that the application is run initially as an icon minimized rather than as a normal window SAVE d NpathV file spc n 232
158. ch no file yet exists enter the new filename in the File name field and press lt Enter gt or click on Save The Save As dialog also allows the reuse of an existing filename by saving new data into an existing file Note that this completely overwrites destroys the previous data To do this double click on a filename from the list of files box or enter one of those existing filenames into the File name field then press lt Enter gt or click on Save The system will display a message saying This file already exists Replace existing file Click on Yes to save the new data or No to cancel the Save As operation 4 5 1 Changing Drive and Pathname There are two ways to change to another directory and or drive click on the Look in Save in field to Lookin E User El open a droplist of all drives and subdirectories on e the PC see Fig 46 or click on the Up One Level m button just right of the Look in Save in field to c move one level at a time to higher level directories E an Neighborhood In both cases movement through the drives and c4 Online Services directories is similar to using Windows Explorer Fig 46 Changing Drive and Pathname with the Droplist 4 6 Help ScintiVision provides two kinds of help What s This help on the buttons and features of the main screen and Question Mark help on features fields and procedures within the dialog boxes To use What s This help Fig 47 point th
159. char 2 stdout printf nSTARTING CHANNEL 6in chan offset printf nNUMBER OF CHANNELS 6i n n num_ chans BRR RRR ehe e ehe e ERR e e e hee e hee e he e ehe e e he e e he e ehe e e che e eoe e e e e he e e e e k e e e x Channel Data Output channel data from CHN file A e he e ehe e KK e e he e che e eoe e he e e ee e k kkk printf CHANNEL DATA n for count 0 count num chans count if count 6 0 6 channels per line printf n 7i count with channel number fread amp chan data sizeof long 1 f pointer printf 11i chan data fcloseall 262 APPENDIX C JOB FILE ERROR MESSAGES Errors are displayed in warning boxes or in some cases in the information line at the bottom of the window Acquisition Failure JOB Error 11 For some reason an acquisition function failed from a Jos file Already started Detector already active when a Start Acquisition command was issued Altering Detector data Restoring data to a Detector would destroy the data already there Amplifier not pole zeroed Warning from an MCB with automatic pole zero indicating that the Detector should be pole zeroed Analysis Completed for GSA EXE has finished executing Analysis Error n A call to GSADLL DLL has been completed but an error was encountered The error code n has the following meaning Error Warning Meaning 2 0 Illegal character in file
160. cintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 ZOOM lt i gt Changes the size of the ScintiVision window to icon normal or maximum ZOOM lt x y w h gt Changes the position and size of the ScintiVision window to the stated values 10 2 JOB File Variables Variables have been added to the Jos file features to allow more flexibility and control of the JOBS These variables are defined by the program or by user entries They can be used anywhere in the JOB file For example FullPath D then FullBase FileExt FileDir ShortPath ShortBase USER SOIL SAM001 SPC D USER SOIL SAMO001 SPC D USER SOIL SAM001 SPC SAMOO1 The following variables are expanded in Jos file strings FullPath FullBase FileExt FileDir McaDir CurDir Loop Loop1 Bel CR FF LF ESC AutoFile ShortPath 218 Full pathname of the spectrum file Full pathname of the spectrum without the and extension File extension of the spectrum file without the Directory of the spectrum file without the last backslash V ScintiVision directory without the last backslash Starting current directory of ScintiVision Current value of the loop counter zero based Loop counter plus 1 ASCII bell character ASCII carriage return character ASCII form feed character ASCII line feed character ASCII escape character Create an automatic f
161. ck Detector Edit Detector List Fig 159 Services Menu discussion JOBs allow you to easily perform repetitive tasks and or define initial conditions at Detector startup These files are given a filename extension of JOB To start a JOB or edit a JoB file select Services Job Control to display the dialog shown in Fig 160 To create a new JOB file use Windows Notepad or another ASCII editor or open an existing JOB file edit it and save it under a new name Torun a JOB select a JOB filename and click on Open The contents of the selected file can be displayed at the bottom of the dialog by using the mouse to mark the Show Contents checkbox Note that displaying the file contents will slow down the accessing of files especially when browsing through a long list Once a JOB is started most menu functions will be disabled grayed to prevent interference with the running JOB The gos file name will displayed in the window title 150 Run JOB File Look in CX User a lockett job Z Start2 ob ae Test 0 5 startgv job Se Testi 24 Beepss job 5 Strtgain job Re Test12 22 Fieldsav job 22 Mgaq job 2 sweden job 2 Test13 23 fred with space job lt 3 Octetehy job z Test job Re Test2 jc s fred job 2 quitsee job 25 Testl job Res Test3 jc AAA y Femme Jump SSS Files of type Job Files Cancel v Show Contents E dit File recall option c user d
162. cking on the desired column header 5 6 2 Select File This opens the Load Library File dialog If a library has already been selected it is shown in the File name field If File name contains the default entry LIB no library is currently selected Select the desired disk and filename and click on Open This library becomes the working library 143 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Library List x TA um Lib Nuclide Energy Percent Half Life n1 Spc Co 60 Co 57 amp Cs 137 20 ml bottle ulate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window 8 tes A E92 eeu Ec 9 DRTEC 11 12 06 AM Marker 210 663 32 keV 17017 Cnts Library Cs 137 Cesium at 661 66 16248 71 Bq Thu 4 18 02 Fig 150 Library Peak List note that clicking on a nuclide in the list moves the marker line to the corresponding peak 5 6 3 Edit This submenu contains two commands that allow you to create a new library file or change the contents of an existing library file It allows you to select the ScintiVision Editor or Nuclide Navigator if NuclideNavigator III is installed The ScintiVision library editor is discussed here the Nuclide Navigator editor is described in the NuclideNavigator III user manual Figure 151 shows the ScintiVision library Editing dialog The control menu is shown in Fig 152 click on the Title Bar icon to open it it contains several of the commands necessary to create and edit the
163. command was issued To clear this counter click on the Clear Spectrum button on the toolbar or issue Acquire Clear Presets 5 MENU COMMANDS Amplifier Ampliier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVokage About Status Presets 1 Enable Counter 0 Aux0 Counter 0 Auxl Counter 0 Fig 85 digiBASE Status Tab Figure 86 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on a Detector that is not acquiring data during acquisition the preset field backgrounds are gray indicating that they are inactive You can use either or both presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable both presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the Detector to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting The values of all presets for the cur rently selected Detector are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Ampifier Ampifier2 ADC Stabiizer High Voltage About Status E Preses 0 500 00 Real Time 500 00 Live Time Fig 86 digiBASE The Presets Tab Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of s
164. ct the Detectors to be grouped for calibration click on Edit List to open the Detector List Editor dialog Fig 107 When this learn sequence is run all the Detectors on the list will be calibrated Fill in the information about the calibration including the Number of Sources 1 5 whether or not to also calibrate the efficiency and whether or not to save the calibration results to a file for each Detector 107 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Automatic Calibration Fig 106 Calibration Information Detector List Editor 20x Master Detector List 0000001 RONALDKE MCB 1 0000002 RONALDKE MCB 2 0000011 DART Portable unit 3 0 0000003 SINGLEY DSPEC 01 0000004 SINGLEY DSPEC 02 0000005 SINGLEY DSPEC 03 0000011 DART Portable unit 3 0000106 DART Portable unit 2 92x O2MCALLISTER_DO Fig 107 Select the Detectors for the Calibration List Click on OK when the screen is completely filled in This will open the Calibration Source Data Sheet dialog shown in Fig 108 108 5 MENU COMMANDS Enter the name or Label of the source the Count Time in Seconds the Assay Date and Source No 1 Time the Source Units the peak Energy in Lab Cs 137insmallbotle Cancel keV and Source Strength in gammas sec Count Time in Seconds 300 If you select Becquerels or Microcuries oer yee lane 200 00 instead of Gammas Sec fill in the activity Source Units After the Energy and S
165. ction tah ot 97 134 135 Offset sol adeat nae ative puto M Rid 83 OPUMIZEs beh E 66 85 236 Passwords Galva eh adt a te p ac qe 151 190 MEU as Rat ettet d ser ao M 151 PBO Modre ah E e att tas 129 178 Peak JXOLDVILIGS 6 50 s ame Root ace aet eu a ub S a uh 176 PD rieres deat ate etit teta ga fot 170 Identification tr estt trei ex ita 175 peak cetnttoldc x tocar oett bou e ses 184 peak Seatc Bi Les sees sene penn e ROVS 229 Search adco urea toti pota its 167 A 2rd Cedo fe ane tide e Ex Rot 169 Peak area directed fit ets 173 Peak Background Correction PBC turning on the correction 124 Peak Info oii 7 pend ne wae EI RS 113 164 Peak Rejection Criteria 169 Peak Searels aleta 229 Peaked Background Correction PBC 129 178 280 create table automatic 131 create table manual 130 select Keanu wt cote win ware e E aC wee Rat Bt M3 130 PHA eng betae flaca te natin tag Md ah RAT wes 2 PHA Modessa ai ex hho ake c e ne 83 84 Pileup reject marker coe oes ewok ad ale ate als 84 Poisson Noise Statistics 177 Dole Zelo cma oes tct 27 66 68 85 236 AMOMALO 2 42 fa od an oct paese e ce at 27 Preamplifier DE criada 66 Presets see Acquisition presets 74 Print O tace emt oat ne DER Be D Ras 150 SDGCIEUE cese Lacke e ata Fa 57 QA see Quality assurance 189 Quadrat Tit seir oeae onie etek e reas 10
166. ctory for Windows 21 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Run Options These three radio buttons Minimized Maximized and Normal Window are used to select the window for the program If the program does not have any user dialogs any option can be selected If the program needs user inputs Normal Window should be selected 5 1 1 3 Import Click on the Import tab to display the dialog shown in Fig 55 The program to be executed and the default file extension when the Import function is selected can then be specified Choose any program that can accept the spectrum filename on the command line Click on Browse to automatically select the complete proper path for the program File Settings 21x General Export Import Directories Import Program EME ESO E A Browse Arguments i txt ShortPath spe ShortB ase Spc gt Initial Directory FileDir Default Txt Run Options e Minimized Maximized C Normal Window Cancel Fig 55 Import Tab Arguments The arguments to the program can be specified as directly entered File Path Name character strings or you can select from the list of macros shown File Base Name in Fig 56 The list is displayed by clicking on the arrow button to the is iei right of the Arguments field The entries macros or direct must be is SA separated by spaces to be read as separate arguments Fig 56 Import Arguments File Path Name This wil
167. current Detector using Pwd as the password VIEW i This moves the with Field Mode 66599 1 th stored spectrum to position 0 This command is only valid in MCBs WAIT lt seconds gt This suspends execution of the JOB to wait until either the active Detector stops counting in the case where the seconds argument is not included or for a fixed number of seconds WAIT program This suspends execution of the JOB to wait until the named program stops execution If the program does not stop this JOB will not continue It is good practice to put a WAIT 2 command between the RUN program and WAIT program commands to give Windows time to start the program before the status is checked The program name must agree with the name used in Windows and must include the EXE extension WAIT AUTO For DSPEC only this waits until the optimize function is complete WAIT CHANGER This waits until the sample ready signal on the rear panel is present It is used in conjunction with the SEND COMMAND function for more control over the sample changer than is provided by the CHANGE SAMPLE command WAIT PZ This waits until the PZ function is complete WAIT QA This waits until QA is complete 237 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 WAIT SERIAL Command timeout Response This is used to send and receive commands on the serial port of MCBs It is designed to be used to control sample changers with RS 232 contro
168. cussed in Fem6 txt Nplssib tst E Puespo3 txt S 5 1 1 3 Th b Femb txt ils El Test txt ection 3 1 1 3 e program can be one Nplos1 txt Pgedisc txt 2 Textitem txt of the programs supplied or can be user supplied When selected the Import File 2 2 File name Nplss1 bd txt dialog see Fig 62 is displayed and you Files of type T Fil y select the filename The file is then read and a Carcel a spectrum file is written to the specified Fig 62 The Import File Dialog directory ScintiVision attempts to read this file in cHN or sPc format and displays the spectrum If the Import program does not produce a file that ScintiVision can read no spectrum is displayed 5 1 6 Print The Print function does one of the following e If the marker is in an ROL the data contents of the ROI channels are printed e Ifthe marker is not in an ROI the contents of the channels in the spectrum window are printed The data are formatted at seven channels per line with the channel number on the left Use the Print dialog to print the output or save it in a disk file click on Print to file to mark it Click on Properties to change print options such as paper orientation and resolution 5 1 7 Compare This function displays a spectrum from disk along with the current spectrum so the two can be visually compared When Compare Spectra is selected a standard file recall dialog box opens see Section 4 5 or 5 1
169. d each time a START command is executed This will stop execution of the JOB file until the question is answered START OPTIMIZE For DSPEC series instruments that support the Optimize feature this starts the optimize function for the Detector START PZ This starts the PZ function for the detector It is automatically included in the optimize function This command is only available for MCBs with internal amplifiers STOP This stops data collection in the active Detector If the Detector has already been stopped no operation occurs This command has the same function as Stop under the Acquire menu STOP PZ This stops the PZ function for the detector Note that the PZ function is not complete when this is used The PZ function should be allowed to complete automatically This command is only available for MCBs with internal amplifiers 236 10 JOB FILES STRIP lt factor gt file chn This strips the disk spectrum specified in the SET NAME STRIP command or in the command itself either way is acceptable the filename is optional in this command from the spectrum in the buffer and stores the results in the buffer The disk and selected data memory spectra must be the same size The disk spectrum can be scaled up or down by factor a constant or if factor is zero by the ratio of the live times of the two spectra The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 UNLOCK Pwd This unlocks the
170. d spc irectory as shown in Fig 6 From the list SvDemolAni HE SwDemo2Ani of files double click on SVDEMO1 SPC or SvDemol Spe SvDemo2 Spe S Demola spe Ire SVDemo2a spc click once on the file name then click on OK svDEMo1 sPc will be displayed in a window as shown in Fig 7 The Status Filename EEA Sidebar on the right of the screen will now c us tegase f Cancel show details about this spectrum When a second spectrum is recalled it will be displayed in a second window and so on J Show Description Integer Data Format 512 Channels Co 60 Co 57 amp Cs 137 20 ml bottles on endcap S N 1721 1753 The sidebar will show details for the Fig 6 Recalling a Spectrum File spectrum in the active window click on a portion of an inactive window to activate it Note the vertical marker line which you can move by clicking the left mouse button on a different part of the spectrum The Marker Information Line at the bottom of the display reflects the channel contents at the marker s location You can tell that this spectrum is already calibrated because the information about the marker reads in units of energy keV An uncalibrated spectrum would instead display the word unca1 If the spectrum files listed on page 11 are not present the working directory is probably not set to Cc NUser Click on the Look in droplist and select c NUser as your working directory 11 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35
171. ddition the 5 MENU COMMANDS Properties for RANDT266 MCB 132 3 x High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset Amplifier Ampliier2 AmplifierPRO ADC Stabilizer Gate Conversion Gain ERE n current real time live time and count Lower Level ise 50 3 rate are monitored at the bottom of the ZDT Mode dialog Off Upper Level Disc 16383 Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With Fea Tera elie this function Off no gating is per E Bee formed that is all detector signals are processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 ns beyond peak detect peak maximum Count Rate 12102 Fig 72 DSPEC jr 2 0 ADC Tab ZDT Mode Use this droplist to choose the ZDT Mode to be used for collecting the zero dead time corrected spectrum see Section 5 2 10 6 The three modes are Off LTC only NORM_CORR LTC and ZDT and CORR_ERR ERR and ZDT If one of the ZDT modes is selected both spectra are stored in the same spectrum sPc file If you do not need the ZDT spectrum you should select Off In MAESTRO the display can show either of the two spectra with the Acquire ZDT Display Select command
172. ded there If the largest residual is negative the peak closest to that channel might be removed Up to ten peaks can be added to or subtracted from a fitting region After the region is fitted Y is calculated If the new fit has not changed y by more than 0 1 x the largest residual convergence limit the fit is saved and the program moves to the next fitting region The convergence limit is a parameter entered on the Options tab of Analyze Settings Sample Type Section 5 5 1 1 6 2 2 2 Directed Fit Method Another method of obtaining the peak area for a particular energy is to fit the spectrum region with a background plus peak shape function This so called directed fit can be applied to peaks and has the ability to produce negative peak areas The negative peak area will produce a negative activity and this will be reported Negative activities are required by some reporting agencies for statistical purposes The directed fit to the library peak area is done if the following are true 1 The option is enabled 2 The spectrum is energy calibrated 3 The peak area was zero in the regular analysis If all these conditions are met the spectrum region for 2 times the calibration FWHM centered on the peak energy is fit as above but with the area allowed to go negative 173 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 6 3 Library Based Peak Stripping In a few cases all of the gamma rays emitted by one isotope are very close in
173. dialog with or without arguments as described below f ScintiVision 32 HI M MCB Configuration Lo Nuclide Library Editor All Programs Log Off Turn Off Computer ScintiVision Fig 226 Starting ScintiVision A 1 1 Command Line Options ScintiVision is run with the following command line properties SCV B dI n L file lib 11 p pick t z file job All of the arguments are optional one or more can be omitted Thus at a minimum ScintiVision can be executed without any arguments at all in which case certain defaults apply for the Detector list and nuclide library as described below All of the switches e g d z can be uppercase or lowercase e g d or D z or z n is an optional parameter for the d switch to enable debugging output mode at a specified level values are 1 or 2 no argument is equivalent to 1 Default is no debugging Debug mode is not recommended for general use file lib is an optional nuclide library L option to be loaded at startup The default is the library loaded when ScintiVision exited pick is an optional Detector pick list name p option The pick list name must be 5 characters or less if none is specified with the p option then MCA is used by default 249 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 file job Forces ScintiVision to be Always on Top The default is the normal Windows display Allows one and only one instanc
174. duce a good result the FWHM function can be set to be a linear fit of the points by clicking the Linear FWHM box in the bottom of the sidebar This is mainly used when there are only a few points in the calibration If the quadratic fit to the FWHM does not produce a good result the FWHM function can be set to be a linear fit of the points by clicking the Linear FWHM box in the bottom of the side bar This is mainly used when there are only a few points in the calibration Other Energy Calibration Sidebar Features Note the Save and Recall buttons in the Calibration Sidebar s Table da box The Save button stores the energy keV the centroid channel and Move the FWHM channels in an ASCII table file called an energy table file MO EET assigned the extension ENT The saved tables of values can be used for bien future calibrations using the same nuclides by clicking on the Recall Destroy button ENT files can be edited with Edit File in the sidebar s control A menu Fig 94 click the Title Bar icon on the Calibration Sidebar or offline with an ASCII editor such as Windows Notepad Fig 94 Calibration Sidebar Control Menu Other menu items in the sidebar control menu are Move Close Restore and Destroy Destroy clears the internal energy calibration table Restore reinstates the internal energy calibration table to the values before Destroy was chosen but only if done before exiting the Energy ca
175. e and Half Life and click on OK Now at the bottom of the right hand peak list click on Insert to open the Edit Library Peak dialog Fig 158 Enter the energy of the gamma ray and the yield of the peak 5 6 3 3 Editing Library List Nuclides To edit the information about a nuclide in the working library 146 Insert Library Nuclide xj Nuclide Name Half Life o Days Uncertainty 0 0000 Nuclide Flags Thermal Neutron Activation T Fast Neutron Activation F Fission Product I Naturally Occurring Isotope N Photon Reaction P Charged Particle Reaction C No MDA Calculation M Activity Not in Total 4 Cancel Fig 154 Insert a Nuclide into a Library 5 MENU COMMANDS Click on the nuclide to highlight it The Edit button in the upper right Edit Cd 109 of Fig 151 will change to Edit plus the name of the nuclide as shown in Figure 155 Fig 155 Ready to Edit this Nuclide Click on Edit nuclide This will open the Edit Library Nuclide dialog Fig 156 The Nuclide Name Half Life Uncertainty and Nuclide Flags will already be listed The Uncertainty is a single numter that represents the Edit Library Nuclide WE uncertainty 2 sigma or 95 confidence level in the Nuclide Name REGIE values entered for this nuclide It is added in quadrature Halflife 12410 fs to form the total uncertainty on the final report The Unce
176. e at some spot in the inactive window and clicking The multi key functions such as Alt 1 or Shift gt gt are executed by holding down the first key e g Alt Shift or lt Ctrl gt while pressing the key that follows the sign in the brackets then releasing both keys simultaneously Functions that use the keypad keys begin with the word Keypad e g Keypad lt 5 gt As usual for any Windows application the menus are accessed by clicking on them with the mouse or by using the Alt key plus the key that matches the underlined letter in the menu item name For example the multi key combination to activate the File menu is Alt F gt Note that the ScintiVision accelerator keys do not interfere with Windows menu operations or task switching For example when a menu is active 1 e pulled down the 2 and 1 1 keys revert to their normal Windows functions of moving across the menu bar and scrolling up down within a menu respectively As soon as the menu is closed they behave as ScintiVision accelerators again 9 2 Marker and Display Function Keys 9 2 1 Next Channel lt gt gt lt gt When not in rubber rectangle mode the right and left arrow keys move the marker by one displayed pixel in the corresponding direction This can represent a jump of more than one spectral data memory channel especially if the horizontal scale in channels is larger than the width in pixels of the window s
177. e centroid of OK ae the peak will be displayed in the upper part of the calibration input Ll Exe window as in this example Channel 210 01 This is the channel Fig 92 Estimate FWHM number of the peak centroid Now use the mouse to select the E field and enter the energy of this peak Press Enter or click on the Enter button An Energy Table and Energy Calibration Fit graph will appear on the screen see Fig 93 They can be moved around and resized if you wish The graph and table each have their own control menus The table will show one value the one just entered and the graph will show a straight line fit from energy 0 channel 0 to the energy and channel just entered This is an approximate calibration it should be fairly accurate if the zero offset is small 93 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 ScintiVision Buffer SvDemol Spc Fie Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window bel 73 me the A 1 B Energy Table Pee Ue 9H KELI esr 6 661 62 209 41 661 34 0 04 1173 24 356 83 1171 40 0 16 1332 50 401 90 1333 99 0 11 Energy Graph 1915 keV Buffer SvDemol Spc ORTEC 3 40 59 PM Fri 5 3 02 Marker 42 122 53 keV 95 724 Cnts FWHM 20 909864 Calibrating Close Sidebar to Finish or ESC to Cancel 1 Nuclide Peaks 0 Unknown Peaks Fig 93 Energy Calibration On the Calibration Sidebar the Fit radio buttons allow you to display
178. e cursor at the desired screen feature and click the right mouse button If help is available for that feature a small What s This box will open beside the cursor arrow Left click once on What s This to open the help message Press Esc to close help 4 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Pulse Ht Analysis Started 14 33 57 24 Apr 1998 Real 97 14 lt lt 96 78 What s This hs This field contains the Live Time of the viewed spectrum in seconds Fig 47 What s This Help To use Question Mark help Fig 48 locate the question mark box on the various dialogs and sidebars Left click on the a appears beside the arrow pointer point at the feature you want to know about and left click to open the help message Press Esc to close help Calculation Settings 24 x Ea This field contains the X factor used in the full width at 1 X maximum calculation in the Peak Info calculation for the ROI v for Pw 1 ME E peak marked by the cursor The X factor may be between 1 and 99 Fig 48 Question Mark Help 4 7 Drag and Drop Several types of files can be selected and loaded into ScintiVision using the Windows drag and drop feature The file types are spectra SPC AN1 CHN calibration cLS library LIB analysis results UFO peak background correction PBC and region of interest ROI The drag and drop file is handled the same as a read recall o
179. e dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live 74 5 MENU COMMANDS time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the Detector in which case that Detector continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when
180. e not altered by this operation The disk filename in quotation marks can be any valid filename with optional elements as described for the SAVE command above The default extension is Ror The loop count value can be included in the filename by typing three question marks in the text where the loop count is to be inserted The loop count replaces wherever it appears The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 SEND MESSAGE command This is used to send NIM 488 commands to the active Detector This can be used to perform any operations of the Detector that are desired The text must be in the syntax expected by the Detector If the response from the Detector does not end with a command accepted message then this command will exit with error Specific Detector commands and syntax are described in the technical manual associated with each specific Detector The following is an example of using this command to set the fine and coarse gain to a total value of 50 the product of the fine 2 0 5 and coarse 2 100 gains 233 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 SET DETECTOR 1 STOP CLEAR SEND MESSAGE SET GAIN FINE 2048 SEND MESSAGE SET GAIN COARSE 100 SET_BUFFER This selects the buffer It is the same as SET DETECTOR 0 SET DETECTOR number This selects the active Detector or the buffer The Detector number can be 1 to 999 according to the Detector configuration or 0 for the buffer
181. e on that nuclide to highlight it then to Paste click on the Paste button which will be labeled with the name of the Cut nuclide The Cut nuclide will be inserted in the space above the highlighted nuclide Several nuclides can be cut at one time from the list then pasted back into the list into a different order Cut nuclides remain queued up for pasting last one first according to the nuclide name on the Paste button To move a nuclide to the end of the PBC list Cut the nuclide from the list highlight the end entry and click on the Paste button Peak Editing When a nuclide is selected in the working psc file the right half of the Edit PBC dialog shows the peak list Note the column headers Rank Energy and C P S To sort the peak list by a particular parameter in the list click on the appropriate header 133 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 To edit a peak either double click on the peak in the right hand list or click once on it then click on the Edit button This will open the PBC Peak dialog Fig 136 Use the same PBC Peak dialog to add a peak click on the peak just below the desired insertion point in the peak list then click on Insert This will open the PBC Peak dialog Enter the energy and counts for the peak and click on OK Peaks can be deleted with Cut and moved with Cut Paste The order of the peaks is not important and has no effect on the correction Several peaks can be cut at one time
182. e printed at the far right of this page 182 7 THE REPORT ORTEC SV I 0 GSAS I1W95 18 01 MAY 2002 17 04 14 Page 2 ORTEC Spectrum name svdemol spc KRESS U N I D E N T T F I E D P E A K S U M M A R Y Loco cc ccc PEAK CENTROID BACKGROUND NET AREA EFFICIENCY UNCERT FWHM CHANNEL ENERGY COUNTS COUNTS AREA l SIGMA keV 31 14 89 07 633650 126686 2 997E 05 0 93 31 113 sD 283 49 913 49 72714 3950 6 249E 04 9 79 63 007 s Peak fails shape tests D Peak area deconvoluted d Legend for peak flags Peak intensity or Peak width Peak flags peak area efficiency Fig 189 Unidentified Peak Summary on Page 2 BACKGROUND COUNTS The third column shows the background under the peak NET AREA COUNTS The fourth column shows the net area which is the gross area minus the background area The area is calculated by the summation method for singlets and by the fitting method for multiplets INTENSITY CTS SEC The next column shows the net area divided by the live time to yield the counts second for the peak or the peak area times the efficiency at this energy To choose which will be printed edit G30WINDS INI Section A 2 2 UNCERTAINTY The next column shows the counting uncertainty for this net peak area as selected on the Report tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type The choice of 1 2 or 3 sigma value is operator selected PEAK WIDTH
183. e pulse to be counted If the mode is set to Anticoincidence then the marked region will show the pulses that are accepted That is the rejected peaks will not be marked Simply put in all modes the accepted peaks are marked 5 MENU COMMANDS Peak This is the peak detect pulse It indicates when the peak detect circuit has detected a valid pulse The Mark occurs about 1 5 us after the pulse maximum on the display On the lower right of the InSight display are the shaping parameter controls The controls are split into two groups and the other controls button switches between them One group includes Rise Time Flattop Tilt and the Optimize button The Rise Time value is for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop this varies by instrument The Tilt adjustment varies the flatness of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively Optimize can set the tilt value automatically This value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSight mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The Optimize button also automatically adjusts the po
184. e to run Start up in the buffer is the zoom switch with several variations z Of z Z X Yow h Z0 Z 1 z 1 with no arguments causes the previously stored Zoom parameters see page 238 to be used to position and size the ScintiVision window positions the upper left corner of the ScintiVision window to pixel coordinates x y and sizes the window to width w and height h these arguments are the same as for the Zoom profile variables page 239 239 forces position and size to be determined by Windows tiling algorithm forces ScintiVision to be maximized forces ScintiVision to be minimized icon is an optional JOB file to be executed at start up Certain defaults apply if any one or more of these arguments is omitted The initial Detector list is named MCA cra The nuclide library is assumed to be DEFAULT mcB by default on MCBPATH or the last library used And no JOB is automatically executed unless the file job argument is included A 2 Analysis Setup The default analysis engine GSA has several options that can be specified in a disk file G30WINDS INI The report output text can also be specified in a disk file 630WIN INI These files are loaded by SETUP but if not found or cannot be read the internal defaults are used As supplied the files are the same as the internal defaults These files should only be changed after careful consideration of the impact of
185. eak fails shape tests LO Peak fan D Peak area deconvoluted Legend for peak flags Peak net area Peak count rate Peak width Fig 190 Identified Library Peak List INTENSITY CTS SEC The next column shows either the net area divided by the live time to yield the counts second for the peak or the efficiency at this energy times the peak area See Section B 5 2 for instructions on selecting one or the other UNCERTAINTY The next column shows the counting uncertainty for this net peak area All library peaks are reported even if their error exceeds the input sensitivity cutoff PEAK WIDTH The next column shows the FWHM of the net peak area The last column shows a symbol if the peak is too wide or too narrow as compared to the shape calibration or a different symbol if the peak area was deconvoluted Otherwise it is blank The symbol explanations are printed at the bottom of the list 7 4 Library Peak Usage Figure 191 shows the isotope peak matrix or summary of library peak usage You can suppress this section It is not available if the library is not found or the spectrum is not efficiency calibrated If library based peak stripping is enabled there will be a separate list for the two analysis libraries The library name is printed at the beginning of the list 185 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Nuclide activity Library peak energy Peak activity Peak MDA Branching ratio for this peak vue SIUMMAR OF LIB ARYPEAK USAGE TUTE
186. ebar enter the correct energy for this peak 1332 5 keV mark an ROI and click on Enter The system will automatically perform a simple calibration based on this peak and the assumption that channel zero is energy zero The graphs of the calibration and the table of values will be displayed as shown in Fig 19 If the screen becomes too visually crowded you can move one or more windows until they are nearly stacked atop each other leave at least an edge or corner of each window showing or close one or more windows by clicking on their Close box Xp However do not close the Calibration 18 Energy Channel 42 85 E 1122 07 ke Enter Table 5 Energies Delete Energy Recall Save Fit Energy C FWHM No FWHM Cal Linear FWHM Fig 17 Energy Calibration Sidebar 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL Sidebar or you ll end the calibration session Remember you can bring a window to the front by clicking on any part of it if it s not visible move one or more of the others until you can see it Now we can use the library Double click on the 661 62 keV peak of Cs Cal HE in the library list The marker will move close to but not precisely on that Move peak in the spectrum based on our current one point calibration Use the X lose Alt F4 f Pea 2 buttons to put the cursor on the peak then click once on the Restore 661 62 keV entry in the library list Note th
187. econds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock 81 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse i e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available 5 2 10 3 InSight Mode The InSight display Fig 87 shows the actual sampled waveform in the digital processing units on a reference graticule The Properties dialog remains active and can be used to change settings while viewing the pulses PESE InSight DSJR s n 241 Calibration source 1714 File Acquire Calculate Services ROI Display zi e z K CK tes A Emo ALSO LH 20s sin 241 Delay Mark Peak ti Trigger LLO Single Reset Delay 79 60 4l Baseline Restorer Auto E8 ws Fat C Slow Np 5 Pole Zero Auo oc Dther Controls S DRTEC 11 00 45 AM BEHNESBB m Marke 500 50 00 v5 2 Cnts Mcb Model No DSJR 002 Fig 87 The InSight Virtual Oscilloscope Mode As none of the traditional analog signals are available in digital MCBs this mode is the only way to display the equivalent amplifier output pulse Note that at the bottom of the window the marker channel is displayed in units of time 82 5 MENU COMMANDS
188. ed background values used to calculate the background SlopeAbove The slope of the background above the peak qfParaBack The parabolic factors for calculating the background If the parabolic background has not been used these are 0 Cubic The cubic background value irpNuclide The pointers to other records in the uFo file as described in File Structure Manual They are only used in debugging To step to the next highest energy peak click on for the next lowest energy peak click on When finished viewing click Cancel or press Esc 5 5 5 Interactive in viewed area This selection starts an interactive analysis session by analyzing the spectrum section shown in the active window note the difference between this command and Entire Spectrum in Memory Section 5 5 2 The working library selected with Library Select File is used The analysis parameters have been set in the Analyze Settings Sample Type dialogs When the analysis is complete the graphical results and peak area table are displayed as illustrated in Fig 147 Figure 148 shows the interactive Analysis Sidebar The buttons move the marker up and down through the results lists library and spectrum simultaneously e The buttons in the Library Peak section pertain to the results from the analysis the other buttons pertain to the spectrum The peak found buttons move to the next higher or lower peak in the analysis results list This includes non ze
189. ed in that direction or that the spectrum is not calibrated In any Ao case if an appropriate peak is available at the location of the marker data on i e the peak activity are displayed on the Marker Information Line at the bottom ait of the screen The ROI and Peak indexing buttons are duplicated by lt Shift gt lt Shift gt gt and lt Ctrl gt lt Ctrl gt gt respectively The Library 4 Lice J buttons are duplicated by lt Alt gt lt Alt gt The Del button function is Del duplicated by the lt Delete gt key and Clear ROI on the menus and Toolbar The Ins button has the same function as the lt Insert gt key and Mark ROI on the menus and Toolbar The Info button duplicates the Calculate Peak Info and the Peak Info command on the right mouse button menu Peak x ve e fh Library Fig 44 Indexing Buttons Detector mode top buffer mode bottom 4 5 Using the File Dialogs ScintiVision provides a consistent user interface for all functions that involve reading files from or writing files to disk The standard file recall save dialog see Fig 45 includes a Look in or Save in box that allows the user to specify the drive and path name a list of files box a File name box a Files of type box and on certain dialogs a Show Description checkbox that allows you to display a sample description if available Any extension or filename can be entered in the File name field If this entry contai
190. ee the discussion in Section 4 1 201 Key lt l gt or lt F5 gt 1 or F6 I T lt gt lt gt or lt F7 gt lt gt or lt F8 gt Ctrl gt gt Ctrl gt Shift gt lt Shift lt gt Alt gt gt Alt lt gt lt PageUp gt lt PageDown gt lt Home gt lt End gt lt Ctrl Fi gt lt F2 gt lt F3 gt Shift F3 gt lt F4 gt or Alt 6 gt F5 or 1 F6 or 1 F7 or lt gt F8 or lt gt lt Alt F7 gt Keypad lt gt Keypad lt gt Keypad lt 5 gt Keypad lt gt Keypad lt gt Insert lt Ins gt Delete lt Del gt Shift t gt Shift 1 Alt 1 gt Alt 2 gt Alt 3 gt Alt 5 Alt 6 gt or F4 Alt gt Shift Alt gt lt Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt lt PrintScreen gt 202 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Table 15 Quick Reference to ScintiVision Keyboard Commands Function Change vertical scale so spectrum peaks are smaller Change vertical scale so spectrum peaks are larger In rubber rectangle mode shift rectangle down toward baseline one pixel In rubber rectangle mode shift rectangle up away from baseline one pixel Move marker to higher channel In rubber rectangle mode shift rectangle right one pixel Move marker to lower channel In rubber rectangle mode shift rubber rectangle left one pixel Narrow the horizontal scale Widen the horizontal scale
191. efault sdf load library c user rbbr82 lib Fig 160 Run or Edit Job File 5 MENU COMMANDS If you try to start another JOB while a JOB is already running the JOB Control 21 x dialog shown in Fig 161 will be displayed showing the name of the current JOB In this case the only options available are to terminate execution of the running JOB click on Terminate Job or allow the JOB to continue click on Close or press lt Esc gt Running Start2 job ij Terminate Job Fig 161 Terminate Job To edit a JOB file from this dialog whether or not Show Contents is activated select a file from the list and click on the Edit File button This will open the Windows Notepad text editor with the JoB file loaded NOTE When editing is complete save the file in Notepad select Save or Save As under Notepad s File menu or any changes made will be lost When Notepad is closed File Exit the newly edited file will be shown in the Show Contents list box If a JOB terminates prematurely because of some error condition a message box briefly explaining the cause of the error will be displayed More details on the error can be found by cross referencing with the error message directory in Appendix C 5 7 2 Sample Description This function opens the dialog shown in Fig 162 for examining editing or entering the Sample Description of the displayed spectrum This description can be up to 128 characters in length
192. either the Energy channel or FWHM Energy table and graph Select FWHM Fit now and the table will show the one value entered while the graph shows a horizontal line For a single point the FWHM is assumed to be a constant NOTE Itis very important in the analysis of these spectra that the FWHM be correct In the spectrum window or the library select a peak in the low energy part of the spectrum or collect another spectrum of a different source and move the marker to the centroid of the peak Again mark the peak as an ROI and position the marker at the center of the peak Click on the E field and enter the energy of this peak Both the energy function and FWHM function will be updated with the new entry The graphs and tables are displayed so that progress can be monitored 96 5 MENU COMMANDS At this time the marker can be positioned using the calibration graphs calibration table or the spectrum window The marker will show the energy based on the calibration up to this point Note that until more than 3 points are included in the calibration the sidebar s Linear FWHM checkbox is marked and gray and ScintiVision automatically performs a linear fit You can refine the calibration by adding as many points as desired Any point can be deleted by selecting that point in the table of values Energy or FWHM and clicking on the Delete Energy button The fit updates when a point is removed If the quadratic fit to the FWHM does not pro
193. elections will be saved to disk and used by ScintiVision until changed on this screen or until the entire network is reconfigured 5 8 ROI An ROI region of interest is a way to denote channels or ROL groups of channels in the spectrum as having special meaning An e Off F2 or Alt 0 Mark F2 or Alt M ROI can be used to mark peak areas for the printout or to mark a peak to stop acquisition when that peak reaches a preset value Channels marked as ROI channels are displayed in a different color than the unmarked channels UnMark F2 or Alt U Mark Peak Insert Clear Delete Clear All Save File The ROI menu is shown in Fig 172 Its functions are available for Recall File both the buffer and Detector s See Section 4 3 3 for ROI operations performed with the mouse Fig 172 ROI Menu 5 8 1 Off This sets the ROI status to Off In this state the ROI bit for the channels will not change as the cursor moves This function is duplicated by lt Alt O gt and by lt F2 gt which toggles between Off Mark and UnMark The usual ROI status is Off so the marker can be moved on the display without changing any of the ROI bits 5 8 2 Mark This sets the ROI status to the Mark or set condition In this state the cursor channels are marked with the ROI bit as the cursor is moved with or lt gt into the channel Moving the marker with the mouse does not change the ROI in this mode This function is
194. ent as the short lifetime isotope decays rapidly This high dead time will cause the counting time to be extended after the short lived isotope has decayed to zero activity and the system will count the low activity isotope for the extra time Consequently the average activity of the short lived isotope will be underestimated If you anticipate significantly varying counting rates during the time taken to acquire the spectrum the CORR_ERR ZDT mode should be used The CORR_ERR mode corrects for dead time losses over minuscule time intervals by adding counts to the ZDT spectrum in proportion to the instantaneous ratio of real time to live time Thus the dead time correction can correctly track rapidly changing counting rates The CORR_ERR mode should be used whenever the counting rate may change significantly during the measurement time In addition to the rapidly decaying isotope example above the CORR_ERR mode should be used when monitoring cooling water flow from a nuclear reactor The CORR_ERR mode accommodates brief bursts of high activity in the water flowing past the gamma ray detector Both the corrected and error spectra are stored in the resulting spectrum file Note that the counts in the ZDT spectrum must be divided by the elapsed REAL time to compute the dead time corrected counting rate It is important to note that the standard deviation in the N py counts in a gamma ray peak in the ZDT spectrum is not N Instead the standard
195. er stayed within the set limits during the spectrum acquisition If the parameter varied from the nominal value by more than the allowed limit the ERR is set until cleared by the program The numeric values are displayed in the units reported by the DSPEC jr 2 0 Security Detector temperature and Live detector temperature are available only for SMART 1 detectors For non SMART 1 detectors they show N A Fig 76 DSPEC jr 2 0 Status Tab The parameters displayed are Detector State of Health This is OK if all the SOH are OK and ERR if any one is ERR DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared T2 5 MENU COMMANDS Temperature State of Health This is OK if the detector temperature has stayed below the high temperature limit set in the detector since the last time the SOH was cleared This is available only for SMART 1 detectors High Voltage State of Health This i
196. ervention e Defining initial conditions at startup useful in preloading presets after a power loss for the 916 916A 917 918 918A each time ScintiVision is run JOB files written for previous versions of ScintiVision or MAESTRO can be used The text versions of these files will work on new Detectors as well as older models with the exception of new commands and deleted commands ScintiVision can run repetitive loops Furthermore the current loop count can be included as a variable in any string including filenames program parameters and text Data can thus be stored with unique filenames and labeled with unique descriptions If an error is encountered in running a JOB file the execution of the file stops and control returns to ScintiVision An error code appears in the JOB Control dialog box these are described in Appendix C In addition if the appropriate Ask on Start or Ask on Save fields are checked in the Acquire or File settings dialog boxes these questions will be asked when START or SAVE commands are executed in the gos file This means that execution of the JoB file will stop until the entry is made The ASK commands will also stop the JoB file and prompt you to enter the requested information The Jos file will continue when you click on OK or press Enter on the dialog The input is used or stored immediately before the next JOB instruction except for the ASK SPECTRUM command When JOB files are used
197. es access to the spectrum file save recall printing File and compare functions and is shown in Fig 50 Settings Recall 5 1 1 Settings Save Save As The File Settings dialog see Fig 51 allows you to specify how the Esport spectrum data are saved exported imported and to set the directories Import for all the major file types used by ScintiVision Print Compare 5 1 1 1 General Exit About ScintiVision The entries on this tab control the file type and which questions are automatically asked or the defaults for these questions Fig 50 File Menu The file types are integer CHN integer sPC floating point sPC and ASCII sPE The CHN file format is the format used by all versions of MAESTRO It is the simplest format and therefore the easiest to read with other programs It does not contain the analysis parameter data the complete calibration or other data needed for the nuclide analysis The format is described in the ORTEC Software File Structure Manual for DOS and Windows Systems P N 753800 hereinafter referred to as the File Structure Manual The two spc formats integer and floating point are identical except for the format of the spectrum data The integer spc format should be used unless the files are to be used by earlier versions of ORTEC programs Both contain all of the analysis parameters from analysis settings and the complete calibration data They are suitable for archiving
198. es superimposed on the spectrum or can be filled to background height with a contrasting color Choose whether to fill singlets multiplets and or multiplet composites by clicking on the menu item s to mark them with 5 MENU COMMANDS ae Mnr Toa ast r ps ta zt b a won Fig 181 Comparison of the Points Fill ROI and Fill All Display Modes a checkmark Click again to remove a checkmark The fill color for these peaks can be selected on the Spectrum Colors dialog discussed in the next section 5 9 10 3 Spectrum Colors Use this dialog see Fig 182 to select colors for various features in the two spectrum windows Each scroll bar controls the color of a different feature The vertical colored stripes behind the scroll bars show the available colors The Background scroll bar controls the background color of the spectrum window Foreground determines the color of the spectrum points or fill ROI governs the color Backaround Foreground Compare Composite Mult Peaks Special full full ROI full 4 of the ROI points or fill EN ox Default Cancel The points fill of a compared spectrum File Compare Fig 182 Display Color Selections use the Compare color unless they overlap with the original spectrum in which case the Composite color is used 161 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 To change a color click and hold the left mouse button
199. es to the true zero between incoming pulses This improves the resolution by removing low frequency noise from dc shifts or mains power ac pickup The baseline settings control the time constant of the circuit that returns the baseline to zero There are three fixed choices Auto Fast and Slow The fast setting is used for high count rates the slow for low count rates Auto adjusts the time constant as appropriate for the input count rate The setting is saved in the DSPEC jr 2 0 even when the power is off The time constant can be manually set on the InSight display see Section 5 2 10 3 You can view the time when the baseline restorer is active on the InSight display as a Mark region see the discussion on Marks p 83 In the automatic mode the current value is shown on the InSight sidebar Fig 87 For a low count rate system the value will remain at about 90 Preamplifier Type Use the Preamplifier Type section to choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation Your choice will depend on the preamplifier supplied with the germanium detector being used Optimize The DSPEC jr 2 0 is equipped with both automatic pole zero logic and automatic flattop logic The Start Auto optimize button uses these features to automatically choose the best pole zero and flattop tilt settings Note that if you selected Transistor Reset as the Preamplifier Type for this DSPEC jr 2 0 the optimize button does not perform the
200. et Peaks Fill Multiplet Composites 161 2 9 10 5 Spectrum Color o tpe ne dhe ey REDE ida 161 5 9 10 4 Peak Info Font Color ee RR 162 5 10 Right Mouse Button Menu seseeeeeeeee eee e tenes 163 24 10 b SCIES en traten de deos qu da tane tes eut ee den pde Bde 163 22102 MOP els ween Que codes virt bed ine ga end vi tes do der guns 163 SEU 3s TIGE Sect UA dr prr SAU n rr AU E dst 163 SAO d ar o dias orsa PED SERERE S OR PCR Ora darts 163 5 10 5 ZOOMIN ces sont eee otl o UR ET ECRIRE E RAN AEE EER ORA UU Ed 163 SAL LODO od A e oar NO Gee S Pacte ora MEN tubis nasum pdt ertt 164 O0 7 DIO ZOOM elatione px i RE PY Rei Os wang PE ese eke EN 164 5 108 Mak ROM qt sx de EUR Edo stem MC E ae t 164 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Su09 Clear ROL sos oues ees ere bx nme Sasa wae 164 3 10 10 Peak IDEO 2 La eee dete Ele op Ob b Nae De ie x E a ules mbes 164 3 50 TIS Input Count Rate cle dus euet WERE RE ERU te rete ur Ee 165 2 10 12 SU arches Detector P ERU te PV etat ed dels waa odas ER 165 5 1013 MGB Properties d piri iet pr eto TRU io Seeman 165 6 ANALY SIS METHODS escapar rap penca YER E EA RS 167 Ob Peak Search aces da Nc ect xao tee de ue qase sie tee Cee put xpi ate vigeat 167 o LT Peak Scarch AlrorthmM ys ack cache rk e X RAE ras RE LES 168 6 1 2 Background Method and Initial Peak Estimates lees 168 61 3 Peak Statistics AS A AE bb hee uoo dex I EUR Re RR es 169 6 1 4 Criti
201. et eR ede eh Se 104 256 acquisition presets cssc tre ai 61 EN stet drew a S ESTEE RA 20 97 256 collection date and time 61 JOB 256 sample description oo oooooo o 61 Llistar 142 255 sample quantity tai ers 61 Pl siria 129 sample type defaults 61 A ry rine yh a Bese e ESTEE An 253 VAsSOCIated TES sace CLE Pr rds wees 43 APT dk ace ate Rb aoe treat wh ened de 256 Auto mode in InSight mode 83 SEQ 93 110 Automatic vertical scale 35 159 SPG tp 111 255 B30WINUNLE s pe ARE tte ax 250 Toatingspolnt oet tos 48 Background curiosas 167 168 LIME QED E E E E EE 48 Background Fit scada thee Rex 170 A areata S ETC aR En 255 Baseline Restorer nasa DELE ER 84 SV Derio 255 Branching ratio yield 176 A wpequa stre wb een 250 Meson eRe 3 62 163 UFO erren tho mac S ETC E EN 256 Detector Butler u so sense pr ERR 159 Job loop counter set en 227 Calculate menu ius tT ek waved ae ks 112 Accelerator keys s oneview erede eh weeded 201 Calibrations cen 93 97 98 101 104 keyboard map AAA et wees 203 PUROMBUC tias Bree hte eee dees 105 quick reference table 202 COMICAL S e erae ete Lm eoa 22 acceptance thresholds 192 efficiency 21 99 102 105 178 225 230 Acquire MENU osa See tree ee neat 59 energy gry ities nias 18 94 95 97 142 230 Acquisition pres
202. etector and QA source dependent A QA library containing only the nuclides in the QA source must be created using the nuclide library editor see Section 5 6 A sample type settings file svD must be created which contains the defaults for the QA acquisition and analysis see Section 5 5 1 1 A database to contain the QA results must be created see Section 8 1 All the information gathered in preliminary Steps 1 4 can be entered in the Quality Assurance Settings dialog 191 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 The BACKGROUND Acquisition time and Count Rate Limits are entered using the information gathered in Step 1 above Enter the Real time or Live time in seconds for background spectra the dead time is near zero so these are usually equal The Minimum and Maximum count rate limits are the acceptance thresholds for the alarm limit Acceptance thresholds are used to indicate that the system is operating far from the expected conditions and can be used to prevent data acquisition from being performed at all until the condition is corrected If the Lock Acquire on Violation s box is checked and an acceptance threshold is exceeded the Detector is automatically locked out from use until the problem is corrected and QA is rerun The Low and High count rate limits are the warning limits and exceeding them will cause warning messages to be displayed The SAMPLE Type Analysis Settings File is the svp file created for QA in Step 4 usin
203. ets MMC essa ey ek een thea Ss 119 ask ON Stalls 6s see ERES Po Ete 61 sequenes d i M erie drew re uides 110 Veste o ees one TOC b Rd 75 WOIKING Strada ibid 111 119 MDA Ss TCR Pied 10 GOB G errada ena Dto 36 160 Ieal tif e 4 deco b exem ET hio pud 75 Changing VE peta cece ater eae PERS 41 ROLimisstil 2 teta ds 795 Clew ROL 230 islas 164 ROI peak count adas ds J5 Clear spect M ss seb TR Es 62 226 A Retreat wanes J5 Coin idence eras 69 84 Acquisition settings o oooooo o 60 Collection date and time 49 ACHIV foc eb Shades wee tree RP s 176 GSK OM start ieden SERT I welch e ey 61 ADG uer res CERE E iS Ge ape tee ed eked 2 COMBINE usais ds 161 ADE setuj errada lt 69 command line micas id 249 Always on TOp rra ban 250 Compare spectra 57 161 202 Amplifier gain Copy tO DUITEE o sae tiep RE RUE ees 62 Ie s pesi Anc EELAIERP ims 206 COMECHONM uot ret eR ante nup RES 124 Analog to Digital Converter ADC 2 PBG 44 fee etek E PRETI Tk beg etd 124 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Count rates cas aee men oie sted gy aos 66 67 Critical evel ex shoe ace outset ou a Blacks 169 Cross Correlation ces shee ace ostrea he x ts 168 CUBIC fit tias petat woe apace bea eth 103 Dead time i sedie y Shot ace wha PEE 27 66 75 84 Decay correction 49 100 118 176 Decay Limit Test s sora ote hin cae Mach 176 Deconvolution be ihr oett paw he th 184 Delay sad itt Modem
204. explanatory phrase is given Library requires separate data segments for each task WinExec error 6 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Library too large to load Library files larger than 65 000 bytes are not admissible as internally resident libraries However any size library can be used for Master Library Must have a value greater than zero Certain analysis or library table entries require values greater than 0 0 Must have valid calibration Certain analysis functions cannot be performed if the calibration is invalid Need an ROI at the desired peak location The Stabilizer function requires a valid ROI at the desired peak No Buffer to RESTORE from The RESTORE function requires a valid spectrum in buffer No close library match The REPORT function could not obtain a library entry close enough to the located peak No File Name A file function was requested without specifying the filename adequately No more library peak energies A peak search was attempted in a direction where no more can be found No more multiplets The multiplet finding sidebar function in Analysis Results display mode cannot find any more multiplets in the direction indicated No more peaks for this nuclide The peaks within nuclide sidebar function in Analysis Results mode cannot find any more peaks within the selected nuclide 270 APPENDIX C JOB FILE ERROR MESSAGES No more unknown
205. eye quee CAR 251 202 2 GO WINDS INE a a eU DESDE tS be E 251 APPENDIX B EBGSEJEORNVDACIS 2 00 cn vee chet eiie ep x ec AS ES REEL 255 B 1 ScintiVision Bile Types seus ke he PIER USE RU IE sea Ge ead ERU RS 255 BAL D tectorPA TELEIHS des aT 255 BI Spectron Files iu We a ve Ae bid S Ea beu eb A ane ee is 255 B 1 3 Miscellaneous Analysis Calibration Library and Text Files 255 BI OA Database tiles arods ccor er A on E eee D ere oe 256 B 2 Database Tables for ScintiVision QA lllleeeeeeee ee 256 B22 QA Detectors Detector Table sustos aes Seas Rn Dx 256 B 2 2 Application Information Table 20 0 0c eee eee 257 B 2 3 M d Measurements l able S z aa tX cco ctae ieee ere vs ea Rd 257 B 2E P dmmmm Peaks Lables 25 36 ee ach a 258 B 3 POO bam x anes A Gt a pede M ri RE LE 258 TABLE OF CONTENTS IB o ls POR TRAN Lanewdge ais ont oe Oh US eed Ree ee eee 258 INE CHN Filesi tn IA 259 Bi3o2 ROLES A E POP que VPE SEE EHE PU qM 260 B3 C LaHPUAPE a E a one td des 261 APPENDIX C JOB FILE ERROR MESSAGES seeeeeeee nee 263 INDEX er 277 xi xil NOTE We assume that you are thoroughly familiar with 32 bit Microsoft Windows usage and terminology If you are not fully acquainted with the Windows environment including the use of the mouse we strongly urge you to read the Microsoft documentation supplied with your Windows software and familiarize yourself with a few sim
206. f each peak in a multiplet The Analyze Settings Sample Type dialogs let you choose an automatic determination of the best type of background fit or to set the energy at which the background switches from polynomial to linear In most cases the automatic setting will give a better result At this time the peak centroid height starting point and ending point are the values from the peak fitting routine 6 2 1 1 Linear Backgrounds Singlets Singlets are fitted with a linear background using the spectrum values at the end points of the peak The number of values used in the average is set by you in the Analyze Settings Sample Type dialog to 1 3 or 5 To calculate the background on the low energy side of the peak with 5 points the 5 point average of the channel contents is calculated for the region below the start of the peak This is the same as smoothing the data with a smoothing width of 5 and coefficients 170 6 ANALYSIS METHODS of 0 2 for all points The calculation is repeated in the region above the end of the peak and the background is B B x C C Background B Brent C C 17 where B low background By high background C high channel C low channel Multiplets In high energy regions the background is roughly linear and the background for peak multiplets is calculated in an analogous manner to singlets If the slope above the peak region is less than the slope below the region that is if
207. f the peaks just delete it by clicking on the Delete Energy button on the Calibration Sidebar Co 1332 51 uio d 898 02 Now bring the Energy Table window to the front and note that the PCs 661 66 Deltas the differences between data points and the fit to the data 13Sn 391 69 points are small Next bring the Energy plot window to the front X3 279 17 and examine the calibration curve visually You can of course 109Cq 88 03 increase the size of these windows to allow a closer examination of Am 59 54 the graphical fit Click on the FWHM full width at half maximum radio MTI button on the lower section of the Calibration Sidebar This will change the table and calibration windows so they now display the table of FWHM results and the FWHM graph as in Fig 20 The FWHM fit uses the peaks specified in the energy fit If FWHM of any peak has a deviation of more than 25 between the actual and fitted values a warning message is displayed Channel 2650 Fig 20 FWHM Fit Selection Save the energy table for later use click on the Calibration Sidebar s Save button enter a name such as SVDEMO for the table filename and click on Save ScintiVision will append the correct extension ENT to the filename To examine the Energy Table open the Calibration Sidebar s control menu and select Edit File This table is simply a list of the energies of the peaks used for the calibration The energy calibration is complete we s
208. fficiency will be calculated and displayed in the field at the top of the worksheet dialog Click on OK to close the worksheet If this value is acceptable click on the Enter button in the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar to save the input and efficiency values Fig 99 Efficiency Calibration Worksheet Select the next peak and repeat the process The date and time will default to the previously entered values but the half life and gammas second must be entered for each energy unless the Library and Activity features are used As each peak is entered the table and graph will update and new fits will be made NOTE A linear fit is made for one or two points a quadratic fit is made for three points and a cubic fit is made if four or more points are entered Any point can be deleted by selecting the value in the Efficiency Table window and clicking on the Delete Entry button in the efficiency calibration sidebar Delete Entry is normally grayed but becomes active when a value is selected from the table Any point can be modified by selecting the value in the table dialog and clicking on Calc When the worksheet opens the previously entered values will be shown 103 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Saving the Efficiency Calibration Table The table of entries including the gammas second half life and certification sen cue seme date 1 e all the information needed to do the calibration can be saved by clicking
209. formation Line are continuously updated as the marker jumps so when the jump is complete the marker information is up to date for the current channel 9 2 7 Insert ROI Insert or Keypad lt Ins gt These keys mark an ROI in the spectrum at the marker position in one of two ways 6 Ifthe spectrum is calibrated the region is centered on the marker with a width of three times the calibrated FWHM There does not need to be a peak at the marker position 7 Ifthe spectrum is not calibrated the region is centered on the peak if any located within two channels of the marker and is as wide as the peak If the peak search fails or if the peak is not well formed no ROI is marked There is no limit on the size of a peak or ROI therefore in some uncalibrated spectra large ROIs could be marked These accelerators duplicate the function of the Mark ROI Toolbar button and the ROI Mark Peak menu selection see Section 5 8 NOTE Insert and Keypad lt Ins gt work conveniently in combination with Ctrl gt and Ctrl 4 to rapidly set peak ROIs 9 2 8 Clear ROI Delete or Keypad lt Del gt Delete and Keypad lt Del gt clear the ROI bits of all ROI channels contiguous to the channel containing the marker These accelerators duplicate the function of the Clear ROI button on the Toolbar and the ROI Clear menu selection see Section 5 8 9 2 9 Taller Shorter lt t gt lt l gt When not in rubber rectangle mode the 1
210. from the list then pasted back into the list into a different order Cut peaks remain queued up for pasting last one first Each relocated peak will be assigned a Rank number according to its new position Click on the peak just below the desired insertion point in the peak list then click on Paste Saving or Canceling Changes and Closing the Edit Session To save this modified PBC file and use it as the working file click on the control menu then Save PBC Table As Either use the current filename which will overwrite the previous values or assign a new filename then click on Save Scinti Vision will assign the default PBC extension To exit the edit session click on the control menu then Close To abandon any changes and restore the PBc file to its condition before editing click on the control menu then Close A dialog will open asking if you want to save the changes select No 5 5 2 Entire Spectrum in Memory This selection initiates an analysis of the entire spectrum generating RPT UFO and AN1 files When the analysis completes the report is generated The drive path and uFo filename are displayed at the bottom of the screen The am1 file contains the spectrum acquisition information and current calibration and analysis parameters If the Program radio button on the Report tab of Analyze Settings Sample Type has been selected with Notepad exe designated as the output program ScintiVision will open Wind
211. g 63 In this illustra 2 tion the starting spectrum is displayed in color 1 the Compare 1 spectrum is shown in color 2 the portion of the starting spectrum 4 that exceeds the Compare spectrum is indicated by color 3 and the starting spectrum s ROIs are marked in color 4 These colors called Foreground Compare Composite and ROI respectively are Fig 64 Spectrum chosen on the Color Preferences dialog discussed in Section 5 9 10 3 Colors in Compare Mode Press Esc to leave Compare mode 58 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 1 8 Exit This exits ScintiVision and returns to Windows If the buffer contains a spectrum that has not been saved a warning message is displayed Any JOBs are terminated All MCBs continue to acquire data until the presets are met 5 1 9 About ScintiVision Figure 65 shows the About box for ScintiVision It provides software version information that will be useful should you need customer support Scinti ision Nal Analysis for Windows ScintiVision for Windows Model amp 35 B32 Version 2 02 UMCBI Kernel Version 1 00 Connections 32 Version 6 03 ScintiVision provides advanced Multi Channel Analyzer capabilities and supports DSPEC ADCAM series and SPECTRUM i MASTER hardware DSPEC amp DCAM and SPECTRUM MASTER are trademarks of Advanced Measurement Technology Inc ATES This product is licensed to C Kitts ORTEC Copyright 2003 Advanced Measurement Technology In
212. g Analyze Settings Sample Type Click on Browse to select the svp file To edit the Svp file click on Edit This will open the dialog for Analyze Settings Sample Type Section 5 5 1 1 Especially relevant sample type settings include e Sample type description e Acquisition presets e QA nuclide library file the one created in Step 3 On the left of the SAMPLE Analysis Parameter Limits section are check boxes for marking the limits to be tracked Total Activity Bq Average Peak Shift keV and Average FWHM Ratios are the choices Click on the ones to be tracked The first time ScintiVision QA is set up click on the Suggest button on the right to enter factory set limits After this use the Suggest button with caution because clicking on it again will reset all the limits to the factory settings The actual limits can be determined from the samples counted in Step 2 above To write the QA analysis results to disk mark the Create Background Report checkbox This activates the Print on Completion checkbox mark it to simultaneously print a report hardcopy QA background reports are assigned names according to this format QAB Detector name 99999 rpt where Qas indicates a background report Detector name is the Detector name assigned in the MCB Configuration program and 99999 indicates a five digit number QA sample reports have a similar name format except that they begin with Qas instead of gas These report names
213. gesPC O Cancel dialog shown in Fig 61 is displayed 4 Show Description Integer Data Format 2048 Channels Choose the filename of the spectrum to Cs 137 20 ml bottle on endcap S N 1733 be exported The currently displayed spectrum must be Fig 61 The Export Spectrum File Dialog saved to disk before it can be exported If the currently displayed spectrum has already been stored to disk that filename is the default Any file can be selected The file is then read and the output file is written by the program The Export function is not available for a second file until the first file has been exported and the export program has stopped execution Export can also be used to generate hardcopy plots To do this select the WINPLOTS program supplied with ScintiVision as the export program When Export has been selected the WINPLOTS program will be executed If the P switch is specified on the command line see Sections 5 1 1 2 and 11 1 3 the program will plot the spectrum and exit automatically 56 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 1 5 Import The Import function is used to read Import File spectrum files that are not in one of the Lookin aten C fe usual formats 1 e CHN or SPC The C 5 Nples14 txt a Pges txt A ioe Fem3 txt 8 Nplss1a txt E Pgespel tet import program 1S specified on the Import Fem4 t t E Nplss1 ad txt E Pgespc2 txt tab under File Settings as dis
214. gram Can t Run Second Instance of this EXE multiple writeable data segments WinExec error 16 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Can t Run Second Instance of this EXE Non shareable DLL in use WinExec error 17 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Cannot get valid Spectral Data The File Save function was not presented with valid spectral data usually the result of problems obtaining data from a Detector 265 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Comm Failure Detector communication failure most likely resulting from a timeout the Detector failed to respond within a reasonable period of time Configuration failed Attempted reconfiguration failed most likely because of some conflict with Detectors physically installed Could not properly fit the peak Function requiring a fitted peak could not obtain an acceptable peak probably because of too few counts too narrow or non Gaussian peak shape or bad statistics such as calculated sigma squared less than zero Couldn t get background subtracted ROI A function requiring a background subtracted ROI couldn t obtain such probably because there was no ROI at the point specified or maybe because there weren t statistically significant counts above background Default Printer Failed Undefined at Control Panel The REPORT or PRINT function was aborted because the default system printer
215. gy at which the background flattens out Above this energy the background of a multiplet is fit as a straight line with a step added under each peak Below the background of both singlets and multiplets is fitted as a polynomial 123 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Error Limits In ScintiVision if a peak fails a statistical test the peak is identified labeled in the report but its value is not used in determining the amount of that nuclide present You can select either the Critical Level or enter a Cutoff For the Critical Level the cutoff value is software calculated at 2 33 x y Background Variance and the peak area must be greater than this value in order to be included If using Cutoff 46 enter the percent uncertainty for the cutoff A peak with counting uncertainty greater than the cutoff will be rejected Corrections Tab The Corrections tab is shown in Fig 126 Analysis Options i21 x Sample System Report Analysis Corrections Peaked Background Correction p On jv lateral File Browse Attenuation On Material 4 Length 1 00000 Configuration Linear nena ts T4 Cancel Help Fig 126 The Corrections Tab The Peaked Background Correction can be turned On or off and the correction file can be specified The filename of the PBC file to be used for the correction in the spectrum analysis can 124 5 MENU COMMANDS
216. h allows you to turn the high voltage on or off and set and monitor the voltage Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage About This tab Fig 84 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected DSPEC Plus as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the Detector is currently locked with a password see Section 5 7 3 Read Write indicates that the Detector is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 80 Properties Ed About Status Presets Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage E Target 0 Volts Off Actual QO Volts or Fig 83 digiBASE High Voltage Tab Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage About Status Presets MAIN LAB MCB 130 Sample Acquisition Start Time Access 10 53 35 Friday December 06 2002 Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode DBAS 001 8 PHA Fig 84 digiBASE About Tab Status Figure 85 shows the Status tab The Aux0 and Aux counters are reserved for future use The Enable Counter functions when the Gate function on the ADC tab is set to Event and the digiBASE is actively acquiring data in a spectrum Under these conditions the Enable Counter accrues the number of events at the ENABLE INPUT since the Start
217. hall consider this to be a good energy calibration for the purposes of this demonstration Close the calibration session by opening the control menu in the calibration window and selecting Close This new energy calibration is now held in memory but is not yet stored on disk 20 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL 3 2 6 Efficiency Calibration Select Calibrate from the Menu Bar then Efficiency This opens the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar shown in Fig 21 note its similarity to the Energy Calibration Sidebar We want to start from the beginning of the process so open the sidebar s control menu and click on Destroy The Library List window should be visible but if not click on Library Select Peak to reopen it From the library double click on the 1332 5 keV peak of Co When you double click the marker will move to the corresponding peak and ScintiVision will enter the energy in the top section of the Calibration Sidebar In the upper section of the sidebar click on the Calc button to open the Efficiency Calculation Worksheet Fig 22 Efficiency Calculation Worksheet zix gH ralculate Efficiency C i ance Assay from Certificate Peak Measured from Spectrum Date j Date 6 7 91 9 37 33 4M M d py h mm ss tt CPS 127 63 Nuclide Activity GPs Half Life E 325 1801 Days Uncertainty 5 0000 Z Gammas 100d 9 9982E 0 From Library Co 50
218. he instructions in the amplifier manual Most commonly a range of 0 3 MeV is used If you have a Co source the 1332 keV peak should be set at approximately channel 1816 for conversion gain of 4096 and channel 3632 for 8192 A source with only one or two lines e g Cs or Co should be used for the initial test spectrum so you ll be able to easily see the correct pattern of the peaks 3 2 8 3 Computer Controlled Hardware Setup In this section we will use ScintiVision to enable the 92X II s high voltage and adjust the spectroscopy amplifier gain shaping time and pole zero Select Acquire MCB Properties to open the Properties dialog for this MCB and click on the High Voltage tab see Fig 29 Adjust the bias setting to the correct voltage on the rear panel of the 92X II Notice as you adjust the voltage that 26 Properties x Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Preset Target 2800 Volts Close Fig 29 Monitoring the 92X II Bias Setting on the High Voltage Tab 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL the value showing in the Target field on the High Voltage tab changes The display setting is accurate to 100 V When the value of the detector bias matches that shown on the detector s Quality Assurance data sheet also given on the endcap label click the On button to enable the bias The HV On light on the 92X II will illuminate If it does not either the HV shutdown is
219. he analysis options The sv p file is created in the Analyze Settings Sample Type dialog It is the same as the sample type entry in the Acquire Acquisition Settings dialog If Ask on Start is checked the START command in the JoB file will also open this dialog ASK PASSWORD This is used to define the password to be used in the JoB file This command can be to lock an unlocked detector unlock and use one that 1s locked or lock one for the duration of the job and then unlock it The actual lock unlock is done with LOCK and UNLOCK respectively This command is to set the internal password variable PASSWORD to the user input so the password will be available for use in the JOB The OWNER variable is only used when locking detectors Following is an example ASK PASSWORD LOCK Pwd Name ASK PBC This asks for the name of the peak background correction to be used After entering the filename the Peak Background Correction file is loaded ASK PRESET This asks for the presets to be set in the Detector It is the same as the preset entry in the Acquire Acquisition Settings dialog If Ask on Start is checked the START command in the JOB file will also open this dialog 224 10 JOB FILES ASK SPECTRUM This asks for the spectrum filename to be used in the next and subsequent SAVE commands See SAVE command below This is stored in the variables FullPath FullBase FileExt and FileDir ASK_WEIGHT
220. he calibration certificate can be stored in an efficiency calibration EFT file see Editing the Efficiency Calibration Table on page 104 for instructions on creating and editing this file Using this file to direct the calibration is easy On the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar just click on the Recall button then select the file SVDEMO EFT ScintiVision will use the data in the table to calculate the efficiency at each energy from the spectrum and fill in the efficiency table You can see the marker jump from peak to peak in the spectrum as the peak areas are calculated When the data points are all calculated the fit Mode stored in the file is used to make the fit You can select another fit Mode from the Calibration Sidebar In the list choose the Polynomial option This will automatically produce a quadratic fit of the entire energy range as shown in Fig 23 The fit will take place automatically You can then view it by bringing the Efficiency calibration fit window forward Click on the window s control menu to choose scaling and grid display options see Fig 24 The marker line in the efficiency graph window will be at the energy of the peak selected in the Library List or the Efficiency Table window 22 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL ScintiVision File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window cg ec x tos A fee 20sre ere y Efficiency Table E M cud 26 xi 3 Efficiency 2 182
221. hown in the dialog according to the format chosen If that file Save as type Integer SPC y Cancel Fig 60 Save As 55 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 already exists a message box opens asking you to verify the entry or cancel the operation Clicking on OK will completely overwrite the existing file After the disk file has been saved its filename is displayed on the Title Bar The format selected is used rather than the type specified on the General tab under File Settings Section 4 1 1 1 which is the default here The file extension should be left at the default setting to avoid confusion This is especially true if the spectra are to be used in non ORTEC programs For hardware with multiple spectra such as ZDT mode in the DSPEC Plus both spectra are automatically saved in the file 5 1 4 Export The Export function is used to write spectra in formats other than the usual Look in y User gt El Al ce formats or to perform other functions SVDemo2b spc 1 infi Wesvoemo1 c spc such as plotting or printing the spectrum Boss BN directly The export program is specified Vix SvDemo2 Ani on the Export tab under File Settings B svDemo2 Spc S Demola spe i SVDemo2a spc as discussed in Section 5 1 1 2 The program can be one of the programs supplied or can be user supplied When Filename SVDemo2cspo selected the Export Spectrum File Files oftype me
222. iVision 32 v2 A35 B32 If the horizontal scale is expanded when the marker reaches the edge of the spectrum window the next key press past the edge shifts the window to the next block of channels in that direction such that the marker is now in the center of the display When the ROI mode is set to Mark the lt gt gt lt gt keys cause the channels to be marked as the marker moves Similarly they clear the ROI bits while the ROI mode is UnMark See Section 5 8 9 2 2 Next ROI Shift gt gt lt Shift gt The Shift gt gt or Shift gt move the marker to the beginning of the next higher channel ROI or the end of the preceding ROI respectively of the displayed spectrum These functions are duplicated by the ROI indexing buttons on the Status Sidebar 9 2 3 Next Peak Ctrl gt gt lt Ctrl gt The lt Ctrl and lt Ctrl gt keys perform a peak search on the spectrum in the higher or lower channel direction respectively and move the marker to the first peak found If no peak is found the program displays the No More Peaks message and the marker does not move If the spectrum is energy calibrated and the library loaded the system displays the best match from the library within two FWHMs of the peak centroid If there is no match within this range the No Close Library Match message is displayed These functions are duplicated by the Peak indexing buttons on the Status Sidebar 9 2 4 Next
223. ibrate and analyze your own sample data 29 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 30 4 DISPLAY FEATURES This chapter addresses ScintiVision s display features discusses the role of the mouse and keyboard covers the use of the Toolbar and sidebars and shows how to change to different disk drives and folders Figure 33 shows ScintiVision s principal screen features ORTEC 4 52 14 PM Tue 4 30 02 Fig 33 Main ScintiVision Screen Features 1 Title bar showing the source of the currently displayed spectrum This is either the Detector description the word Buffer if the buffer is selected or a file name if a file has been saved or recalled and not yet modified if a sample description has been entered for the file it will accompany the file name On the far right are the Minimize Maximize and Close buttons 2 Menu Bar showing the available menu commands which can be selected with either the mouse or keyboard these functions are discussed in detail in Chapter 5 31 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 32 Toolbar beneath the Menu Bar contains icons for recalling spectra saving them to disk starting and stopping data acquisition changing the point fill characteristics of a spectrum and adjusting the spectrum s vertical and horizontal scale The name of the last Detector selected is shown Drop down Detector List on the Toolbar displaying the currently selected Detector or the buffer Clicking o
224. icating the scale on the axes can be included Including them makes the plot more readable Grid Lines can also be included The grid lines are lines across the complete height of the plot at the major tic marks When Auto Scale is selected the plot vertical axis is adjusted so that the largest count in the spectrum is near the top of the plot region When Auto Scale is clicked off the Range button is enabled Clicking on Range will display the dialog Enter the Maximum Value for the Vertical Axis shown in Fig 225 The value entered will be the value for the top of the Cx c plotted region Any counts above this value will be plotted at this value Fig 225 Vertical Range Options Dialog 11 1 3 Command Line Interface The WINPLOTS Command Line Interface will support options available in the interactive mode as shown below WINPLT32 lt spectrum gt R roi file S set file P here e e Specifies the spectral data file SPC An1 or CHN The extension must be included R roi file Specifies the noz file The extension must be included S set file Specifies the settings file The extension must be included P Causes the program to print the plot and exit automatically Used mainly in JOB files or the Export function 246 11 UTILITIES 11 2 TRANSLT The TRANSLT program TRANSLT EXE located in c Program Files ScintiVision translates several different text files to and from spPc
225. ice the FWHM of the peak If the region is too large counts not in the peak will have an effect on the stabilization The ROI can be cleared after the PEAK command so that peak count preset can be used on another peak The zero stabilization dialog Initialize button sets the zero offset to its midpoint that is halfway between minimum offset and maximum offset This should be done before selecting the ROI for the peak because the initialization might move the peak in the spectrum and because it ensures that the maximum range is available for the stabilization process The Suggest button is used to set the peak center and peak width of the peak area used by the stabilizer Before selecting this command the ROI must be marked and the marker put in the region to be used When operating the peak will be centered in the ROI After the region has been recorded the stabilization is turned on If the stabilization is turned on when this command is executed the old stabilization region is replaced by the new peak defined by the marker and stabilization continues using the new peak The Zero Stabilizer Enabled checkbox enables or disables the zero stabilization It can only be turned on after the Suggest button has been used to select a working peak 5 2 10 6 ZDT Zero Dead Time Mode An extended live time clock increases the collection time real time of the acquisition to correct for input pulse train losses incurred during acquisition due to sys
226. icking on a nuclide in the analysis results list will insert it into the PBC list immediately above the highlighted PBC list nuclide To manually add a nuclide to the PBC list locate the nuclide immediately below the desired insertion position and click once to highlight it Next click on the manual Insert button to open the dialog shown in Fig 135 then follow the manual nuclide and peak insertion instructions that begin on page 130 The entire analysis nuclide list can be copied to the PBC list by en opening the analysis list s control menu Fig 138 and selecting Move Copy All to PBC X Close Alt F4 Copy All to PBC To change the name of a nuclide on the PBC list double click on it 8 Fig 138 Analysis Results to open the PBC Nuclide dialog Fig 135 List Control Menu To remove a nuclide from the PBC list click on the nuclide then on Cut This will remove the nuclide from the list In addition it will activate the gray Paste button at the bottom of the PBC list and change its label to include the name of the cut nuclide This is illustrated for Eu in Fig 139 Rearranging a PBC List Nuclides can be rearranged in the PBC file list by cutting and um Cut pasting them into a different location To move a nuclide to a new position in the list highlight the nuclide to be moved Cut it from the list locate the nuclide immediately below the desired Fig 139 Cut Nuclide is Ready new position and click onc
227. ification Using 1 the energy calibrated spectrum 2 a list of peaks from the peak search and fit and 3 a nuclide library each peak can be assigned to a nuclide by finding the best match es between the energies of peaks found in the spectrum and the library energies 6 4 2 Fraction Limit Test In order to verify the identification of a particular nuclide to a given peak the number of located peaks is compared to the number of possible peaks This is expressed as the fraction figure n y BranchingRatio Fraction i 21 n y BranchingRatio p 1 where BranchingRatio is the yield for the peak for the given nuclide is the sum over the located peaks and p is the sum over the possible peaks This fraction is between 1 00 for all peaks located and 0 for no peaks located This value is compared to a limit value to determine whether this nuclide s peaks are present in sufficient measure to say this nuclide is present The Fraction Limit Test is passed if the fraction as percent is above the value entered on the System tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type Section 5 5 1 1 175 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 6 4 3 Decay Limit Test Another test for the validity of a nuclide identification is to reject nuclides that have decayed between the collection time for the sample and the spectrum time If the time elapsed between sample and data collection is too large this nuclide will have decayed away This determination
228. ilename based on the Start Save Report settings Relative pathname of the spectrum file 10 JOB FILES ShortBase Relative pathname of the spectrum without the and extension Password Value entered in ASK PASSWORD command Owner Value entered in ASK PASSWORD command The filename variables are updated each time a READ operation is performed The READ operations are ANALYZE file LOAD ASK CALIBRATION RECALL ASK LIBRARY RECALL CALIBRATION ASK OPTIONS RECALL EFFICIENCY ASK PBC RECALL ENERGY ASK SPECTRUM RECALL OPTIONS CALIBRATE EFFICIENCY RECALL ROI CALIBRATE ENERGY STRIP The filename is not updated for WRITE commands The following sample gos file will produce a set of files in which the last character of the filename is a digit that increments with each loop ASK SPECTRUM LOOP 5 SAVE FULLBASE LOOP1 FILEEXT END LOOP 10 3 JOB Programming Example A common operation that is ideal for a JOB file is the collection of many consecutive sample spectra without user intervention An example of this is the collection of a series of spectra to show the radioactive decay in a particular sample This process can be described as follows Set the Detector parameters such as live time Start the acquisition Wait for the acquisition to stop Integrate the nuclide peak Record the peak area Repeat this for the required number of samples Du Bu bnDoa 219 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32
229. ilename can be specified on the command line If the specified file cannot be found in the default directory as defined by Windows the AMESSAGE directory on the default drive is searched If it is not found there or cannot be read then the internal values are used Some of these values can only be set in this file G30WIN TXT Message file name This is the name of the file containing all the text and format statements used in the report YES NO spellings Not used in ScintiVision 251 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 JANFEBMARAPRMAYJUNJULAUGSEPOCTNOVDEC spellings These are the alternate to English spellings of the months These spellings are used in addition to English to convert the input dates to fixed format D Deconvol charact This is the character on the report denoting that this peak is part of a deconvolution S shape character This character on the report means that the peak had a bad shape flag set to true M Multiplet char This is the character on the report denoting that this peak is part of a multiplet Unknown suspect Not used in ScintiVision D A27 EBAR TBL Ebar table filename Not used in Scinti Vision D A27 IEQT TBL IEq table filename Not used in ScintiVision F Ebar on off Not used in Scinti Vision F IEq on off Not used in ScintiVision T T print eff cor peak area Unidentified Peak and Library Table Format Flag T Print efficiency corrected peak area for unknown peaks instead of net peak coun
230. in ile ent The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 CALL file job Executes another gos file as a subroutine The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 CHANGE SAMPLE This is used to control the CHANGE SAMPLE output and SAMPLE READY input BNC signals on the rear panel of most MCBs and is intended to initiate a hardware handshake sequence for advancing a sample changer The SET OUTPUT HIGH command is sent to the currently selected Detector then the sample ready status is monitored for at least 120 seconds until the input is low then finally the SET OUTPUT LOW command is sent and input is monitored until it returns to the high level again before proceeding Note that if the sample changer controls are not able to make the SAMPLE READY input go high very soon after the CHANGE SAMPLE signal is set 1 e the normal state of the SAMPLE READY is low it is expected to go high immediately after the CHANGE SAMPLE condition is set and remain high while the sample changer is moving and returns to low when the sample changer is at its new position then it might be necessary to use the SEND MESSAGE command to send a SET OUTPUT HIGH command then pause with WAIT or some other time consuming command and then send the CHANGE SAMPLE command The following example demonstrates this SET DETECTOR 1 LOOP 5 CLEAR START WAIT WAIT 2 FILL BUFFER SEND MESSAGE SET OUTPUT HIGH SE
231. ion Save Calibration Print Calibration Graphs of the calculated fits and tables of the input values fits and differences are shown for the three relationships in the calibration mode Fig 90 Calibration Menu 5 3 1 Energy 5 3 1 1 Introduction The Energy calibration function calculates two sets of parameters the energy vs channel number and the peak shape or FWHM vs energy The inputs to this function are a spectrum or series of spectra with isolated peaks distributed over the energy range of interest and either a library or table of peak energies The library referred to here is an analysis gamma ray library The creation of a table of peak energies is described in this section The formula for energy vs channel number is E a a C ay C 2 where E energy a coefficients C channel number The formula for FWHM vs energy is F b by C bc 3 where F FWHM b coefficients C channel number 94 5 MENU COMMANDS The same methods used to calculate the peak centroid and width in the Calibrate commands are used in the Analyze functions This ensures consistency of results If fewer than four peaks are used for the calibration the quadratic coefficient is zero The energy calibration is done using spectra in a Detector buffer or disk file window The calibration is linked to the spectrum used and is transferred with it when the spectrum is transferred e g f
232. ique descriptors can be added on start Sample Quantity If the output activity is to be normalized to a volume or weight or any other factor the sample quantity can be entered here The reporting units are entered according to the sample type on the System tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type This will normalize the activity and the report will be in normalized units This normalization is in addition to any normalization done by the multiplier and divisor on the Analysis Options dialog Section 5 5 1 1 Collection Date and Time If the decay correction is enabled see the Sample tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type Section 5 5 1 1 the collection date and time are used in the correction formula If the collection date and time is before that of the spectrum acquisition the spectrum will be activity corrected back to the sample collection time While this is the normal use of this input if the collection date and time is after the acquisition time the decay correction will be made forward in time 61 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 5 2 2 Start This initiates data collection in the selected Detector Any warnings arising from problems detected at the hardware level will appear in a message box or on the Supplemental Information Line at the bottom of the display The Detector can also be started with the Alt 1 accelerator the Start Acquisition button on the Toolbar or the Start command on the right mouse bu
233. irectories Export Program fe Program Files ScintiVision T ranslt exe Browse Arguments spc ShortPath tst ShortB ase Txt gt Initial Directory FileDir gt Run Options e Minimized Maximized Normal Window Cancel Fig 52 Export Tab select from the list of macros shown in Fig 53 The list is displayed by clicking on the arrow button to the right of the Arguments field Entries macros or direct must be separated by spaces to be read as separate arguments File Path Name This will insert the complete file pathname e g c user spectrum test spc into the dialog box The filename is the name selected in the filename entry dialog File Base Name This will insert the file path name without the extension File Path Name File Base Name File Name File Base File Extension Fig 53 Export Argument Macros e g c user spectrum test into the dialog box The filename is the name selected in the filename entry dialog The extension can be entered manually after the macro e g FullBase Spc into the dialog box Note that the dot must also be entered Related filenames can also be made by adding characters before the dot e g FullBase A Spc Any executable program that can be executed from the Windows Run command can be selected including DOS batch commands 50 5 MENU COMMANDS File Name This will insert the filename e g
234. is will be displayed to the left of the PBC Table see PBC Peak 20 x Nuclide Co 60 Fig 137 If no peaks are shown none were in the analysis file possibly because they were all outside the energy analysis range Adding Nuclides Fig 136 Edit PBC Peak Values There are two Insert buttons at the bottom of the PBC nuclide list Insert which is for manually specifying the nuclide and the button below it which will be labeled with the name of the nuclide selected in the analysis results list when no nuclide is selected this button is labeled Insert Copy SvDeme2U RIEG Editing svdemo1 pbc x Creation 5 1 02 9 46 19 4M Co 60 Cobalt Edition 5 1 02 9 46 44 4M Peaks EIEEE fea Ear ae E A ie Tr 2 qe 50 237 903 Insert Cut Edit Cut Insert leap Faste Insert faste Fig 137 The List of Analysis Nuclides left and the PBC Table right To automatically add an analysis nuclide to the PBC list Go to the analysis results list and click once on the nuclide of interest This will activate the gray Insert Copy button at the bottom of the PBC list and change its label to Insert plus the name of the nuclide Now in the PBC list locate the nuclide immediately below the desired insertion position then click on Insert nuclide name This will insert the nuclide and display the energies and backgrounds for its peaks in the analysis 132 5 MENU COMMANDS Double cl
235. k on OK Calibration Description EE peer calibration using Cs 137 and Co 60 Cancel Fig 103 Calibration Description 106 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 3 4 Lower Limit This command opens the dialog shown in Fig 104 which allows you to set the low channel limit to be used during EnerladienTelisbeusedimeths calibration This is useful when calibrating using Co lower limit in calibrating 5 3 5 Learn Calibration Sequence To simplify the calibration process ScintiVision allows you Cancel to create a calibration sequence with all parameters defined and store it in a file with the extension cAr Both energy Fig 104 Set Low Channel Limit and efficiency calibrations can be performed in the same sequence To do this select Calibrate Learn Select Auto Calibration File File Calibration Sequence from the menu This Savein Sc El will display the Open Calibration Sequence lad svtestcal dialog shown in Fig 105 In the File Name field give the sequence a name with the caL extension Click on OK to close this dialog and open the Automatic Calibration dialog Fig 106 File name svmanual cal Save as type Auto Calib Files cal y Cancel The Detector list selection allows up to three lists of Detectors to defined All of the Fig 105 Open Calibration Sequence Detectors in a list are calibrated at the same time Each of the lists can contain one to four of the Detectors on the system To sele
236. k shapes do not have a familiar shape in this display The Auto mode will adjust the vertical scale for each pulse The pulse is shown before the amplifier gain has been applied so the relation between channel number and pulse height is not fixed The horizontal scale extends from 16 to 256 channels The display is expanded around the marker position which means that in some cases the peak will disappear from the display when it is expanded The display can be switched from the current MCB to another Detector or the buffer The other Detector will be shown in its most recent mode PHA or InSight The buffer will always be shown in PHA mode When you return to the current MCB the display will return to the InSight mode This also holds true if you exit ScintiVision while in InSight mode on next startup this MCB will still be in InSight mode The display can include a Mark to indicate one of the other signals shown in Fig 88 The Mark is a solid color region displayed similarly to that of an ROI in the spectrum This Mark can be used to set the timing for the gate pulse It can also be used to set the shaping times and flattop parameters to get the best performance 83 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 For example suppose it is necessary to get the best resolution at the lt none gt highest throughput possible By viewing the pulses and the pileup reject lt none gt marker the rise time can be increased or decreased to obtain a mi
237. kn tact 156 CET sens Pace rant dece ase nati aun d RAS 155 Recall Be 4 4 ux aoe are tetti to qe x tts 157 Save Fil At oett ooa nh 156 MUS sarria 32 208 Unmark siepe teri ace ote t Ax ERN 155 ROLMEAU coit aca md Rat often ef th 155 ROU Stats alas pocas atte putat dr 32 208 Rubber rectangle cs sos ote po gera 37 164 Sample changers 2 s eos oat eo n x ale th 238 Sample description 49 151 ASK OMS ds a hoot itat puo ge Oe 61 Sample quantity cc cra e gna 49 ASCO dt a Re ade Ae 61 Sample Type COLTGCHOLS S ob it IAN 124 Save libra POPE 149 ROM ME ak cosh deor ihn eaten a ae ies 156 SPECI geier niece ease eee ae 55 57 Scaling autoseale ca Sven a 35 159 linear eL oi dena aote pto exa 35 159 logarithmic ck eh etm eee poe EA 35 159 Screen Capture 2 ex adeat tace a ios 207 BOCHICHIS 5 6 5U kA potat a BUE a A e add hots 3 Select MG B Ave had adeant tte t ex Roth 157 SEND NESSAGE ses fice ace ea R ER 233 Serial port MCBS idas opta s 238 Services menu td ta 150 Settings ACQUISION s ced mauu nee e 60 C aleilale jasc adeat ttt peto n Rit 112 Pilg ra hose motive het oae Sach ire 48 quality assurance 43 xx te x Roh 190 setup INDEX analysis selup Succ sores e DO ED Raus 250 aveo MM TE DP p 25 quality assurance ceu oett y xcci 190 StaruSave Report ax ens nex y aoe ae Me s 60 Shaping 4554 ee Mesa te dave aaah we kwh ge rat c 83 Singlets fa Askin See tet ae tatit wig atk wed ot mit 08 101 SMART 1 detect
238. l be retained and used until changed Peak Info always prints the FWHM so an x of 2 is not useful Calculation Settings i2 xi y for wit 10 2 Cancel Fig 116 FW 1 x M Dialog 112 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 4 2 Peak Info This command does one of the following If the marker is in an ROI 1 If the spectrum is not calibrated the channel centroid FWHM and FW 1 x M in channels are displayed 2 If calibrated the channel centroid FWHM and FW 1 x M in channels and energy the gross and net area and the library best match and activity are displayed If the marker is not in an ROI the peak limits used are the same as the limits for the ROI Insert button on the Status Sidebar and the report is generated according to items 1 and 2 above The x factor is determined in Calculate Settings The peak information is displayed in a pop up box at the top of the peak Fig 117 It can also be displayed by double clicking the mouse in the ROI or on the peak or with the right mouse button menu To close the box press Esc or click in the box This calculation is the same as the Peak Info Peak 11341 02 1835 76 kev calculation in MAESTRO and might not give FWHM 2 15 Fw 1 5 M 3 Library Y 88 165576 2119 06 B results identical to the complete analysis peak coda Aree ee results If the D ri irin h Net Area 149017 428 esults the Detector 1s acqu 8 data the Gross Net Count Rate 42 84 41
239. l data The Background Type can be set to 1 3 or 5 point This is explained in more detail in Chapter 6 The filename of the Nuclide Library to be used in the spectrum analysis can be the Internal working library or a library on disk The working library is the library from Library Select File and will include any modifications made during the interactive analysis mode The Calibration data to be saved with the spectrum or used for online analysis can be the currently loaded Internal working calibration or a calibration File stored on disk The working calibration is the calibration just created in the calibration section see Section 5 3 or the calibration most recently recalled from disk When the spc file for this spectrum is saved on disk the current calibration is saved with it for later analysis The interactive analysis Analyze Interactive in viewed area uses the internal calibration NOTE Each Detector and the buffer can have separate calibrations System Tab System settings are those settings that are generally the same from sample to sample however all these entries except the Laboratory and Operator names can be different for each sample type The dialog is shown in Fig 123 The Laboratory name composed of any 64 characters is printed on the report The Operator name is the name of the person operating the system This name will appear on the analysis report This field defaults to the user name entered duri
240. l exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 75 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 78 can monitor up to 20 nuclides at one time and stops data collection when the values of the minimum detectable activity MDA for all of the user specified MDA nuclides reach the needed value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formula for calculating the MDA can be generally represented as follows MDA at b c Counts Live time Eff Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from external programs The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition 1s stopped Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers for the MDA calculation desired Select the Nuclide and Energy from x the droplists The Nuclide list contains Amplifier Ampliier2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer all the nuclides in the working library High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset The Energy list shows all the gamma MDA Presst Add New ray energies for
241. l insert the complete file path name e g c user spectrum test txt into the dialog box The filename is the name selected in the filename entry dialog 22 5 MENU COMMANDS File Base Name This will insert the file path name without the extension e g c user spectrum test into the dialog box The filename is the name selected in the file name entry dialog The extension can be entered manually after the macro e g FullBase Spc into the dialog box Note that the dot must also be entered Related filenames can also be made by adding characters before the dot e g Fu11Base A Spc File Name This will insert the filename e g test TXT into the dialog box The filename is the name selected in the filename entry dialog File Name can be constructed as file base file extension File Base This will insert the base filename e g test into the dialog box The file base name is the name selected in the filename entry dialog File Extension This will insert the file extension e g TXT into the dialog box The file extension is the name selected in the filename entry dialog Note that the dot is not included Any manually entered input of the macro form xxx will be included in the argument list without changes Initial Directory Specify the initial directory for the program to use either with directly File Directory entered character strings or by selecting from the list of macr
242. l or matrix This is shown in Fig 97 99 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 gt 38 mm Nal TI Full Energy Peak Efficiency 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 6 08 1 2 4 6 8 10 Photon Energy MeV Fig 96 Detector Efficiency as a Function of Energy In general it is not good practice to use efficiency calibrations from one Detector source geometry for other geometries Different calibration files can be made for all the different source Detector combinations to compensate for the differences between the geometries You choose the output filename for each of the different calibrations which can subsequently be specified for different sampling geometries using Recall Calibration The efficiency is defined as a function of energy Therefore the Energy calibration must be done first The Efficiency command remains grayed disabled until the spectrum has been energy calibrated NOTE The energy recalibration can be redone to account for gain changes without the need to redo the efficiency calibration The efficiency calibration is critically important to the accuracy of the activity results from ScintiVision We recommend that you use only calibrated sources traceable to a known standard The time between the calibration of the radionuclide source by its manufacturer and the time the spectrum is collected is important as this defines the decay correction needed to calculate source strength for the spectrum 100 5 MENU COMMANDS
243. le the numbers up or down The units label is printed at the top of the activity columns on the report and should reflect the values chosen that is if pCi is chosen with a multiplier of 1000 then nanocuries should be entered in the Activity field If the sample quantity is entered later see Acquire Acquisition Settings or File Settings the units for quantity weight or volume are entered in the Weight field The combined label activity quantity is limited to 14 characters The PEAK SEARCH SENSITIVITY sets the sensitivity for the peak search used in the Interactive in viewed area Section 5 5 5 and Entire spectrum in memory analyses Section 5 5 2 The sensitivity can be set at any integer value from 1 to 5 with 1 being the most sensitive that is 1 finds the most peaks A value of 1 will find small peaks but will also find many false peaks A value of 5 will locate all the large peaks but could miss some of the smaller peaks If the value is too sensitive many regions will be deconvoluted unnecessarily in the interactive mode A starting value of 3 is recommended 120 5 MENU COMMANDS Report Tab This screen Fig 124 controls the contents destination and some details of the output report Analysis Options 124 x Sample System Report Analysis Corrections Reporting Options Uncertainty Reporting een ase Percent Counting s Activit
244. le zero setting 5 2 10 4 Gain Stabilization You can control the gain stabilizer on Detectors so equipped The gain stabilizer requires a peak in the spectrum to monitor the changes in the gain of the system amplifier The gain stabilizer controls the amplification factor of a separate amplifier so that the peak will be maintained in its original position The input pulse height to channel number relationship 1s Channel number Intercept Gain pulse height where Intercept The channel number of the zero height input pulse Gain The relation between pulse height and channel number slope of the curve Changes in either the intercept or gain can affect the positions of all the peaks in the spectrum When used with the zero stabilizer both the zero intercept and the gain slope will be monitored to keep all the peaks in the spectrum stabilized The zero stabilization and gain stabilization are separate functions in the MCB but both will affect the position of the peaks in the spectrum The stabilization operates by keeping a peak centered in an ROI you have defined The ROI should be made symmetrically about the center of a peak with reasonably good count rate in the higher channels of the spectrum The ROI should be about twice the FWHM of the peak If the 85 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 region is too large counts not in the peak will have an effect on the stabilization The ROI can be cleared after the Peak command so tha
245. libration function Close exits the Energy calibration function and saves the current calibration as the working calibration 5 3 1 3 Speeding Up Calibration with a Library A library can be used to speed up the calibration process as follows Before entering the calibration process select Library Select File from the menu and choose a library with the nuclides in the calibration source Next click on Library Select Peak to display the list of peaks in the library in energy order Now select Calibrate Energy When the table and graph appear move the table down so the peak list is not covered see Fig 95 97 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 ScintiVision SvDemol Spc m x Fie Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window S w e 1 1 225K tee A ia Library List lx Library SWdemo lib B Energy Table Nuclide Energy Percent Half Life E Lus Ho Energy Channel Fit keV Deka A 122 07 85 6000 272 4 Days 32 19 11 61 29 33 8 87 136 43 272 4 Days 22 07 42 99 125 56 ny 30 1 Yrs 661 34 0 04 1925 Days 1925 Days 1171 40 1333 99 0 16 0 11 122 A 661 62 209 41 1173 24 356 83 1332 50 401 90 Energy Graph DUE K Ea 1915 Energy Channel 42 85 li E fh 2207 kev Er E Enter Table 5 Energies Delete Energy Channel 1 Buffer SvDemol Spc No
246. list displayed the peaks can be selected by double clicking on the energy in the library list This will move the marker to that energy in the spectrum updating the view if necessary and change the graph and spectrum to reflect the changes By clicking on a library peak and then the worksheet the worksheet is ready for the values for that peak The half life will be copied from the library peak list to the Half Life field on the worksheet You will only have to enter the Gamma Sec 105 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window z u 0 0 4 50 7 CA Library ND lib Half Life B Efficiency Table Energy 122 U7 2 A ARO 661 645 6180E 002 5 1 1173 242 4708E 002 2 1332 502 3627E 002 2 Efficiency Graph 0 2401 Efficiency Fit H Calibr 7 X m Efficiency D 21824777 fat 122 07 keV Calc Table 4 Pairs Buffer SvDemol Spc i Delete Entry Recall Save Mode Quadratic m Efficiency 0 5 Eneray kev 1740 Maker 42 122 53 keV 95 724 Unts Effic 0 218153 Library Co 57 Cobalt at 122 07 8387 97 Bg Fig 102 Using the Library in an Efficiency Calibration 5 3 3 Description This command lets you enter the calibration description in the dialog shown in Fig 103 When finished clic
247. ll Detectors on the system This is created by the MCB Configuration program see Chapter 2 The default descriptions are derived from the hardware and can be changed by running the configuration program Detector List Editor MCA Pick List 00001 MCB 257 Input 1 00002 MCB 257 Input 2 00003 MCB 257 Input 3 Cancel 00004 MCB 257 Input 4 oli 00008 IDM 7325 Master Detector List MCB 257 Input 1 00002 MCB 257 Input 2 00003 MCB 257 Input 3 00004 MCB 257 Input 4 Station 3 Station 4 DSPEC PRO With Nal Add gt Remove lt Ni Fig 171 Detector List Editor Dialog On a single PC system the ScintiVision installation program initially sets the available Detector list identical to the master list On a networked system the system configuration program sets the Detector list identical to the master list The Master Detector List including the Detector descriptions are the same for all ORTEC programs e g ScintiVision MAESTRO ScintiVision running on all PCs connected to the workgroup To add a Detector to the ScintiVision Pick List for this PC click on the name in the Master list then click on Add To add all the Detectors on the Master Detector List click on All To remove a Detector from this local pick list click on the name in the Pick List and click on Remove To remove all the Detectors click on New 154 5 MENU COMMANDS When Detector selection is complete click on OK These s
248. log in Fig 168 Enter the correct password to unlock the Detector Each time destructive access to a Detector 1s attempted while it is locked the Locked Detector dialog see Fig 169 will ask for the password In addition the owner of the Detector will be displayed on the Supplemental Information Line see Fig 170 If the incorrect password is entered in either the Unlock or Locked Detector dialog the dialog will reappear waiting for the correct password If you do not know the password click on Cancel to abort the access attempt Lock Detector i 2l x Owner Fred Bloggs Password Cancel Verify la Fig 167 Entering Name Password to Lock a Detector Unlock Detector 2l x Password Cancel Fig 168 Unlocking a Detector Locked Detector 2f x Password Cancel Fig 169 Password for Accessing Locked Detector SEE 1452 670 93 keV 7 Detector Locked by Fred Bloggs Fig 170 Name of Person Who Locked Detector 153 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 5 7 5 Edit Detector List This allows you to select those Detectors on the system that are to be available in ScintiVision on this PC Other applications e g GammaVision MAESTRO on the same PC can have their own lists In this way the different Detectors on the network can be segregated by function or type Figure 171 shows the Detector List Editor dialog On the left is the Master Detector List of a
249. ls Command are the characters sent to the changer to make it operate Timeout is the maximum time to wait for a response before error Response is the reply from the changer when it has finished the Command The first operation is to send Command out the serial port for the selected Detector It then waits for a response or timeout according to these entries 1 If aresponse string is provided the length of the response string determines the exact number of characters to wait for 2 If aresponse string is not provided any character input will generate a success 3 If aresponse string is provided and the characters do not match an Invalid Response message is generated and the JOB terminates 4 If a timeout occurs a Timeout Message is generated and the JOB terminates Example SET DETECTOR 1 LOOP 3 WAIT SERIAL Loopl L CR 300 BEL BEEP 5 END LOOP This code does the following 1 Sends 1L and waits 5 minutes for an ASCII Bell Character Beeps 5 after ASCII bell is received 2 Sends 2L and waits 5 minutes for an ASCII Bell Character Beeps 5 on success 3 Sends 3L and waits 5 minutes for an ASCII Bell Character Beeps 5 on success The is the CR carriage return character ZOOM i Changes the size of the ScintiVision window Selects one of icon normal or maximum according to the argument The arguments are minimize icon O normal size determined by last
250. lt 3 gt the Clear Spectrum button on the Toolbar or the Clear command on the Acquire menu 5 10 4 Copy to Buffer The Copy to Buffer function transfers the data and descriptors e g live time real time from the selected Detector to the buffer This function can also be performed with Alt 5 gt or the Copy to Buffer command on the Acquire menu 5 10 5 Zoom In Zoom In adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Expanded Spectrum View to view a smaller portion of the spectrum If the rubber rectangle is not being used the vertical scale is divided by two and the horizontal scale is reduced by about 646 of the full horizontal scale If the rubber rectangle is being used the display shows only the contents of the rectangle The 163 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 minimum display is 6 of the horizontal full scale The current horizontal and vertical full scale values are shown on the Toolbar This command not using the rubber rectangle is duplicated by Keypad lt gt the Toolbar s Zoom In button and Zoom In on the Display menu 5 10 6 Zoom Out Zoom Out adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Expanded Spectrum View to view a larger portion of the spectrum The vertical scale is doubled and the horizontal scale is increased by about 6 of the full horizontal scale This command is duplicated by Keypad lt gt the Toolbar s Zoom Out button and Zoom Out on the Display menu 5 10 7 Undo Zoom I
251. lts are displayed The energy calibration for all the peaks in the spectrum can be shifted with the Shift keV field and slide bar Select the amount of shift and click on OK ScintiVision will perform the new analysis and display the results The residuals are the differences between the calculated spectrum based on peak shape peak area and background and the actual raw data These can be displayed in the spectrum window by marking the Show Residuals check box The scaling factor for the residual display is the same as for the data display In log mode the scale of the residuals display is somewhat exaggerated and the residuals might appear more significant than they actually are 5 6 Library The Library menu commands Fig 149 allow you to select display Library create edit or print the library files used in the Analyze and Calibrate Select Peak sections using either the ScintiVision library editor discussed here or PIS File Edi the NuclideNavigator III library editor Library files are organized by nuclide then by the nuclide s peaks List Fig 149 Peak List NOTE NuclideNavigator mab format libraries can be used only as Dialog Box master libraries not as analysis libraries The nuclide library is used with reference to the peak search or report functions for quantitative identification of and activity calculations for spectral components according to calibrated peak 142 5 MENU COMMAND
252. ly analyze the selected region and display the results The Analysis Sidebar will open it is shown superimposed on the Status Sidebar in Fig 10 The peak fit s will be shown graphically and the numerical results will be displayed in an Analysis Results Table window as shown in Fig 10 That s all it takes to do an analysis There are several functions you can access at this point but first we will load a working nuclide library and check some 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL Analyze Settings gt Peak Search ROI Report Entire spectrum in memory Spectrum on Disk Display analysis Results Interactive in viewed area Fig 9 Analyze Interactive in Viewed Area parameters Exit this analysis session by clicking on the Analysis Sidebar s Close button xj This will close the Analysis Sidebar and the Analysis Results Table ScintiVision Analysis Results Table File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window uec 4 50 fi A 201 Peje oe i I e Results Table 122 07 EE MGDSS1 cto TH 4915 83 661 62 46 63 230138 67267 Cs 137 9677 8135 50 Marker 43 125 52 keV Analysis Results ESC or Close Sidebar to Cancel 115 595 Cnts Shift keV ooo OK m m m Library Peak _Add Delete within Nuclide d Energy i Peak at Unknown 5 Muttiplet 4 Mb Libra el ORTEC 3 30 00 PM Mon 4 29 02
253. m and ROI file names The Printer is selected from the list of available printers in Windows Plot Options x Title Manual Demo Printer HP DeskJet 550C Printer Colors ROI Text Boxed C Filled Axis Labels MW Y Description Horizontal Vertical Energy C Channels Log Linear Tic Marks V Grid Lines Tic Marks Iv Grid Lines FullScale Y Range Auto Scale Y Range mes Fig 222 The Plot Options Dialog 244 11 UTILITIES If the printer supports color printing the Colors button will be enabled Clicking on it will display Fig 223 If monochrome prints are desired from a color printer check the Monochrome box The five different plot areas can have different colors Select the desired Grid and Tics mess e color from the drop down list for each area These are the Windows colors defined for the selected printer and might not duplicate the actual colors printed Roi Box or Fil E Blue Spectrum Data Red Axis Labels MMM Black y ROI Other Text BH Green EM The ROIs can be Boxed that is represented as boxes drawn from the start to the stop channel or energy and from the baseline Cancel to above the spectrum The Filled selection will fill the region under the spectrum data with a cross hatch It is not completely filled in and does not extend above the data Fig 223 The Color Options Dialog Text The Axis La
254. menu by selecting Job Control to display the Run JOB File dialog Select SAMPDATA JOB from the list of files and click on Open 10 3 1 Improving the JOB This JOB file can be improved by adding a save step for each spectrum collected This is done by inserting the SAVE command in the gos file The spectrum sample description is also entered here This sample description is saved with the spectrum and is printed by the REPORT command Note that the loop counter the in the JOB file text is used in the SAVE and DESCRIBE SAMPLE commands 221 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 The new JOB file is SET DETECTOR 1 SET PRESET CLEAR SET PRESET LIVE 1000 LOOP 10 CLEAR START WAIT 2 WAIT FILL BUFFER SET DETECTOR 0 DESCRIBE SAMPLE This is sample SAVE DECAY CHN RECALL ROI DECAYPK ROI REPORT PRN SET DETECTOR 1 END LOOP Spooling the report could take some time To overlap the data collection with the analysis the logic of the JOB file needs to be modified to restart the acquisition after the data have been moved to the buffer All of the analysis is performed on the buffer spectrum so the Detector spectrum can be erased and the next one started Insert CLEAR and START after FILL BUFFER as shown here SET DETECTOR 1 SET PRESET CLEAR SET PRESET LIVE 1000 CLEAR START LOOP 10 WAIT FILL BUFFER CLEAR START SET DETECTOR 0 DESCRIBE SAMPLE This is sample SAVE DECAY CHN RECALL
255. mits a warning dialog will be displayed and if the Lock Acquire on Violation s box has been checked the problem must be corrected and QA rerun before more data can be collected on that Detector Generally after setup these levels should not be changed without careful consideration Use the ScintiVision menu password security mechanism Services Menu Passwords to protect this menu from unauthorized access The first time the Settings command is used a QA database must be created Should the dialog shown in gt 7 Do you wish to create database Fig 194 will open click on Yes This will start the easy to database set izard di d in Section 8 1 2 use database setup wizard discussed in Section T mer 8 1 1 Establishing QA Settings Fig 194 Create QA Database Once the QA database has been created click on Settings to open the Quality Assurance Settings dialog shown in Fig 195 This dialog contains three main data entry areas e BACKGROUND Acquisition Count Rate Limits SAMPLE Type Analysis Settings File SAMPLE Analysis Parameter Limits 190 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality Assurance Settings _ vol Fig 195 QA Settings Dialog In order to determine the settings for QA several preliminary steps must be taken l 2 oF Backgrounds must be counted to determine reasonable levels Samples must be counted for total activity to obtain expected values since total activity is d
256. mory If the file is a spectrum data type file cHN only the calibration parameters from the calibration data stored with a spectrum are loaded The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 This command can be used in generating reports that include library nuclide identification The following is an example RECALL CALIB CALIBO001 CLS MARK PEAKS REPORT NEWDATA RPT The report NEWDATA RPT includes nuclide identification using the energy calibration contained in CALIBOO1 CLS RECALL EFFICIENCY file This loads the efficiency calibration data from the specified file to the calibration data for the selected Detector If the file is a pure calibration file cus then all the information including any efficiency tables are replaced in the selected spectrum data memory The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 RECALL ENERGY file 230 This loads the energy calibration data from the specified file to the calibration data for the selected Detector If the file is a pure calibration file cus then all the information including any energy tables are replaced in the selected spectrum data memory If the file is a spectrum data type file cHN only the calibration parameters from the calibration data stored with a spectrum are loaded The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 10 JOB FILES RECALL OPTIONS file svd This loads
257. n This will undo or reverse the last Zoom In operation done with the rubber rectangle It restores the display to the horizontal and vertical expansion before the Zoom In It is not the same as Zoom Out 5 10 8 Mark ROI This function marks an ROI in the spectrum for the total width of the rubber rectangle All channels are marked See also Sections 4 3 3 and 5 8 4 5 10 9 Clear ROI This clears the ROI bits of all channels in the rubber rectangle or all ROI channels contiguous to the channel containing the marker See also Section 5 8 5 5 10 10 Peak Info If the marker is in an ROI this displays one of the following 1 If the spectrum is not calibrated the channel centroid FWHM and FW 1 x M in channels are displayed 2 If calibrated the channel centroid FWHM and FW 1 x M in channels and energy the gross and net area gross and net peak count rates activity of isotope if efficiency calibrated and the library best match are displayed 164 5 MENU COMMANDS If the marker is not in an ROI the peak limits used are the same as the limits for the ROI Insert button on the Status Sidebar and the report is generated according to items 1 and 2 above The x factor is determined in Calculate Settings The peak information is displayed in a pop up box at the top of the peak Fig 117 This is duplicated by double clicking the mouse in the ROI or with Calculate Peak Info To close the box left click on it or
258. n this field opens a list of all Detectors currently on the PC s ScintiVision Detector pick list from which you can select a Detector or the buffer Spectrum Area which can display one or more windows of data from Detectors buffers or spectrum files These windows can be moved sized minimized maximized and closed with the mouse as well as tiled horizontally or vertically from the Window menu When more than one window is open only one is active available for data manipulation and analysis at a time The Title Bar on inactive windows will be gray unless you have changed the color scheme in Windows Control Panel while the active window s title bar will be a brighter color To switch windows click on the window you wish to view or cycle between windows by pressing Ctrl Tab gt Each spectrum window contains a Full Spectrum View and an Expanded Spectrum View see items 6 and 7 below The Full Spectrum View shows the full histogram from the file or the Detector memory The vertical scale is always logarithmic and the window can be moved and sized see Section 4 3 4 The Full Spectrum View contains a rectangular window that marks the portion of spectrum now displayed in the Expanded Spectrum View To quickly move to different part of the spectrum just click on that area in the Full Spectrum View and the expanded display updates immediately at the new position The Expanded Spectrum View shows all or part of the full histogram
259. n to the Constituent section enter I and an amount of 1 then click on Add The droplist at the Fig 128 The Absorber Definition top of the dialog will now show both components Dialog Click on OK to close the Absorber Definition dialog The new material s name will now be displayed in Absorber Definition 2 x gray on the sidebar Absorber drop list EN T NOTE If you choose Mass Ratio instead of 96 Constituents Na z Carcel the ratios of the masses must be entered Units fe x and must total 1 00 For example the Mass Pa o atomic mass of Nal is 149 89 so the Na a RUE OI mass ratio is 0 153 22 989 149 89 and a the I mass ratio is 0 847 2 126 90 149 89 mM qu If an absorber has only one constituent the Amount Enter mass ratio is 1 00 1 00000 Delete 6 Ifyou clicked on Mass in step 2 the Absorber Fig 129 Defining a New Absorber section of the sidebar will contain a field labeled Adding the First Component of Density density values can be found in various Sodium Iodide reference books For example the density of Nal is 3 67 g cm If you clicked on Linear in step 2 this field will instead be labeled Mass enter the atomic mass units for the total compound or element The atomic mass for Nal is 149 89 22 9897 126 904 Enter the Density or Mass 7 Click on Calculate If the database contains attenuation data for all of the components in the
260. nalysis DAD pa rat ob dt a Rud Fa S A 122 Corrections abs a Sco RES b 124 5 5 1 2 Attenuation Coefficients llle 125 5 5 1 3 Peak Background Correction escoria EUR ee 129 Select PEC S 2 be 6 hctese net RE E Rete web ess 130 BOP BC anaes pe greeks Shag ae EXT Ee Eg a olde VOI T Kare 130 5 5 2 Entire Spectrum in Memory fonce eo ESL bL b wise to 134 Ss Peel on Dis EA OE TER D ro BE eae 135 5 5 4 Display Analysis Results a a NEN QR aS 135 5 5 5 Interactive in viewed area 2 eee ee 140 DO ADT T TETTE LITT T T eae ae ie Deedee Re eee 142 5 651 Select AA eka tenes FRU ed RR E JURA EE SEU ROLE e oes 143 3 62 Select Piles Stayed ics SS A en de I DeL CU p e er 143 3 0 ABO ee odor ii aol edente c DE ER 144 5 6 3 1 Copying Nuclides From Library to Library 145 5 6 3 2 Creating a New Library Manually vi cs bem EN ER 146 5 6 3 3 Editing Library List Nuclides ao ce prt reet rre tras 146 Manually Adding Nuclides 0 0 0 0 e ee eae 147 Deleting Nuclides from the Library 148 Rearranging the Library List csse ee Rr Re eas 148 Editing Nuelide Peak ros 148 Adding Nuclide Pers E eo EH EX RED oe ets 149 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Rearranging the Peak List iu etel eub ORE ees 149 5 6 3 4 Saving or Canceling Changes and Closing LL 149 OA eo Letto e Oa te D bd Rabe v ha ete da E Ros 150 SI A ascen Pob Ed adieu ear aa c Bd psu Fed te sek i c t Re 150 SNL J
261. nalysis Options dialog They can also be graphically displayed by selecting Analyze and Display Analysis Results then clicking on Open to load the analysis results file SVDEMO UFO This will overlay the peak shapes on the spectrum data open the Analysis Results Table for the spectrum and display the Analysis Sidebar superimposed over the Status Sidebar as shown in Fig 15 Zoom in to see more details Put the mouse on the Cs 661 6 keV entry in the peak list table and click The marker will move to that peak in the display You can use the scroll bars on the peak list window to show other energies and then when you click on the energy the display will show that peak In this mode you can also use the buttons on the Analysis Sidebar to move the marker in the spectrum For example click on Cs in the peak table then click on Energy i the right hand Energy button in the Library Peak section of the Analysis Sidebar to put the marker on the next highest energy library peak which is the 1173 2 keV line of Co Note that this peak is now highlighted in the Analysis Results Table 16 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL ScintiVision Buffer SvDemol Anl1 File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window ols ene x uL Analysis GT Background Nucide Bg l Show Residuals mu 01 a 13 Es 19816 lt Unknown gt i 90 11 41 51 173441 715152 uU UR 122 We DU Rh 464066 129268 ORTEC 10 25
262. name 3 0 Illegal date format 2 3 Tried to read an invalid file 2 7 Error writing header lines of report file 1 202 Error reading spectrum file 1 203 Invalid spectrum file type 1 3 Read error in analysis records of spectrum file 1 4 Read error in pbc file I 4 Read error in ufo file 1 1 Error reading low energy peak invalid in ufo file 2 1 Error writing low energy peak invalid in ufo file 2 4 Peaks or nuclides out of order in ufo file 2 3 Error writing analysis records to ufo file 263 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Error 2 O N N NNN WDWWONANI NINN DAADAADVWK tA A Analysis Failed Warning 3 O Oo MAN DANN RFP hA UNEN eN KH Yu Meaning Write error to report file Spectrum file not found Spectrum file type not supported Read error in spectrum file Invalid nuclide pointer in library Error reading nuclide in library Invalid peak pointer in library Error reading peak in library Analysis information not found Array allocation error Invalid analysis parameters Invalid analysis parameters Library too large UFO file too large Peak search error No peaks found Peak ID error Isotope identification error Floating point error No Error GSA EXE has finished executing but an error was encountered Refer to the GSA completion codes message Analyzing Please Wait Analysis via GSA EXE is being executed Attempt to dynamically li
263. nce to highlight it Next click on the manual Insert button to open the Edit Library Nuclide dialog The dialog will be blank Fill in the name and half life as well as any other inputs and click on OK 147 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Deleting Nuclides from the Library To remove a nuclide from the library click on the nuclide then Roe Cut on Cut This will remove the nuclide from the list In addition it will activate the gray Paste button at the bottom of the nuclide list and change its label to include the name of the cut nuclide This is illustrated for Eu in Fig 157 Rearranging the Library List Fig 157 Cut Nuclide is Ready to Paste The order of the nuclides in the library is the order in which they are listed on the report Nuclides can be rearranged in the LIB file list by cutting and pasting them into a different location To move a nuclide to a new position in the list highlight the nuclide to be moved Cut it from the list locate the nuclide immediately below the desired new position and click once on that nuclide to highlight it then click on the Paste button which will be labeled with the name of the Cut nuclide The Cut nuclide will be inserted in the space above the highlighted nuclide Several nuclides can be cut at one time from the list then pasted back into the list into a different order Cut nuclides remain queued up for pasting last one first according to the nuclide name on the
264. ncy Calibration Table 104 Editing the Efficiency Calibration Table 104 5 3 2 3 Using The Library in Efficiency Calibrations 105 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 3 99 DeSseripuionins Au eit do eR vade qq ead wes dE PAS 106 SL LOWE 26 4 nese EYE Ua E Reb pues ARs 107 5 23 93 Learn alibratiombseQueliCe ar ep Ae we olet pi euo pod AA 107 5 3 6 Run Calibration Sequences ir a xtA xS DM ac BER ARE aud 110 5 37 Recall Calibrations 7 rie a O 111 3 5 9 SdVe CallbPACIOHAS usd sd ed UE De ax e e atl 111 5 3 9 Print Calibration arrasar ek Cole eot ama RC ah Ea e od a D TR te RC eo 112 ir alot orte Ee musto d tie Gry e ous erre uicit Bot ate fuk dere Bama ctu ag 112 Sub le SUING Ske uestes araea i a aT ede POE RENE E DM e tree SE 112 2952 Peak Info ctos ome ve Tope eC RL AS OVES ee Pe pitt UE s 113 5413 Input Count Rate uus eer oct rel bae ee P Ba Vee Se meee 115 DA SUE Rennie ERST S pego eae s Tau aute EUIS Arie us PON que AS det 115 S5 S IDIOOLLE spats Sees ert be dc CO ERE Eie eta cu Ce E da 116 DO MPA canas eget RN dace Rene d RC get ae die peut a a 116 SOS ATISIZO se oaov Sosa d Esta A atio tete et dee aaa obit sd ieu oe 117 3 9 T CUNO S ees A ation Mead adiri amp Ra rad d dedi Ue SE ewe 117 Sob Sample Types NS he hee Cha eu en RETE ME 117 Sample Tabs decia Xu o he sos rones 118 System Lab sess pde ie robe EXE e Er og de EXP S 119 Report Labra os eb E oe UR Piae ois 121 A
265. nd calculated as follows 114 5 MENU COMMANDS A Se 7 where A the adjusted gross counts in the ROI l theROllow limit h the ROI high limit C the contents of channel i The net area is the adjusted gross area minus the adjusted calculated background as follows B h 1 5 A cu cg sec n ag h 1 1 8 The uncertainty in the net area is the square root of the sum of the squares of the uncertainty in the adjusted gross area and the weighted error of the adjusted background The background uncertainty is weighted by the ratio of the adjusted peak width to the number of channels used to calculate the adjusted background Therefore net peak area uncertainty is given by 9 where Aag the adjusted gross area A the net area B the background area the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit 5 4 3 Input Count Rate The Input count rate is supported by a number of our newer digital MCBs For these units the input count rate can be shown in the upper left corner of the spectrum window This is input count rate and not the number of processed pulses 5 4 4 Sum The Sum function performs its calculation in one of three ways depending on the position of the marker 115 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 1 Ifthe marker is not in an ROI and a box is not defined the sum of the data channels of the Detector is shown on the display The complete channel width e g 1 to 16384 is summed 2 Ifthe marker i
266. network is a DSPEC Plus ORSIM II or III MatchMaker DSPEC 92X II 919E 920E 921E Ethernet connected OCTETE or other module that uses an Ethernet connection the network default protocol must be set to the IPX SPX Compatible Transport with NetBIOS selection on all PCs that use CONNECTIONS hardware For instructions on making this the default see the network protocol setup discussion in the MCB Properties Manual 8 To start the MCB Configuration program on your PC go to the Windows Start menu and click on ScintiVision 32 and MCB Configuration The MCB Configuration program will locate all of the powered on ORTEC MCBs attached to the local PC and to powered on network PCs display the list of instruments found allow you to enter customized instrument numbers and descriptions and optionally write this configuration to those other network 2 INSTALLING SCINTIVISION 32 PCs as described in detail in the software installation chapter of the MCB Properties Manual If this is the first time you have installed ORTEC software on your system be sure to refer to the MCB Properties Manual for information on initial system configuration and customization ScintiVision 32 is now ready to use and its MCB pick list can be tailored to a specific list of instruments see Section 5 7 5 2 1 If You Have Windows XP Service Pack 2 and Wish to Share Your Local ORTEC MCBs Across a Network NOTE If you do not have instruments connected directly to
267. ng Windows installation In the Library section Match Width sets the maximum amount as a fraction of FWHM by which a peak centroid can deviate from the nearest library peak energy and still be associated with that library peak If the value is too small some spectrum peaks will be misidentified due to statistical variation in the centroid and if it is too large some library peaks will be incorrectly identified The default value is 0 5 Fraction Limit is one of the parameters used to determine the presence or absence of a nuclide The sum of the emission probabilities of the peaks in the spectrum identified with the nuclide is divided by the sum of the emission probabilities of all peaks of the nuclide in the energy range being analyzed If the result is greater than the fraction limit the nuclide is marked as being present See Section 6 4 2 119 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Analysis Options 124 x Sample System Report Analysis Corrections Laboratory name ORTEC Operator name Calie Kitts Library Match width 0 5000 FWHM keV Fraction Limit 0 0000 Percent Units Bq Multiplier 1 00000 Activity Ba C yCi ivisor 1 00000 Mercier Size 1 00000 Ko PEAK SEARCH SENSITIVITY Mot C1 C2 i C4 C 5 Least Fig 123 The System Tab The Units section allows you to select either becquerels Bq or microcuries M Ci as the base units and a Multiplier and Divisor to sca
268. ng the peak search at the point where the filtered spectrum drops below zero on either side of the peak We assume that background is defined by three points above and below these peak limits An average at each of these endpoints is computed and a straight line is drawn between these endpoints to model the background across the peak region An initial estimate of the FWHM of the peak can be obtained from the width of the region of the filtered spectrum that is greater than zero The peak location is set to the maximum Finally the area is obtained from the background subtracted data using the formula for a perfect Gaussian Area Fit Height x FWHM x 13 where Fit Height F i F i j channel where F is maximum channel where F is minimum li i 168 6 ANALYSIS METHODS BkLow c0 BkHigh Peak Limits 3 d h ht3 Fig 185 Peak Limits and Background Points 6 1 3 Peak Statistics The uncertainty 1 sigma in the net area of the peak is computed as follows Net Uncertainty y Background Variance Gross Area 14 where the Background Variance was computed as follows Background SS A A a 15 Channels BackLo BackHi Background Variance where Channels number of channels in peak BkLo background per channel at low end of peak BkHi background per channel at high end of peak 6 1 4 Critical Level Peak Rejection Criteria Peaks can be rejected for use in subsequent
269. nimum of pileup reject pulses Mark Types For the Mark choose either points or filled to the zero line display Fig 88 Mark This is controlled by the selection in the Display Preferences menu item Display That choice does not affect the PHA mode choice The colors are the same Selection as for the PHA mode None No channels are marked in the display PileUpReject The region marked indicates when the PUR circuit has detected pileup and is rejecting the marked pulses NegBLDisc This shows when the negative baseline discriminator has been triggered Typically this signal only marks the TRP reset pulse The signal is used internally in the live time correction baseline restoration and pile up rejection circuits BaseLineR This shows when the baseline restorer is actively restoring the baseline PosBLDisc This shows when the positive baseline discriminator has been triggered The signal is used internally in the live time correction baseline restoration and pile up rejection circuits Busy When the busy signal is active Busy shows in the Mark box It represents the dead time Gate This shows when the gate signal is present on the gate input connector If 84 the Gate mode on the ADC tab is set to Off then all regions are marked If the mode is set to Coincidence then the marked region must overlap the pulse peak that is must start before the beginning of the flattop and stop after the end of the flattop for th
270. nk to a task WinExec error 5 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Auto PZ aborted The MCB Auto PZ function was aborted by lt Esc gt 264 APPENDIX C JOB FILE ERROR MESSAGES Buffer and Detector not same size or segments Error when trying to restore data which does not match the Detector configuration Calibration per channel wrong Error when trying to calibrate spectrum arising whenever the calibration slope would be 0 negative or greater than 100 units per channel Can t allocate memory for library Attempting to load a library for which there is not enough room in memory Best dealt with by trying again or removing some other applications from memory Can t find any more peaks A peak could not be found in the direction indicated by the function button pressed Can t Find Any More ROIs Attempting to index to the next ROI in a direction for which no more ROIs can be located Can t read library file Attempting to open or read the library file resulting in some kind of file I O error usually because the file doesn t exist but also possibly because the disk is defective Can t RESTORE to acquiring Detector Error preventing the Restore function from altering data in a Detector in which one or more segment s are actively acquiring data Can t Run Protected Mode Application in Real Mode WinExec error 18 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application pro
271. nnel in the area of interest this might be i the center of an ROI that you wish to mark or unmark a portion of the spectrum to be summed or a peak for which you want detailed information m ZS i gt ker 310 i t Release the mouse button this anchors the ending corner of the Markar 210 uncali 25 653 Ene rectangle Fig 39 The Rubber Rectangle s Crosshairs Click the right mouse button to open its menu and select one of the available commands Once an area is selected the commands can also be issued from the Toolbar Menu Bar Status Sidebar or keyboard As an example Fig 40 illustrates the process of marking a region with a rubber rectangle and zooming in using the right mouse button menu 37 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Start Copy to Buffer Zoom Out Undo Zoom In Mark ROI Clear ROI Peak Info Input Count Rate Sum Fig 40 Zooming In Using the Rubber Rectangle and Right Mouse Button Menu You can move the rectangle using the arrow keys The te anayze Libra Services BOI Display lt Shift gt and Shift gt gt keys move the box left and right while Shift 1 and Shift 1 move the box up and down This enables you to position the box more precisely 4 3 4 Sizing and Moving the Full Spectrum View To change the horizontal and vertical size of the Full Spectrum View move the mouse pointer onto the side edge bottom edge or corner of the window u
272. ns in the file can be plotted or suppressed ROIs can be plotted when stored in the spectrum spPc file or in a separate ROI file To start W INPLOTS go to the Accessories Windows Start menu and click Nu Ex Scintivision 32 M MCB Configuration BB MS DOS Prompt BIS Nuclide Library Editor on ScintiVision 32 WinPlots see Fig 215 WINPLOTS can also be run in command line mode for use in JOB files or directly from other Windows programs see Section 11 1 3 In this mode the settings can be specified or m the defaults can be used m ScintiVision b WinPlots 3 Windows Explorer Fig 215 Starting WINPLOTS The spectrum files are associated with WINPLOTS by the installation program so double clicking on a spectrum filename within Windows Explorer will start WINPLOTS and display that spectrum The main WINPLOTS display is shown in Fig 216 241 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 T8 winPlots Sample chn BEE File Options Help Standard Spectrum Cs 137 and Co 60 42 00 366 00 774 00 1182 00 1590 00 Energy keV Acquired 26 Apr 95 2 58 53 PM Real Time 1927 90 s Live Time 1800 00 s File CAUSERASample chn Channels 2048 Detector 20 Oak Ridge uNOMAD 29 Apr 98 8 31 26 AM Fig 216 The Main WINPLOTS Display 11 1 1 File Figure 217 shows the File menu These menu items select the spectrum and ROI to be displayed read and write the settings file Recall Spectrum and
273. ns wildcards or and the user clicks on OK the list of files box will Look in amp y User z el a ex S Demo2b spe i SVDemolc spc E SVDemo2c spc is SVDemold spc im SVDemo2d spc show the list of all files for the current drive and path that meet the wildcard SvDemol An1 SvDemol Spc SvDemola spc iu SvDemo2 An1 is SvDemo2 Spc ig SVDemo2a spc requirements The default list of files is set to the appropriate file type for the function being performed For example in File Recall if the default filename criterion Integer SPC is displayed in the Files of type field the list of files box will display only the files that have the extension SPC or AN1 Similarly in File Import if the default filename criterion Txt Files is displayed the list of files box will show only the Txt files in that directory In Files of type Integer SPC v Cancel V Show Description Integer Data Format 512 Channels Co 60 Co 57 amp Cs 137 20 ml bottles on endcap S N 1721 1753 Fig 45 Standard File Recall Dialog 40 4 DISPLAY FEATURES addition to typing in a wildcard search the File of type field can also be used Click on it to open its droplist then choose one of its file extensions types To recall an existing file double click on its filename in the list of files box or enter its filename in the File name field then press lt Enter gt or click on Open When saving new data for whi
274. ntil the pointer changes to a double sided arrow see Fig 41 2 9 12 sue Click and hold the left mouse button drag the edge of Fig 41 Two Sided Pointer for Sizing Full the window until it is the size you want then release the mouse button 38 Spectrum View and Four Sided Pointer for Moving Window 4 DISPLAY FEATURES To move the Full Spectrum View to a different part of the screen move the mouse pointer onto the top edge of the window until the pointer changes to a four sided arrow see Fig 41 Click and hold the left mouse button drag the window to its new location and release the mouse button 4 4 Buttons and Boxes This section describes ScintiVision s radio buttons indexing buttons and checkboxes To activate a button or box just click on it Radio buttons Fig 42 appear on many ScintiVision dialogs Confidence level and allow you to select of only one of the choices 1 C 2 C 3Sigma Checkboxes Fig 43 are another common feature allowing Fig 42 Radio Buttons you to select one or more of the options at the same time The ROI Peak and Library indexing buttons on the Status Reporting Options Sidebar are useful for rapidly locating ROIs or peaks and for advancing between entries in the library When the last item in either direction is reached the computer beeps and ScintiVision posts a no more message on the Supplementary Information Line If a library file has not been loaded o
275. of the data detection Peaks marked as type MDA will be processed differently in that their peak limits are determined as a multiple of the expected FWHM rather than being determined by the peak search as described earlier Otherwise the background calculations are the same only using these artificially determined peak boundaries 6 4 5 1 MDA Minimum Detectable Activity The first step in calculating the MDA is to calculate the Minimum Peak Area MPA that could be undetected The MPA is given by the following formula MPA 2 71 3 294 2 Bkg Variance 24 where Bkg Variance is calculated in Eq 15 if the peak is located or is calculated in Eq 25 when the peak is too small for Poisson statistics not located h Bkg Variance y e 25 i l where C the channel contents of channel i l the peak lower limit h the peak higher limit The peak high and low limits are MDA factor 2 x FWHM above and below the centroid energy for a total width of MDA factor x FWHM The MDA factor is defined on page 122 and entered on the Options tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type Section 5 5 1 1 The FWHM is calculated from the calibration FWHM formula P The Minimum Detectable Activity Concept Joseph C Lochamy Measurements for the Safe Use of Radiation NBS 75th Anniversary Symposium March 1976 Detection Limits for Radioisotopic Counting Techniques page 10 J K Hartwell ARH 2537 June 1972 177 ScintiVision
276. of which Detector numbers are available when using the function keys An error message box will appear if the selected Detector is invalid In systems with more than 12 Detectors use Display Detector or the drop down list on the Toolbar 209 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 9 5 Keypad Keys 9 5 1 Log Linear Keypad lt gt Keypad lt gt toggles the active spectrum window between logarithmic and linear vertical display This is duplicated by the Log Toolbar button The vertical scale can be controlled with the Zoom In Zoom Out Toolbar buttons Keypad lt gt lt gt the 1 and lt l gt keys and lt F7 F8 gt 9 5 2 Auto Manual Keypad lt gt Keypad lt gt switches the spectrum window between automatic and manual vertical full scale see the discussion in Section 5 9 6 This is duplicated by the Vertical Auto Scale button on the Toolbar 9 5 3 Center Keypad lt 5 gt Keypad lt 5 gt forces the marker to the center of the screen by shifting the spectrum without moving the marker from its current channel This is duplicated by the Center button on the Toolbar For more information see Section 5 9 8 9 5 4 Zoom In Zoom Out Keypad lt gt lt gt Keypad lt gt increases the scale of both axes in the Expanded Spectrum View so the peaks appear larger while Keypad lt gt does the opposite making the peaks look smaller The scale value for both axes is always shown on the Toolbar These functions are duplicated
277. on FitType 3 Total Source Uncertainty 8 660254 Number of Sources Used in Uncertainty 3 Cs 137 18350 0000000 5 0000000 0 Co 60 19660 0000000 5 0000000 0 After the energy list in the EFT files is the following line FitType lt iFit gt 104 5 MENU COMMANDS where lt iFit gt is the fit type above the knee 0 3 or 6 The fit types are no fit and no efficiency interpolative fit linear fit quadratic fit polynomial fit DUNN O When an Efficiency Table is recalled this line is used to select the fit type to be used Following the fit type are the total calculated source uncertainty the number of nuclides in the source uncertainty calculation and the list of nuclides used in the uncertainty calculation The total is the individual uncertainties added in quadrature When finished click on Save to rewrite the new file to disk To discard any changes click on Cancel a dialog will verify that you want to discard 5 3 2 3 Using The Library in Efficiency Calibrations The library can be used to assist in the efficiency calibration in two ways 1 to direct the marker and 2 as input for automatic calibration To open a library select Library Select File A list of the library peaks by energy is displayed by selecting Library Select Peak Now select Calibrate Efficiency When the table and graph appear move the table down so the peak list is not covered see Fig 102 With the library peak
278. on a the table values moves the marker to that energy in both the Attenuation graph window and spectrum windows Clicking the mouse in either spectrum window or the Attenuation graph window moves the marker to that energy in the other plots The attenuation value is displayed on the Marker Information Line Adding a Material Composed of Substances Already in the Database ScintiVision makes it easy to add a new absorber made of substances already in the absorber database The new absorber can be a chemical compound such as sodium iodide Nal or a more complex mixture such as sand and lead 1 In the Attenuation section of the sidebar click on either the Mass or Linear radio button 2 Click on Add This will open the Absorber Definition dialog Fig 128 3 Enter the Name of the new material As an example we will use Nal 125 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 126 25 ScintiVision Attenuation Table File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window BE eon raed tos A 9 e u Buffer M og 395 005 Absorber Add Pb v E dit Density 1 1 34 g cm 3 Attenuation Calculate Attenuation aic fe Linear O66684 1 em Le ERES Log Log g Mass at 11250 0 keV Enter Table 37 Energies Delete Energy Delete Absorb B Attenuation Table AE Energy keV Lin Atten 1 cm Loo Sae 1000 00 0607E 001 1022 00 902
279. on the Save button in the Table section t5 SVDemo1 Elt of the sidebar This opens the Save qo SvDemo2 Eft Efficiency Table dialog shown in Fig 100 The table 1s saved as an ASCII file with the default extension EFT The file can Femme be edited in ScintiVision as described in DU Ya the next paragraph or offline with an ASCII based text editor such as Windows Fig 100 Save Efficiency Table Notepad Editing the Efficiency Calibration Table To edit the efficiency calibration table file open the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar s control menu and select Edit File This opens the dialog shown in Fig 101 Select the EFT file to be edited it will be displayed as shown The table contains the following Editing C USER Scx S Demo1_Eft Fx information lumns 122 07 0 2182478 330022 2 272 x primatin by polui 661 62 0 0561804 15527 8 1099 _ save 1173 24 0 0247082 19640 3 1925 1 1332 50 0 0236268 19656 5 1925 1 _ Cancel 1 Gamma ray energy keV Efficiency used for manual efficiency inputs ignored if remainder of line is valid Co 57 10 4200001 5 0000000 1 3 Gammas sec for this energy at the specified date and time off 4 Half life of this nuclide in days 5 Calibration date and time for the Fig 101 Editing Efficiency Table gammas sec calibration The gammas sec are automatically decay corrected from the date time in column 5 to the date time of the spectrum acquisiti
280. on the pulse can be seen in the InSight mode on the Amplifier 2 tab Note however that if the settings were close to proper adjustment before starting optimization the pulse shape may not change enough for you to see In this situation you also may not notice a change in the shape of the spectrum peaks The most visible effect of incorrect settings is high or low side peak tailing or poor resolution Amplifier 2 Figure 70 shows the Amplifier 2 tab which accesses the advanced DSPEC jr 2 0 shaping controls including the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode x High Voltage About Status dicas MDA Preset Amplifier Ampliier2 AmpifierPRO ADC Stabilizer The many choices of Rise Time allow you to precisely control the tradeoff between resolution and throughput The value of the rise time parameter in the DSPEC jr 2 0 is roughly equivalent to twice the integration time set on a conven tional analog spectroscopy amplifier Thus a DSPEC jr 2 0 value of 12 corresponds to 6 in a conventional amplifier Starting with the nominal value of 12 0 you should increase values of the rise time for better resolution for expected lower count rates or when unusually high count rates are anticipated reduce the rise time for higher throughput with somewhat worse resolution Rise Time Flattop 1200 00 Width ma Tit 0 00000 m Pole Zero InSight i i Stat Stop Fig 70 DSPEC jr 2
281. op list then click on Edit This will open the Absorber Definition dialog 2 Click on the Constituents drop list at the top of the dialog and select Na The fields at the bottom of the dialog will now display Na as the Constituent in the Amount of 2 Change the amount to 1 and click on Enter 3 To delete a component from an absorber select it from the Constituent drop list and click on Delete This Delete button does not remove an absorber from the database just changes the absorber s composition To completely remove an absorber close this dialog go to the bottom of the sidebar and click on Delete Absorber 4 Click on OK to close the Absorber Definition dialog 5 Next enter the mass or density as shown in the Absorber section at the top of the sidebar and click on Calculate 6 Click on Save to store the complete record in the database 128 5 MENU COMMANDS Adding a New Element or Single Constituent Material to the Database Adding a new material involves 1 defining the absorber name then 2 using the Attenuation Worksheet sidebar to create the corresponding table of attenuation coefficients To do this you will need enough energy attenuation pairs to generate a good attenuation function These values can be found in reference books 1 If the attenuation values are in g cm click on the Mass radio button in the Attenuation section of the sidebar If the attenuation values are in units of 1 cm click on Linear Ei
282. operties Fig 27 Acquire Menu Some of the Detector s internal parameters can only be changed when the Detector is not acquiring data To see if the Detector is in acquisition mode open the Acquire menu look at the menu items If Stop is black and Start is gray note that Fig 27 shows the opposite case the Detector is in acquisition mode If this is the case select Stop from the menu or Toolbar We say acquiring data when the MCB is in acquisition mode even if there are no counts accumulating in the MCB 25 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 3 2 8 1 Conversion Gain If you wish to change the conver sion gain click on Acquire MCB Properties select the ADC tab Fig 28 then change the Conversion Gain field The ADC gain is stored in the MCB and automatically recalled from the MCB the next time you restart ScintiVision Note that in this example we are using a 92X II and that the Properties dialog automatically displays only data fields that are applicable to this MCB If you have computer controlled hardware skip to Section 3 2 8 3 3 2 8 2 Detectors Set Up Manually Properties x Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Preset F Gate Conversion Gain EEBS Anticoincidence Live Time 0 00 Real Time 0 00 Fig 28 Setting the 92X II Conversion Gain Manually adjust the spectroscopy amplifier gain shaping time and pole zero according to t
283. or oo oooooo 12 vin NT 116 236 SOUECO o P opti adir axe ucc d etai da 99 102 110 Source Strength 14 due cce k ra Rx E 100 109 SPC file Tloatinp pothitu oe ate oci p DER Liew ate n 48 PILE POI mic eS ala ot erie tai eeu s dnd aot ase Bes 48 Spectre o arti are aq b wh ge rat Mees 32 Spectrum translation 00 247 Stabilizer DALIT o aa Bie po ot t ie wend AE aot ake es 85 Start acquisition 12 a kA cae oce eh E RACER 62 Start Save Repott sox cose awk es awa ews 62 SUP A Lack niente hat claw x tot ane AEA 60 State of health SOM o o oooo 72 Status deb hoo at rto Reate e P 33 Stop acquisition i es i eocat eet a ten 62 vus PC p e 116 stripping factor oooooooomoooo 116 UMA teatime cts dado 115 165 Throughput dias aft Rock 67 68 84 85 Time constant 0 floor ase eect ER wd aloe ave aac 66 Tile ak a y Biase eco tetas chew RC 31 Toolbar vietato ott e po hed x eot ace ad 32 Transistor Reset nessa 66 Transistor Reset Preamplifier 27 TRANSLT program sese 247 command line i lt a oreste ated et 247 Uncertainty far be Sood ent Ware he wud de we Nie 169 176 Uncertainty preset ieu entice chad ex s 75 Undo Zoom Ts s ies 164 Unlock detector o aset Re er Ras 153 Upper level discriminator ULD 69 Vertical Auto Scale 35 159 Vet cab Scale oi xe et Rp ae xov 205 206 InSight mode lord ace oct e o ge etc 83
284. or cHN files All operation is controlled from the command line The command line is TRANSLT type inname type outname w nc col n ni nh i where type inname type outname chn The inname file is in CHN format spc The inname file is in SPC format txt The inname file is in ASCII text format The default is based on the filename extension and the i switch Both chn and spc cannot be used together The input spectrum file no default default extension is spc If the input file is a TXT file it must contain the live and real time in the following format Real Time 240 Live Time 120 Both values are in seconds The header information in the TXT file will be converted and stored in the spPc file if it is in the correct format The correct format for the TXT input file is the same as the TXT format created as the output file chn The outname file is in CHN format spc The outname file is in SPC format txt The outname file is in ASCII text format The output spectrum file The default is the inname with the extension changed If the outname is not given the spectrum file will not be overwritten by the default name The length of the spectrum file converted from text will be the next higher power of two with the surplus channels set to 0 Set the format output to 128 characters per line default is 70 characters per line 247 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 nc col n ni nh
285. or and buffer Decrease amplifier fine gain by smallest increment where supported Decrease amplifier fine gain by several increments Increase amplifier fine gain by smallest increment Increase amplifier fine gain by several increments Capture screen to Windows Clipboard 9 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS gt xeed Aeq 194Bly jxeN 2 yead Aeq 19M0 IX9N gt sdajs Auew ure6 auy aseasou IOW 1euBiu 3xeN E IOS 13m0 JX9N days ule6 uy aseasoul gt yead 1eufiiu 3x9N 9 yead Jamo JX9N Q JepIM Jeuueuo sayBbiy 3xeN umwopunnoeds 3HvdWoo S jauuey samo X N gt JeyousiT F m sda s Auew ureb auy eseaj2eq S IO Xe sul dn uinosds J4ydWO9 3 days uie6 auy aseaisag gt low 4829 9 19d Ane LIN J9MOJIEN l 19jue2 s COCE 7 E JI LE I days ureb au aseasoul gt A 7 z put oan n 9 3 t E dajs uie au ases 9ag gt amden t 3 A e MO uiooz Jenuejy e e soiny Jeaur3 504 I Jeuueuo 3seufiu oj dwnf pug 108 MEM Jesu 0 puueyo oj dunmp aswoH joy J18919 ajajaq 1eyng o do9 S 310 eno ds Jo 82W 18910 UV IJ9pIM 83 J9NeL 94 snid 934SA yuewun dosl z ae j9MOLEN d 42 40Ys 94 youms e4d 10M MEW Zd HES L UV uea15s 9 1 puueyo 19 0 03 dunf ugbd usa1 gt s 95 1 puueyo 13461y 03 dunf dnbd ug 10393390 108198 ZI 3 1 3 100 Keyboard and Keypad Accelerators 1sion Fig 214 Scinti 203 Scint
286. or is a real number spectrum in memory that is multiplied channel by channel isst eve tms times the disk spectrum before being Fig 119 Strip Dialog 116 5 MENU COMMANDS subtracted from the base spectrum If the Use Ratio of Live Times box is checked the stripping factor is calculated as the ratio of the live time of the base spectrum divided by the live time of the disk spectrum The factor can be negative in which case the spectra are added NOTE The live times and real times are not altered by any strip operation The peak uncertainty see Chapter 6 Analysis Methods will not include the stripped areas and might not represent the true uncertainty 5 5 Analyze The Analyze menu is shown in Fig 120 It allows you to define Analyze sample report and analysis options analyze spectra on disk and Settings gt analyze all or part of a spectrum in Detector memory The features on this menu including the command for analyzing a spectrum on disk are available only when at least one spectrum window is open therefore recall a disk file or access a Detector Peak Search ROI Report Entire spectrum in memory Spectrum on Disk Display analysis Results 5 5 1 Settings Interactive in viewed area This command opens the submenu shown in Fig 121 which Fig 120 Analyze Menu allows you to define the analysis parameters for different sample types add to and maintain the attenuation correction d
287. or this item the Password for dialog shown in Fig 164 will appear Enter the Password As the password characters are typed in they will not be displayed on the screen instead they will be echoed with asterisks one for each character Repeat the password in the Verification field The two entries must agree Click on OK To leave this dialog without setting or changing a password click on Cancel If there is a password for the menu item a dialog will appear for verifying the old password Fig 165 You cannot change a password without knowing the old password Enter the old password and click on OK If the password just entered is not correct the error message shown in Fig 166 will appear If you do not know the old password click on Cancel to exit without changing the password If the password just entered is correct the Enter New Password dialog Fig 164 will open for entry of the new password 2 fx Set Menu Passwords Settings 4 o Recall Cancel Save Save s Export Import Password Print Compare Exit About ScintiVision Acquire Acquisition Settings Start Start Save Report Stop Clear Copy to Buffer 04 Settings Measure Background Measure Sample Status Control Chart Download Spectra ZDT Display Select MCB Properties Fig 163 Menu Passwords Password for Settings Password Verification Cancel Fig
288. os shown Program Directory in Fig 57 The list is displayed by clicking on the arrow button to the GiammaVision Directory Current Directory right of the Initial Directory field Fig 57 Import Macros File Directory This is the directory selected in the filename selection dialog when the import file is selected e g c user spectrum Program Directory This is the directory for the conversion program It is shown in the first entry of this dialog 53 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 ScintiVision Directory This is the directory where the ScintiVision program is stored Usually this is c Program Files ScintiVision Current Directory This is the current default directory for Windows Default The default extension entered here is used as the extension for the filename in the filename entry dialog For example if TXT is entered then the name list in the entry dialog will be TXT Run Options These three radio buttons Minimized Maximized and Normal Window are used to select the window for the program If the program does not have any user dialogs any option can be selected If the program needs user inputs Normal Window should be selected 5 1 1 4 Directories Use this tab Fig 58 to select the File Settings i x default file directories for libraries calibrations JOB files and other files General Export Import Directories File Types Location C User Context Files CAUserS cx
289. ource Strength for Gammas Sec Becquerels microCuries Peak 1 are filled in the fields for Peak 2 will become active and so on for all peaks in the Heki Sores ie source After this screen is filled in click on Peak 1 561 6 12076 OK If there is more than one source Peak tt2 ScintiVision can use up to five this Peak 3 Calibration Source Information dialog Peak 4 e will be displayed for each one Peak 5 Once all of the source information has been Fig 108 Calibration Source Information entered the Ready to count source dialog Fig 109 will open for beginning the count on the first calibration source Place the source on the Detector and click on OK When the count is finished the PC will beep A dialog will open centered in the first spectrum window In it mark the first peak of the first Place Cs 137 in small bottle on the detector then press OK source at the energy specified earlier for the first Detector Locate the peak in the spectrum Cancel window expand the display to show the peak clearly and mark the peak as an ROI Click on the Fig 109 Count Calibration Source Marked button after the peak is marked Figure 110 shows the Mark Peak dialog The same dialog appears for marking the same peak for the other Detectors This dialog is placed in the window of the spectrum to be marked Click on the Marked button after that peak is marked Continue this sequence until all peaks for the
290. ouse B tton Menu ize o Gadd Rer RE RR 37 4 3 3 Using the Rubber Rectangle 4 oes to Y uae cae Shea Gas eot e ots 37 4 3 4 Sizing and Moving the Full Spectrum View 0200 e eee eee 38 22 Buttons ANd BOXES Grote Re nos qd aa eine DoS Cy ane eee hue oh Pd E 39 Z5 Usine the Ele Dialogs 405 2554 oesaceea X eC RR ERA dadas tds 40 4 5 1 Changing Drive and Pathname 2 0 cece eee 4 2 0 m E f o it rs ates Quos bd ae rA iat dd esie Uys a aie ee dd 4 4 le Dras and Drop A lh dak on et Sonia CPC 42 iii ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 4 8 Associated Files d A be sd e tor e obe ded 5 MENU COMMANDS esee SA Ele aderant O tego BS XN EC uu T 5 1 1 1 Generals Carrara ms 3 1 12 EDO a oce tre reci ede uet Arguments Initial Directory Run Options 2511 3 o 2 ee Eo Eye LoT ena Arguments Initial Directory DeGeneres en Run Options 5 1 1 4 Directories HERE ERES 2 Recall zo pira srt e ho tae Sa 1 3 Save Save AS he Luo a PESCE her AEX DOB bie deoctamd ema uda d donate de 5s MPOLE a A hari eu at e RR RSS US MEAE NINE Epo SRN Got nana ene 1 7 Compare CA Un Ur Una Ur Un Un 1 8 Exit 1 9 About ScintiVision Dido SA
291. ows Notepad and display the analysis report The software will not do another analysis while the report display is shown When you exit Notepad control will return to ScintiVision 134 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 5 3 Spectrum on Disk This starts the analysis of a spectrum ae id l Hx currently stored on disk A dialog box of o EBEN JE spectrum names opens Fig 140 The Ms Demot Spo iglsvDemozacoc analysis starts as soon as the filename is ES VDemotb spc selected The analysis parameters used in ias the analysis are the parameters stored in Somoza the spectrum file The analysis is per NOUS formed in the background generating a Flemme UFO and an RPT file When the analysis is complete a message is displayed on the information line Files of type Spe Files M Cancel Fig 140 Choose a Spectrum File to Analyze If the Program radio button on the Report tab of Analyze Settings Sample Type has been selected with Notepad exe designated as the output program ScintiVision will open Windows Notepad and display the analysis report Close Notepad to end the analysis session and return to ScintiVision 5 5 4 Display Analysis Results This command displays the results of an Recall Analysis Results Filo KE analysis of the complete spectrum by 3 reading the analysis results stored in a UFo file the uFo file selection dialog is shown in Fig 141 This differs from the interactive analysis results in that thi
292. peaks The unknown peak finding sidebar function in Analysis Results display mode cannot find any more unknown peaks in the direction indicated No peaks found The peak search function could not find any valid peaks in the spectrum No ROI found to report The REPORT function could not find any ROIs in range No ROI There To Clear The ROI Clear function DEL key requires at least one channel at the marker with the ROI bit set No segment selected The Detector function could not be performed because no Segment was selected No Start Channel Was Defined The ROI End function was attempted without properly performing the Begin function Not Allowed During Acquisition An execution error micro 135 arising from the Detector indicating that the Detector command is not allowed while acquisition is in progress Not Allowed During Current Mode An execution error arising from the Detector micro 136 indicating that the Detector command attempted is not allowed in the current mode of operation Not enough data points for fit Efficiency calibration fit for specified type requires a minimum number of table entries for that type e g for a polynomial fit six or more points are required Not enough memory STRIP aborted The STRIP function temporarily allocates enough memory to read the file but the allocation failed in this case probably due to insufficient available memory in the system The STRIP function is discon
293. pectrum file windows have no effect on data acquisition taking place in a Detector ScintiVision maintains separate calibrations and viewing settings for each Detector buffer and spectrum file window ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 3 2 Starting ScintiVision To start ScintiVision go mc configuration to the Windows start menu B nuclide Library Editor and click on ScintiVision 32 ZEE Ye winPlots ScintiVision see Fig 4 ScintiVision will check for Detectors then display an opening screen similar to Fig 5 Fig 4 Starting ScintiVision For illustrative purposes this figure does not show an open spectrum window However ScintiVision will attempt to open the last Detector displayed in the previous work session If it cannot find that Detector no windows will open in the spectrum area E ScintiVision Ele Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Libray Services AOI Display Window m ems x tos A eel y Pulse Ht Analysis Start 12 00 00 AM Real Live Fig 5 The ScintiVision Opening Screen 10 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL 3 2 1 Recalling a Spectrum Open svDEMO1 SPC as follows On the Recall Spectrum File 2 Tx Menu Bar click on File then click on Look in Cy User El Al el Recall This will open a dialog showing Cxt SVDencib soe SVDemo2b spc the list of spectrum files in the current Mex Msv0emotospc MSVDemoZo spc di 2 h in Fis 6 F he li Sex Wsvoemot d spc Wb sVdemo2
294. pelling Warning 128 Warning 64 Warning 8 All three of the above messages are the result of Detector Start or Stop warnings and are hardware dependent Warning Buffer was modified When ScintiVision is being closed this message will appear if the buffer spectrum has been modified but not yet saved to disk This gives you the chance to save the buffer Warning File Changes The table editor sensed that modifications were made but you have not saved the file See OK to save changes Warning Library was modified The library was edited or modified for analysis but not yet written to a file See OK to save changes 274 APPENDIX C JOB FILE ERROR MESSAGES Warning Sample Type Defaults changed Sample type defaults have been modified but not yet written to selected file See OK to save changes WinExec Error n Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program refer to Windows SDK documentation for meaning of code n 275 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 276 JANE A Rb PEERS Rb Ed 233 ANU COMCIOENCE v cep PR Sek PG Es 69 84 CEG tt oe ated et say v Sed peser 255 Arguments CON est ris tie rive Rep PEERS AN 48 255 CAPONE o5 eb hy eee td XM Ade S 50 COBanitats isa vec E 23 111 IMPONE gree tue terioa re T E E 52 A andre wiere eee trea e 230 255 ASKON SAVE ita ek STET M es 211 CONT ud cls tie rine yet ts a qct 253 ASK OW Stat Secr E TDCR PS PAPAS 61 211 BEL I t
295. pen the menu Mark unmark Table to show hide ETE the Analysis Results Table Use Print on the results window s control Close AltsF4 menu to print the table as displayed note that this is not the same as the a v Tabl complete report described in Chapter 7 Fig 145 Analysis Sidebar Control When the Analysis Results Table is displayed you can see more details Meni about any peak by double clicking on its listing in the table This opens a Details window as shown in Fig 146 The Details window shows the following peak information derived from the urFo file structure which is described in detail in the ORTEC File Structure Manual Energy The library peak energy in keV or the centroid energy for unknown peaks EnergyUncertainty The uncertainty in the energy of the peak as calculated from the fit Centroid The peak centroid energy from the spectrum Center The peak centroid channel from the spectrum mlo mhi The low and high channel numbers for the peak region These are the beginning and end channel numbers for the background region around a single peak See also multilo hi multilo hi The low and high channel numbers for the multiplet region These are the beginning and end channel numbers for the background region around the entire multiplet All peaks in the multiplet will have the same multilo hi values 138 Fwhm FwhmUncertainty FitHeight Area Background Counts Abundance Uncertainty
296. peration for that type of file For spectra this means the file is loaded into a buffer and displayed Library and PBC files become the working library and PBC files respectively The ROIs saved in an noz file are read and the regions set To drag and drop open ScintiVision and Windows Explorer and display both together on the screen Locate a file in Explorer such as SVDEMO ROI Now click and hold the left mouse button 42 4 DISPLAY FEATURES move the mouse along with the file ghost to the ScintiVision window and release the mouse button The amp oz file will be read and the regions set 4 8 Associated Files When ScintiVision is installed it registers the spectrum files in Windows so they can be opened from Windows Explorer by double clicking on the filename The spectrum files are displayed in WINPLOTS These files are marked with a spectrum icon in the Explorer display The JOB EFT and ENT files are also registered and have an ORTEC icon Z They open in Windows Notepad 4 9 Editing Many of the text entry fields in the ScintiVision dialogs support the Windows Undo editing functions on the right mouse button menu Use these functions to copy Cut text from field to field with ease as well as from program to program Position mer the mouse pointer in the text field and click the right mouse button to open the Pasta menu shown in Fig 49 Select a function from the menu with the left mouse Delete
297. plates Analysis Tab Use this screen Fig 125 to select the Analysis Method options The actual analysis is done by a separate program referred to as an analysis engine The analysis engine for the normal analysis iS GSA Analysis ScintiVision also accommodates user supplied analysis engines The program must be able to read the spectrum name from the command line There are no other restrictions but if the program does not produce a results file in the uro format the display results functions and the ScintiVision Report Writer database will not work All the analysis options can be taken from the spc file The analysis program should also produce an ASCII RPT file so the report can be printed on Windows supported devices In the Analysis section the Decay Limit is used to determine the presence or absence of a nuclide If a spectrum is being analyzed with the decay correction nuclides that have decayed more half lives than the decay limit are marked as absent whether the peaks are found or not The MDA Factor determines the total width of the region to be used to calculate the background variance if the peak is not detected The region high and low limits are 0 5 x MDA Factor x FWHM above and below the peak centroid energy 122 5 MENU COMMANDS The FWHM Variation applies to the initial uncertainty in the peak FWHM values Typically a setting of 50 will allow the peak widths to vary enough to give a good fit If a spectrum ha
298. ple applications before proceeding The convention used in this manual to represent actual keys pressed is to enclose the key label within angle brackets for example F1 For key combinations the key labels are joined by a within the angle brackets for example lt Alt 2 gt xiii INSTALLATION See page 5 for installation and configuration instructions including hardware driver activation network protocol configuration and building the master list of instruments for Scinti Vision 32 If you are installing a new multichannel buffer MCB in addition to ScintiVision 32 or if your MCB and or new ScintiVision 32 is accompanied by a CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update Kit Part No 797230 be sure to follow the installation instructions that accompany the Driver Update Kit with the exception defined in the NOTE on manual page 5 The tutorial begins on page 9 1 INTRODUCTION Welcome to ORTEC s ScintiVision 32 an integrated multichannel analyzer MCA emulator and gamma spectrum analysis program for 32 bit Microsoft Windows operating systems Our advanced MCA emulation and interactive analysis give you complete control over the collection and analysis of scintillator sodium iodide NaI gamma ray spectra Scinti Vision incorporates the latest advances in analytical accuracy with user friendliness and the widest range of tools and corrections available to the spectroscopist These include absorption correction commands that
299. pod ave eee ede eh ERR ER 157 278 Drag and drop coy ast ut oto tre SOR Ea ee 42 DSPEC jr 2 0 AC Selup wed o att eter ica te a 69 amplifier settings 65 67 anticomcldence iv er rer xe xen 69 COINCIDENCE st our xen rindan ves 69 SINE MR ind alae aie Bele em 69 high voltage setup lees 70 live time preset o sug x Rea aH gn x etae 75 low frequency rejector LFR 68 lower level discriminator 69 MDA pr set iu mao acce viter m x alow ave ees 76 OPE Ze bi qu eee ador dpud eave deoa Bad 66 overflow preset st koe oti ple e x etat 75 preamplifier type ends ahora ew 66 real time preset ud sot D va re aha 75 ROI integral preset ooo oo oooo o o 75 ROI peak count preset 75 stabilizer setup i 2v ox p ee x hat 70 uncertainty preset ovre ou ex eran 75 upper level discriminator 69 zero dead time ZDT mode 69 Edit detector llist escote ea 154 Efficiency calibration 93 Enable counter digiBASE 81 Energy calibration colonias aan ea 93 EDetey UTM ds eot afin s 95 Energy 43ble 12 15 bse etin pul ede gx oot ace 95 97 Ellie ue nh xd ed bu ade eh aC Rd 59 Expanded Spectrum View 32 33 Export ASUME ereat eo aa 50 Des het aces O E 50 ond er crm 50 Spectr m oam foresee E S gx dot aic 56 File EXPO ss e 50 IE eis e ER oc Sct et aea det adf f 52 location ext ue
300. pointer in the spectrum display click the right mouse button then use the left mouse button to select from its list of commands 5 10 1 Start This initiates data collection in the selected Detector Any warnings arising from problems detected at the hardware level will appear in a message box or on the Supplemental Information Line at the bottom of the display The Detector can also be started with the lt Alt 1 gt accelerator the Start Acquisition button on the Toolbar or the Start command on the Acquire menu If the Detector is already started or if ScintiVision is in buffer mode this entry is grayed 5 10 2 Stop Stop terminates data collection in the selected Detector The display must be in Detector mode If the Detector is not active the entry is 5 MENU COMMANDS Start Stop Clear Copy to Buffer Zoom In Zoom Out Undo Zoom In Mark ROI Clear ROI Peak Info Input Count Rate Sum MCB Properties Fig 184 Right Mouse Button Menu grayed The Detector can also be stopped with the accelerator lt Alt 2 gt the Stop Acquisition button on the Toolbar and the Stop command on the Acquire menu 5 10 3 Clear Clear erases the Detector spectral data and the descriptors e g real time live time start time for the selected Detector The presets are not altered This function might not operate on some types of Detectors when they are collecting data The data can also be cleared with lt A
301. press Esc If the Detector is acquiring data the values displayed are continuously updated with new values based on the new data See Section 5 4 2 for peak calculation details 5 10 11 Input Count Rate The input count rate feature is supported by a number of our newer digital spectrometers For these units the input count rate can be shown in the upper left corner of the spectrum window This is input count rate and not the number of processed pulses The buffer shows the input count rate when the spectrum was 1 transferred to the buffer from the MCB or 2 saved to disk If the MCB is stopped the value displayed is the current input count rate value and not the value when the MCB was stopped 5 10 12 Sum The Sum function performs its calculation in one of three ways depending on the position of the marker 1 If the marker is not in an ROI and a box is not defined the sum of the data channels of the Detector is shown on the display The complete channel width e g 1 to 16384 is summed 2 If the marker is not in an ROI and a box is defined the sum of the data channels in the box is shown on the display 3 Ifthe marker is in an ROI the sum of the data channels in the ROI is shown on the display This is the same as the gross counts in the Peak Info display but can be used on wider ROIs 5 10 13 MCB Properties This command access the MCB setup dialogs discussed in Section 5 2 10 165 ScintiVision
302. pulse and whose vertical axis represents the number of pulses at that height also referred to as a histogram An important part of ScintiVision emulates an MCA with remarkable power and flexibility when combined with multichannel buffer MCB hardware Detector interface and a PC The MCB performs the actual pulse height analysis while the computer and operating system make available the display facility and data archiving hardware and drivers The ScintiVision software is the vital link that marries these components to provide meaningful access to the MCB via the user interface provided by the computer hardware In this manual Detector capitalized means the transducer high purity germanium sodium iodide silicon surface barrier or others plus all the electronics including the analog to digital converter and histogram memory The transducers are referenced by the complete name e g high purity germanium HPGe detector 2 1 INTRODUCTION The ScintiVision MCA emulation continuously shows the currently acquiring spectra the current operating conditions and the available menus All important operations that need to be performed on a spectrum such as peak location insertion of regions of interest ROIs display scaling and sizing are implemented with both the keyboard accelerators and the mouse menus and toolbars Some menu functions have more than one accelerator so that both new and experienced users will find the system e
303. r ss INODWOTEK ico baccis C ereire bb V EEE ER E lees 7 2 2 Enabling Additional ORTEC Device Drivers ooooooomocooorrmoc ee eee 8 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIALS s cra aces Pesce Gad PP ed KR HRs e RRR OA 9 3 1 Introduction Sepia cue MISC OMEN eue RES Re Rue ene pene 9 3 2 Startins ScIDU VISIO pateo Pee SC EX B pisei ge RE 10 32 1 Recalliis SPECTRA roc tele e NR aoe DER 11 3 2 2 The Simplest Way To Do An Analysis ies ca ca 12 3 2 3 Eoddilp a Librai ys oe vr bee egenos vus s culate Vra e e M uite th wee 14 3 2 4 Setting the Analysis Parameters 20 0 cee cee eee eee 14 3 2 3 Enetgy Calibration 45 vp Ie Bcd A See ah otc PR trs 18 3 2 6 Efficiency Calibration td obo et ebbe eo vica e pedis 21 22 Changing a LADLAT e ss ca cs Mone RUINA tad e ene Ath Ea de 23 S128 Detector CD ute vU DER Sat a ae a ey dq adus 25 3 2 0 CONVE On Galli Lu vua oot Cee NC eRe ey oie as bee Ree wees 26 3 2 8 2 Detectors Set Up Manually is At 26 3 2 8 3 Computer Controlled Hardware Setup 00 000005 26 3 2 8 4 Amplifier Settings oos Sherrard dire ia a 21 Automatic Pole Zero oue visco ropes a aD dr hh 27 Adjusting Amplifier Gain 0 002 eee eee eee 28 4 DISPLAY FEATURES iik os co ESIEDEPX PRG EEX 3 Ads SPECIES 33 2 2 IS Toolbar a tow echo A AA ae Meee A cef one 34 2 3 Usine the Mouse eet ere a a S CR i E 36 4 3 1 Moving the Marker with the Mouse 0 0 00 cece eee eee eee 36 4 3 2 The Right M
304. r the Detector is not calibrated the Library buttons are disabled and shown in gray Y Unknown peaks Library peak list w Library peak matrix v Nuclide abundance Fig 43 Checkboxes The indexing buttons are displayed in two different ways depending on whether ScintiVision is in Detector or buffer mode This is shown in Fig 44 In Detector mode the buttons appear at the bottom of the Status Sidebar In buffer mode the buttons are overlaid where the Presets and indexing buttons are displayed in Detector mode The ROI Peak and Library buttons function the same in both modes In buffer mode the additional features are the ability to insert or delete an ROI with the Ins and Del buttons respectively located between the ROI indexing buttons and to display the peak information for an ROI with the Info button located between the Peak indexing arrows The Library buttons are useful after a peak has been located to advance forward or backward through the library to the next closest library entry Each button click advances to the next library entry and moves the marker to the corresponding energy Instead of using the Peak buttons to index from a previously identified peak position the marker anywhere in the spectrum and click on the Library buttons to locate the entries closest in energy 39 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 to that point If a warning beep sounds it means that all library entries have 1 a been exhaust
305. range points are displayed in red at the lower or upper limits of the graph at the proper horizontal coordinate The out of range points are printed as a question mark To switch between the two display modes click on the menu item to mark it with a checkmark or unmark it Figures 210 through 213 show the screen and printout for a QA data set with Fixed Vertical Scale on then off Compare the location of the points that exceed alarm limits in Figs 210 and 211 to the location of the question marks in Figs 212 and 213 198 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE E ScintiVision Quality Assurance File Scale PlotWariable Detector Options ORTEC 1 DSPEC 075 Standard Sample Activity 9 374E 4 O dod 4 d d d od dod dod d d d d d d 7 28 01 Marker 8 12 01 01 01 AM 6 022E 5 Bq 8 26 01 Fig 210 Control Chart On Screen with Fixed Vertical Scale On ORTEC 9 2 01 10 23 1 DSPEC 075 06 AM 1 094E 5 Standard Sample Activity 1055E 5 Baas 1 016E 5 He s T cs 9 765E44 9374E 4 L1 Ie LL EE LL Ed 0 L1 L1 d i d 7 28 01 Marker 8 12 01 01 01 AM 6 022E 5 Bq 8 26 01 Fig 211 Printout of Control Chart with Fixed Vertical Scale On 199 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 1 ScintiVision Quality Assurance File Scale Plot Variable Detector Options ORTEC 1 DSPEC 075 Standard Sample Activity 6 6236 54 4 822E45 3 021E 5
306. re does a peak search directed report of nuclides found QABACKGROUND This executes the background QA test without displaying prompts or violations QASAMPLE This executes the sample QA test without displaying prompts or violations QUIT This unconditionally terminates the ScintiVision program and returns control to Windows RECALL file chn or file spc This reads a disk filename to the buffer The disk file must be in the format created by SAVE Any DOS filename including the drive and subdirectory can be used The resultant horizontal size of the buffer is the same as the file If the spectrum file has calibration information the calibration parameters in the spectrum file are used to set the calibration for the buffer This command has the same function as Recall under the File menu 229 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 The loop count value can be included in the above filename as in any text by typing three question marks in the text where the loop count is to be inserted The loop count replaces 4 wherever they appear The filename can include any of the variables defined in Section 10 2 RECALL_CALIB file This loads both the energy and efficiency calibration data from the specified file to the calibration data for the selected Detector If the file is a pure calibration file cus then all the information including any energy or efficiency tables are replaced in the selected spectrum data me
307. rectly display and store a mixture of different sizes of spectra Multiple ScintiVision windows can be open at one time displaying Detectors buffers spectrum files from disk and data analyses The larger and higher resolution your monitor the more windows you can comfortably view Expanding the system for more Detectors as well as enabling more than one device on a Model 919 is easy When the system incorporates a Model 920 or OCT TE Plus type MCB the system can also be expanded using the internal multiplexer router In the Model 920 or OCT TE Plus the MCB memory is divided into segments so that each input has an equal share of the MCB memory the size of which matches the conversion gain or maximum channel number of the ADC Note that in the multiple input MCBs like the Model 919 or Model 920 all ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 inputs are treated as different Detectors Therefore all CONNECTIONS software will address one physical 919 unit as four distinct Detectors 2 INSTALLING SCINTIVISION 32 If your ScintiVision 32 CD is accompanied by a CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update Kit P N 797230 follow the installation instructions that accompany the update kit which super sede the instructions below except the following note NOTES If you are installing a new ORTEC MCB in addition to ScintiVision the MCB is bundled with the latest version of our MAESTRO 32 MCA Emulation Software in addition to the CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update Kit
308. resets to be set in the detector ASK_SPECTRUM Asks for the spectrum filename to be used in following SAVE commands ASK_WEIGHT Asks for the sample size and units BEEP lt freq gt lt duration gt Produces an audible sound of lt freq gt Hz lasting lt duration gt milliseconds BEEP ID A numerical ID is given based on a desired system event BEEP String String can be a wav file or any event defined in the Registry CALIBRATE_AUTO This command executes the automatic energy calibration CALIBRATE_EFFICIENCY file eft Performs an efficiency calibration using the active spectrum and the data in file eft CALIBRATE ENERGY file ent Performs an energy calibration using the active spectrum and the data in file ent CALL file job Executes another JOB file as a subroutine CHANGE SAMPLE Provides sample changer hardware handshake CLEAR Clears the data and descriptors in the active Detector DESCRIBE SAMPLE text Enters the text into the sample description to be saved with the spectrum END LOOP see LOOP 213 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 EXPORT filename This command executes the Export function with the filename specified FILL_BUFFER Transfers the data from the active Detector to the buffer IMPORT filename This command executes the Import function with the filename specified LOAD LIBRARY lib mcb Loads a nuclide library LOAD PBC file pbc Loads
309. reviously setup calibration sequence To do this use the dialog shown in Fig 111 to recall a calibration sequence file from the list of previously created calibration sequences Click on OK to execute the learned calibration sequence Place each source on the Detector when Select Auto Calibration File File Look in 3 Scx a symanual cal File name Files of type Auto Calib Files cal Cancel Fig 111 Recall Calibration Sequence prompted to do so and click on the Begin Count button The PC will beep after each count is finished The entire calibration is completed and in place as the working calibration with just a few clicks of the mouse 110 5 MENU COMMANDS 5 3 7 Recall Calibration This command see Fig 112 allows you to recall the calibration fields from the specified cLs file to the working calibration for a single Detector The current working calibration is lost The calibration data can be read from any CLS or sPc file containing the correct records To change the calibration stored in a spectrum file recall the spectrum file its calibration is automatically loaded recall the desired calibration and store the spectrum back to disk Recall Calibration File Lim asx gw Gl ek ez sg SvDemol Spc SvDemo2 Spc File name SvD emo1 Spc Files of type EEE m Cancel Recall Energy Calibration v V Recall Efficiency Calibration Fig 112 Recall
310. rnate name for spectrum files used for analysis when the sPc name is already in use same format as SPC ROE channel pairs created by ROI Save function binary format Miscellaneous Analysis Calibration Library and Text Files CaLibration full energy efficiency calibration Inform style binary format LIBrary nuclide library Inform style binary format 255 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 UFO EFT ENT RPT TXT JOB B 1 4 B 2 1 UnFormatted Output analysis results Inform style binary format EFficiency Table used for efficiency calibration Recall function and created by Save function formatted ASCII text also lines that do not begin with numeric values are ignored ENergy Table used for energy calibration Recall function and created by Save function formatted ASCII text also lines that do not begin with numeric values are ignored RePorT output of ROI Report function ASCII text TeXT general ASCII text files used by File Print et al ASCII text providing commands for Services JOB function QA Database Files Microsoft Access database file extension B 2 Database Tables for ScintiVision QA QA Detectors Detector Table Only one of these tables for entire database one record for each detector being monitored for QA with fields defined as follows Field Name SQL Data Type
311. ro area library and unknown peaks above the cutoff See Peak button below e The within Nuclide buttons move up and down the library list for the selected nuclide in the order the energies are stored in the library Since the library energies are not usually stored in increasing energy order this will jump the marker around in the spectrum This is useful in 140 5 MENU COMMANDS Scinti ision Analysis Results T able File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services RO Display Window ojee se xl 8 Analysis Results Table Iof x A Nuclide Bglll I Show Residuals TENET TEETE Ru lr crt Shift keV zn Co 60 Todo ox Buffer SvDemol Spc within Nuclide Energy QRTEC Marker 357 1 172 02 keV 4423 Cnts 10 44 23 AM Analysis Results ESC or Close Sidebar to Cancel Fi 5 3 02 2 Nuclide Peaks 1 Unknown Peaks Fig 147 Results Interactive in Viewed Area deciding if a nuclide is present or not by looking for all the lines associated with the nuclide Only non zero area peaks are displayed The Energy buttons move the marker up and down through the library peak list in energy order Only non zero area peaks are shown Since Show Residuals the library used for the analysis might not be the same as the working library this could be a different set of peaks than found with the Library buttons on the Status Sidebar The Peak buttons move the marker up and down through all the peaks in the
312. rom Detector to buffer or disk file 5 3 1 2 Performing the Energy Calibration The first step in the calibration is to collect a spectrum of a known source with isolated peaks The spectrum peaks must be well defined with a small Ener statistical uncertainty When the Detector has finished collection i e aa 2 stopped select Calibrate from the menu bar then Energy At this point Ene ScintiVision will expand the active spectrum window and close any inactive TE windows 3 Energies Delete Eneray The Energy Calibration Sidebar Fig 91 will automatically be placed over rl Save the Status Sidebar If you wish you can drag the Calibration Sidebar by its Fi Title Bar to another position Energy C FWHM MT No FWHM Cal NOTE To use the keyboard on the Energy Calibration Sidebar press Tab to move from field to field Linear FWHM Fig 91 If there is no energy calibration or the calibration has been destroyed the box shown in Fig 92 opens If you know the approximate FWHM in channels of a peak near the center of the spectrum enter it in the box Otherwise it is strongly recommended that you mark an ROI on a single AAA isolated peak and click on OK Select a peak in the high energy isolated peak OF enter the high channel number part of the spectrum and be sure to mark pP several channels on either side of the peak to be used as background When the FWHM has been calculated th
313. ror encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Fine gain is at limit of This message appears in the Information Line when an attempt is made to change the MCB gain setting with the keyboard function but while the MCB cannot be decreased or increased any further FWHM Fit Error Exceeds 25 The peaks entered in an energy calibration produced a FWHM fit with an error on at least one peak greater than 25 Hardware failure This message appears as the result of a Detector execution error with micro code 137 indicating a hardware failure High voltage not enabled START was attempted on a MCB while the High Voltage was not enabled Illegal Entry Certain values are not permitted in manual dialog entries or tables Illegal Detector The Detector number for the requested function was not identifiable as part of the active configuration Illegal Segment JOB Error 15 A JOB tried to specify a Segment number which was invalid for the selected Detector or buffer Incorrect Windows Version WinExec error 10 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program 268 APPENDIX C JOB FILE ERROR MESSAGES Insufficient memory System memory has been exhausted Usually this error arises when the buffer cannot be created due to insufficient available memory in the system Sometimes this error can be eliminated by attempting the buffer operation again but this is not recommended due
314. rs total F Do not use a PBC file unless one is specified in the sample defaults d a27 MPCTABLE MPC MPC F off and filename Not used in Scinti Vision T do directed fit Directed Fit Flag T Perform directed fit regardless of sample defaults setting F Do not perform directed fit unless the option is turned on in the sample defaults 253 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 F 1 3 254 T Halt GSA on error Halt GSA on error If false GSA exits in all cases and the error reporting is in the device GVD automatically read by ScintiVision If true GSA displays a dialog indicating an error and you must close it before another analysis can be performed T accept low peaks Keep or reject small peaks with bad peak shape This should be set to true to report peaks in low background systems with few counts Derived peak area char Derived Peak Area Character Character displayed in the unidentified and identified peak summaries Multiplet FWHM limit If two peaks are farther apart than the multiplet FWHM limit FWHM the analysis engine separates the peaks otherwise it is left as a multiplet Adjust peak width and position Allows the peak fit part of the program to adjust width and position of peaks found during the peak search n almost all cases this should be set as true Add peaks in peakfit Allows peak fit part of program to split peaks found in peak search into doublets and add small peaks that might have been missed
315. rtainty 50000 Uncertainty value should be taken from the nuclear data Nuclide Flags l sheet for this nuclide The default is zero but 2 is a Eoo ff realistic number Fast Neutron Activation F Fission Product I The first six Nuclide Flags are used to show how the F Naturally Occuring Isotope N nuclide was produced For example Thermal Neutron Photon dicas ON P Activation T indicates that this nuclide is produced Wu a E No MDA Calculation M when the parent nuclide absorbs a slow neutron This Activity Notin Total la can be helpful in organizing reports by nuclide category More than one flag can be checked Libraries produced Cancel with Nuclide Navigator II or later versions will already have these flags set For other libraries it will be neces Fig 156 Edit or Manually Add Nuclide Name sary to consult a reference for the proper settings The No MDA Calculation flag indicates that the nuclide will not be reported unless present in the spectrum If this is not checked the MDA value will be printed if the nuclide is not present in the spectrum The Activity Not in Total flag indicates that the activity for this nuclide will not be included in the total activity for this sample These flags are listed on the report and saved in the uFo file Manually Adding Nuclides To manually add a nuclide to the library list locate the nuclide immediately below the desired insertion position and click o
316. s value in each Adjustment section Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage pews ey uel ee T Gan Siabizaion Enabled 7 Zero Stabizaion Enabled currently applied The Initialize Center Chan 0 Center Chan 0 buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the warf was value approaches 90 or above the amplifier gain should be adjusted so Suggest Region Suggest Region the stabilizer can continue to function pend nuin when the adjustment value reaches Iriilzo 0 Iriialzo 0 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization Fig 82 digiBASE Stabilizer Tab To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay enabled even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 79 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 High Voltage Figure 83 shows the High Voltage tab whic
317. s analysis considers all of the spectrum and all of the library entries The uro files are created by Analyze Entire Spectrum in a SuDemo2 UFO Memory Analyze Spectrum on Disk Filename MA and Start Save Report Files oftype UoFies y Cancel Run Entire Spectrum in Memory then Fig 141 Open a UFO File select Display analysis results The results of the just created uro file will be displayed immediately Figure 142 shows the display for a typical uFo file along with its spectrum file Note the Analysis Sidebar on the right of the screen The buttons move the marker up and down through the results list library and spectrum simultaneously 135 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 ScintiVision Analysis Results Table Cf x File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window BiB eje 4 000 f aj aD ejeje soe Analysis Results Table i 88 53 32 53 125006 638245 Unknown 122 07 12 13 468591 110440 661 62 46 63 Cs 137 0 0000 911 90 62 26 Unknown gt 1173 24 162 69 74117 44667 Co 60 0 0000 Buffer SvDemol Spc ORTEC 10 08 14 AM Wed 5 1 02 Marker 357 1 172 02 keV 4423 Cnts Analysis Results ESC or Close Sidebar to Cancel Fig 142 Display from UFO File e The within Nuclide buttons move up and down the library list for the selected nuclide in the order the energies are stored in the library Since the library energie
318. s are not allowed while the Detector is actively acquiring Presets not programmed to Detector correctly Usually a failure of the selected Detector to accept the commands from ScintiVision to program presets Often the result of improper configuration or faulty interface Previous analysis did not run to completion Attempt to start an analysis via GSA EXE while a previous analysis has not yet finished or had been aborted abnormally See OK to attempt another instance 212 APPENDIX C JOB FILE ERROR MESSAGES Problem with Buffer JOB Error 2 A JOB error resulting from some problem with a buffer usually indicating insufficient memory to create or enlarge a buffer as needed Problem with Calculation JOB Error 13 A JOB error resulting from a problem with a calculation Problem with RECALL JOB Error 10 The RECALL statement could not be executed in a JOB Problem with REPORT JOB Error 14 The REPORT function could not be exercised in a JOB Problem with SAVE JOB Error 9 The SAVE function could not be executed in a JOB Sample Changer Hardware Failure JOB Error 16 The Sample Changer hardware handshake failed in some way usually the result of too much time before SAMPLE READY is obtained Start Save Report sequence aborted Start Save Report sequence aborted usually by manual intervention but also resulting from certain errors Start Save Report waiting for completion of previous analysis A statu
319. s been well calibrated the FWHM variation can be set to 10 Setting the variation too small will sometimes result in single peaks being fitted as doublets Analysis Options 25 x Sample System Report Analysis Corrections Analysis Method GSA Analysis Add pezen Edit Analysis Decay Limit 0 0000 Max Unknown Peaks po Directed Fit D MDA Factor 2 5300 Library Based Peak Stripping Fwhm Variation 2 fi 0000 r Linear Background Error Limits Auto Critical Level C Energy key Cutoff 10 0000 Cancel Help Fig 125 Analysis Tab For Directed Fit analysis of Nal spectra we recommend that you use as small a library as possible Whenever a directed fit analysis yields a peak with a large negative area run Analyze Display Analysis Results and examine the results See the discussion of directed fit in Section 6 2 2 2 The best type of background to use in a fit varies with the type of spectrum The Linear Background energy is the value at which the background under a peak changes from a curve to a straight line If Auto is selected the program determines the best fit for the background at all energies In the case where a multiplet is spread over a large portion of the spectrum with the peaks overlapping by only a few channels the background should be fitted as a polynomial even if it is very flat If Energy is selected enter the ener
320. s OK if the HV supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 V of specified bias voltage since the last time the SOH was cleared Shutdown State of Health This is OK if the detector shutdown has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Preamplifier overload State of Health This is OK if the preamplifier overload has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Security State of Health This is OK if the security test was passed at the end of the last spectrum acquisition This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Power State of Health This is OK if the power to the DIM was constant during the last spectrum acquisition 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector High Voltage This is the current value of the high voltage bias supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 13 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the time the current spectrum acquisition stopped This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Live detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the current time This is avail
321. s are not usually stored in increasing energy order this will cause the marker to jump about the spectrum This is useful in deciding if a nuclide is present or not by looking for all the lines associated with the nuclide If the selected peak has a zero area it is not displayed e The Energy buttons move the cursor up and down through the library peak list in energy order Only non zero area peaks are shown Since the library used for the analysis might not be the same as the working library this could be a different set of peaks than found with the Library buttons on the Status Sidebar e The Peak buttons move the marker up and down through all the peaks in the spectrum This includes non zero area library peaks and unknown peaks above the peak search sensitivity cutoff 136 5 MENU COMMANDS e The Unknown buttons move the marker up and down through the unknown peaks that satisfy the sensitivity cutoff in energy order skipping over any library peaks e The Multiplet buttons move up and down through the multiplet or deconvoluted regions in the spectrum The multiplet up button goes to the first lowest energy peak of the next higher multiplet Similarly the multiplet down button goes to the last highest energy peak of the next lower multiplet To look at individual peaks in the multiplet use the Peak Energy or Unknown buttons Marking the Show Residuals check box adds a line beneath the spectrum that displays the difference be
322. s message indicating that the Start Save Report sequence has been suspended while waiting for completion of an ongoing analysis Token Error A token error in a JOB meaning that some argument to the command was invalid or out of context Unable to CALL Invalid file name JOB Error 8 A JOB error resulting from a problem with the CALL function usually because the file does not exist Unable to COMPARE files of different sizes The COMPARE function requires compatible files 242 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Unable to cut peak or peak not selected The Library Editor Cut function or Analysis Results Delete library peak function is complaining that it cannot cut or delete a peak from the library for some reason usually because a peak is not selected Unable to open file STRIP aborted The STRIP function is aborted if the file cannot be read Unable to open file for COMPARE The COMPARE function is aborted if the second spectrum cannot be read Unable to Read Specified File JOB Error 3 A file input output error encountered while executing a JOB Unable to RUN non executable program JOB Error 6 The specified program could not be RUN from a JOB Unable to strip Detector memory The stripping function must be performed in the buffer Unknown misspelled Command JOB Error 5 A command in a JOB file could not be executed because it could not be interpreted as a valid command usually a result of miss
323. s not in an ROI and a box is defined the sum of the data channels in the box is shown on the display 3 Ifthe marker is in an ROI the sum of the data channels in the ROI is shown on the display This is the same as the gross counts in the Peak Info display but can be used on wider ROIs 5 4 5 Smooth The Smooth function transforms the data in the buffer spectrum according to a five point area preserving binomial smoothing algorithm That is the existing data is replaced channel by channel with the averaged or smoothed data as follows S O 40 _ 60 40 0 16 10 where S the smoothed data in channel i O the original data in channel i 5 4 6 Strip Strip Spectrum File This function strips the specified disk au BH spectrum from the spectrum in the buffer When Strip is selected the Ma 00020001 Spc Ma 235cs137 spc Ma 312eub00 Cyt fs OOacb Ant Ma 250qcm00 spc Ha 312eul00 dialog box shown in Fig 119 opens Mga Bs O0acb Spc fi 267qcmO00 spe Ki 312qcm00 Stripping Fact Tmpl a 118 spc Ma 2snfind Ant Ma 325cs37a ripping Factor E 00020000 Spc 129 spc Ea 2snfind spe Ka 32505370 NOTE The file must be a valid spectrum data file containing File name the same number of channels Files of type Integer SPC m as the displayed spectrum Stripping Factor Factor by which file data will be multiplied before being subtracted from The Stripping Fact
324. s sec values but will be assigned a Rank number according to its new position Click on the peak just below the desired insertion point in the peak list then click on Paste 5 6 3 4 Saving or Canceling Changes and Closing To save this modified LIB file and use it as the working file click on the control menu then Save Library As Either use the current filename which will overwrite the previous values or assign a new filename then click on Save ScintiVision will assign the default LIB extension To exit the edit session click on the control menu then Close To abandon any changes and restore the LIB file to its condition before editing click on the control menu then Close A dialog will open asking if the changes should be saved select No To duplicate the operation of older versions of ScintiVision mark either no lines or only the first line as a key line 149 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 5 6 4 List The List function prints a list of the library ordered either by Nuclide or Energy to either the printer or a disk file The Services menu Fig 159 contains several functions and utilities 5 7 1 JOB Control Most of the functions under the various ScintiVision menus can be automated by writing a JOB which consists of one or more commands written in ASCII text see Chapter 10 for an in depth 5 7 Services Services Job Control Sample Description Menu Passwords Lock Unlo
325. sed to define the energies of the peaks in the spectrum If incorrect the calculated energies will not correspond to the correct library entry and the peak might be incorrectly identified The shape parameters are used to define the expected shape for a singlet peak If incorrect peaks might be calculated incorrectly yielding poor analysis results An incorrect efficiency calibration can cause the nuclide activity to be incorrectly reported A poor shape calibration can result in a good fit to poor data which will yield a poor efficiency calibration The energy calibration and the efficiency calibration are separated to make it easy to do these calibrations If properly chosen sources and libraries are used the calibration process is simple quick and accurate The Learn Calibration Sequence mode makes repeated calibrations with the same source s simple and will perform both energy and efficiency calibrations together 93 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Figure 90 shows the Calibrate menu The energy and efficiency Calibrate calibration of the spectrum in the Detector are only available if Energy the Detector is not acquiring data If there is no energy calibration chis Vescription all choices except Energy and Recall Calibration are gray If the efficiency calibration exists there is a check mark by the Efficiency command Lower Limit Learn Calibration Sequence Run Calibration Sequence Recall Calibrat
326. sentation of the efficiency outside the fitted region The efficiency energy formula is g 1o dog aslog E a logi E where e efficiency at energy E a fitting coefficients E energy 4 The result of the efficiency calibration calculation is a set of coefficients and a set of energy efficiency pairs These pairs can be used to recalculate the efficiency and to display the efficiency plot 5 3 2 2 Performing the Efficiency Calibration To efficiency calibrate the system Collect an energy calibrated spectrum of the known standard for a time sufficient to get well formed peaks with small uncertainty The certificate supplied with the source will have the energies gammas second nuclide names and measurement date needed in the calibration Expand the spectrum horizontally to show the peaks completely Select Calibrate Efficiency from the menu This will display the Efficiency Calibration Table and Graph and the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar shown in Fig 98 As noted above if the Efficiency item is gray the system must first be energy calibrated Choose a spectrum peak listed in the source data sheet Put the marker on the center of the peak this selects the peak Click on the Calc button on the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar This will open the Efficiency Calc Worksheet dialog for entering the data about the peak Fig 99 The peak area and count rate are calculated in the same manner as in
327. ses the horizontal scale of the Expanded Spectrum View so the peaks appear wider while the lt gt key decreases the horizontal scale making the peaks look narrower The horizontal and vertical scale values are displayed on the Toolbar These functions are duplicated by lt F7 gt lt F8 gt 9 4 Function Keys 9 4 1 ROI lt F2 gt The lt F2 gt key switches the ROI marker status among the Mark UnMark and Off conditions so you can use the marker to set or clear the ROI bits for particular channels or groups of channels or return the marker to normal usage The current ROI marking status Marking Unmarking is shown in at the extreme right of the Menu Bar Off mode is shown as blank ROI bits are changed by using the keyboard to move the marker to a channel as follows e Mark The channel is marked set as an ROI with the marker e UnMark The channel is removed from the ROI reset with the marker e Off The ROI status is unchanged with the marker 208 9 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS 9 4 2 ZDT Normal lt F3 gt For the DSPEC Plus in ZDT mode the lt F3 gt key switches between the normal LTC or uncertainty ERR spectrum and the ZDT corrected spectrum It duplicates the Acquire ZDT Display Select command 9 4 3 ZDT Compare lt Shift F3 gt For instruments that support ZDT in Compare mode this accelerator switches the compare spectrum between the ZDT spectrum and its accompanying LTC or ERR spectrum Used in combination wi
328. sis of the currently Display analysis Results displayed spectrum In routine use these would not be changed except for the Sample Description The entry of Sample Weight and Sample Description can be automated using the Acquisition Settings command under the Acquire menu Interactive in viewed area Fig 12 Selecting the Sample Type Command The Nuclide Library is the one just loaded in computer memory The Calibration is the calibration in computer memory in this case the calibration that was stored in SvDemo1 Spc and recalled along with the spectrum Select the Report tab to view the output options Fig 14 To send the output to a printer as well as a file go to the Output section of the screen and click on the Printer radio button to mark it with a dot 14 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL To send the output to a file only click on the File radio button and leave the asterisk as the filename To send the output to a text processing program such as Windows Notepad which is the default click on the Program radio button Click on all four checkboxes in the Reporting Options section of the screen then click on OK Select Analyze and Entire spectrum in memory to start the analysis Once the hourglass has disappeared from the screen you can continue with other system operations while the analysis runs to completion The computer will beep when the analysis is complete Spectra can be analyzed in a
329. spectrum This includes non zero area library peaks and unknown peaks above the cut off The Unknown buttons move the marker up and down through the unknown peaks that satisfy the sensitivity cutoff in energy order skipping over any library peaks Fig 148 Analysis Display Sidebar 141 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 e The Multiplet buttons move up and down through the multiplet or deconvoluted regions in the spectrum The next time the multiplet up button is clicked the marker goes to the first lowest energy peak of the next higher multiplet The next down button goes to the last highest energy peak of the next lower multiplet To look at individual peaks in the multiplet use the Peak Energy or Unknown buttons Use the Analysis Sidebar s control menu the same type of menu as shown in Fig 145 to show hide the Analysis Results Table and the results window s control menu to print the table To add a peak to the analysis library position the marker at the desired location and click on Add This adds a temporary nuclide to the library assigned the name Analyze in the results table with a peak at this energy A new analysis starts immediately and the new results are displayed More peaks can be added as needed To delete a peak click on the peak energy in the Analysis Results List The marker jumps to this channel in the spectrum Click on Delete to delete the peak A new analysis starts immediately and the new resu
330. t Analysis Start 9 45 21 AM 5 7 98 Real 509 70 Live 300 00 Dead 41 14 Z ROI J a Peak 5 Info tl Library ORTEC 2 43 29 PM Mon 5 13 02 Marker 1 596 1 320 94 keV Best library match Co 60 Cobalt at 1332 50 0 00 Bq 14 Gross Area 115792 Net Area 41364 2781 P Fig 32 Spectrum with Co 1 Start data collection by clicking on the Start Toolbar button or by selecting Acquire Start from the Menu Bar 2 Select Acquire MCB Properties and click on the Amplifier tab Fig 30 28 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL 3 Select the Coarse Gain setting from the droplist then move the slider to the fine gain desired The spectrum display is not continuously updated while the Properties dialog is open but you can force an immediate spectrum update by moving the control dialog over the spectrum window releasing it then moving it away so the spectrum will redraw 4 Once the gain is approximately correct click on Close to close the control dialog then use Alt gt and Alt to make fine gain adjustments until the peak is in the desired channel To make coarser gain adjustments use Alt Shift gt and Alt Shift gt These keyboard commands are discussed in Chapter 9 ScintiVision will retain all of these settings and adjustments on exit and will reload them from the MCB on restart You are now ready to acquire spectral data cal
331. t Real Time Live Time is all detector signals are processed a E When the Gate is set to Enable if the ENABLE INPUT is low lt 0 8V real time live time and data acquisition are stopped When the ENABLE INPUT is left open or forced high gt 2 0V real time live time and data acquisition are enabled Fig 81 digiBASE ADC Tab If set to Coincidence when the ENABLE INPUT is low real time and live time operate normally but no counts are stored in memory If the ENABLE INPUT is high normal acquisition occurs If set to Event rising edges are counted by a 32 bit event counter The contents of this counter can be monitored in the Enable Counter field on the Status tab Section 5 2 10 2 The input impedance is 5 kQ to 3 3V protected to 10 V The digiBASE operates at a Conversion Gain of 1024 only The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for storage 78 5 MENU COMMANDS Stabilizer The digiBASE has both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabilizer their operation is discussed in more detail in Sections 5 2 10 4 and 5 2 10 5 The Stabilizer tab Fig 82 shows the current values for the stabilizers The REGE Status assi
332. t part of the Toolbar is a droplist of the available 106 DART Portable unit2 v Detectors Fig 36 To select a Detector or the buffer click in the Buffer field or on the down arrow beside it to open the list then click on eure Hae are the desired entry The sidebar will register your selection 03 RKE 919E Input 2 05 SINGLEY DSPEC 106 DART Portable unit 2 Finally note that as you pause the mouse pointer over the center of a Toolbar button a pop up tool tip box opens describing the button s Fig 36 Drop Down function Fig 37 Detector List 4 3 Using the Mouse The mouse can be used to access the menus Toolbar and sidebars adjust Blais gl spectrum scaling mark and unmark peaks and ROIs select Detectors work in the dialogs every function in ScintiVision except text entry For most people this might be more efficient than using the keyboard The following Fig 37 Tool Tip sections describe specialized mouse functions 4 3 1 Moving the Marker with the Mouse To position the marker with the mouse move the pointer to the desired channel in the Expanded Spectrum View and click the left mouse button once This will move the marker to the mouse position Click in the Full Spectrum View to move the expanded view to that place This is generally a much easier way to move the marker around in the spectrum than using the arrow keys and accelerators although you might prefer to mix mouse and keyboard commands 36
333. t peak count preset can be used on another peak The coarse and fine gains should be set to the desired values both stabilizers initialized and the pole zero triggered before setting either stabilization peak For example on the 92X this is done with the Acquire MCB Properties dialog on the Model 919 it is done externally The Initialize dialog button sets the gain on the stabilization amplifier to its midpoint that is halfway between minimum gain and maximum gain This should be done before selecting the ROI for the peak because the initialization might move the peak in the spectrum and because it ensures that the maximum range is available for the stabilization process If the peak is moved by this command use the amplifier fine gain control Alt gt or Alt gt to move the peak to the desired channel When starting a new system the zero initialize command should also be given before starting the gain stabilization The Suggest button is used to set the peak center and peak width of the peak area used by the stabilizer Before selecting this command the ROI must be marked and the marker put in the region to be used When operating the peak will be centered in the ROI After the region has been recorded the stabilization is turned on If the stabilization 1s turned on when this command is executed the old stabilization region is replaced by the new peak defined by the marker and stabilization continues using the new peak
334. t rate and include the nuclide half life and peak yields in the Library Peak Usage section F Print net peak count rate for unknown peaks instead of efficiency corrected peak area and omit the nuclide half life and peak yields in the Library Peak Usage section 15 of pks eng recal high 5 default Not used in Scinti Vision 0 of pks eng recal low Not used in ScintiVision 252 0 0 1 0 2 0 60 09 APPENDIX A STARTUP recal energy dividing Not used in Scinti Vision scaling factor on activity Additional Scaling Factor Scaling factor multiplied times nuclide activity in addition to the Mulitiplier Divisor and Weight values specified in the sv file range multiplier Range multiplier for listing suspect nuclides in the unknown peak table For peaks listed in the unknown peak table the suspect nuclide in the unknown peak table is determined by choosing the closest energy match to the unknown peak that is within the Range Multiplier FWHM of each peak Page length Page length in lines of analysis report F erase uFO file Save UFO File Flag T Do not delete uro file after analysis is complete F Erase uFo file after analysis is complete T MDA type T Allow change Not used in ScintiVision PBCTEST PBC PBC F off and filename PBC Flag T Use the PBC file specified here unless a different PBC file is given in the sample defaults The file must include the full path and is limited to 32 characte
335. t the nuclide and display its peak list on the right 145 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 LibO Lib 24x Editing SVdemo lib lx Creation 4 13 88 10 58 04 4M Edition 5 10 99 2 42 22 PM NE J 134 Li Na22 Rb88 J135 H Xe 131M T Xe 133M wy CoS e135 A E550 Xe 138 K 42 Nb94 Cs 134 Cs 137 Cesium Half Life 30 1 Yrs Uncertainty 5 0000 Sc 45 Nb 95 Cs 135 Cr 51 Mo 99 Cs137 Mn 54 Te 39M Cs 138 Mn 56 Ru l03 La 140 Fe 59 Abh 106M Ba 140 Co56 4g 108 Ba 139 Co57 Ag110M Ce 139 Co58 Cd109 Ce 141 Co60 Sn113 Ce 143 Cub4 Sb 122 Ce 144 n65 Sb124 Pr 144 s76 Sb125 Nd 147 5e75 Sb125 Eu152 mUuzzcocu O rmmsccoonomu IrI Br82 Te 131 Eu 154 Kr85M Te 132 Eu 155 K 87 J431 Gd153 Insert Cut Kr88 J 132 Tb 160 EST E J 133 Yb 175 SEAL Aste RS ce 661 62 4620E Peaks Peak Flags Inm ls Fig 153 The Master Library left and Library Editing Dialog right Double clicking on a nuclide in the master library will add it to the working library inserting it immediately above the currently highlighted nuclide in the list 5 6 3 2 Creating a New Library Manually Open the control menu and click on New This will clear the Editing dialog so nuclides can be entered manually Click on the Insert button to open the Insert Library Nuclide dialog shown in Fig 154 Enter the Nuclide Nam
336. ted on the printer by this command REPORT PRN 220 10 JOB FILES This gives a list of the peak areas and count rates for the marked peak If the library LIB mcB has a peak near this energy then the peak identity will also be printed The set of instructions as written so far will only collect and report once There are two ways to make the process repeat itself for a series of samples The first and hardest is to write one set of the above instructions for every sample in the series A much more efficient way is to use the LOOP command To use this put LOOP before CLEAR and END_LOOP after REPORT The whole gos file now looks like this SET DETECTOR 1 SET PRESET CLEAR SET PRESET LIVE 1000 LOOP 10 CLEAR START WAIT 2 WAIT FILL BUFFER SET DETECTOR 0 RECALL ROI DECAYPK ROI REPORT PRN SET DETECTOR 1 END LOOP Note that an additional SET DETECTOR 1 has been inserted after REPORT so the loop will operate on the desired Detector Now select Services Job Control Click once on an existing JOB filename then click the Edit File button This will display the contents of that file in Windows Notepad You can then overwrite the existing instructions with the above set of commands However save the new instructions to a new file named SAMPDATA JOB using the File Save As function do not use Save or the original file will be lost This new JOB file can then be executed in ScintiVision from the Services
337. ted peak search delivers lower detection limits than can be achieved by unguided peak searches This method is ideally suited for the determination of low level and ultra low level samples where statistics might be poor for a specified list of contaminants The interactive re analysis mode lets you repeatedly re fit the spectrum while monitoring the fit residuals This is invaluable for highly complex spectral analyses such as certain neutron activation and reactor coolant spectra A directed fit option lets you report negative activity values if calculated as required for some effluent analysis requirements After analysis evaluate the results using the flexible easy to read ScintiVision report or a variety of informative onscreen graphing routines For custom configured reports we offer the optional ScintiVision Report Writer A46 B32 which uses an Access format database and Seagate Crystal Reports ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Regulatory compliance is easy with ScintiVision The software s quality assurance QA features monitor system performance and store the results in an Access database All hardware and analysis parameters are saved with the spectral data to ensure traceability ScintiVision s extensive menus and toolbar let you operate all aspects of data acquisition and analysis including calibration library editing computer controlled hardware setup and analysis parameter setup as well as numerous onscreen data
338. tem dead time This corrected time value known as the live time is then used to determine the net peak count rates necessary to determine nuclide activities As an example consider the case where the spectrometry amplifier and ADC are 60 dead during the acquisition the elapsed real time will be Live Time Real Time 1 0 60 7 Live Time x 100 100 Dead Time 87 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 If the N counts in the gamma ray peak in the spectrum are divided by the elapsed live time the resulting counting rate N Live Time is now corrected for dead time losses The standard deviation in that counting rate is y N Live Time Unfortunately extending the counting time to make up for losses due to system busy results in an incorrect result if the gamma ray flux is changing as a function of time If an isotope with a very short half life is placed in front of the detector the spectrometer might start out with a very high dead time but the isotope will decay during the count and the dead time will be zero by the end of the count If the spectrometer extends the counting time to make up for the lost counts it will no longer be counting the same source as when the losses occurred As a result the number of counts in the peak will not be correct When a DSPEC Pro or other supported ORTEC MCB operates in ZDT mode it adjusts for the dead time losses by taking very short acquisitions and applying a correction in real time
339. th F3 or Acquire ZDT Display Select it allows you to display the normal to ZDT uncertainty to ZDT ZDT to normal or ZDT to uncertainty comparisons 9 4 4 Detector Buffer lt F4 gt The lt F4 gt key switches between the display of the data in the Detector and the data in the buffer It duplicates the function of lt Alt 6 gt and Display Detector Buffer see Section 9 3 5 9 4 5 Taller Shorter lt F5 gt lt F6 gt These keys decrease or increase the vertical full scale of the displayed spectrum so the peaks appear taller or shorter respectively They duplicate the function of the 1 and 1 keys The vertical scale value is always shown on the Toolbar 9 4 6 Narrower Wider lt F7 gt lt F8 gt These keys increase or decrease the horizontal scale of the data display so the peaks appear narrower or wider respectively They duplicate the function of lt gt and lt gt keys The horizontal scale value is always shown on the Toolbar 9 4 7 Select Detector Ctrl F1 gt through Ctrl F12 gt These keys display the spectrum for the specified Detector n where n 1 to 12 corresponding to lt Ctrl Fn in the order that the Detectors are defined in the Detector pick list see Section 5 9 1 The selected Detector name or the buffer 1s shown on the Toolbar These keys duplicate the function of the Detector pick list on the Toolbar and the Detector dialog under the Display menu However you should be aware
340. the background under the peaks is declining faster than the background above the peaks a step is inserted at the centroid of each peak see Fig 186 Fig 186 Stepped Background The total height of the steps is equal to the difference between the background above and below the peak area The steps are smoothed over the width of the peak and the height of each step is proportional to the height of the peak 171 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Polynomial backgrounds In low energy regions the background is best represented by a polynomial To obtain the best background fit in non peak regions the fitted peaks are subtracted from the spectrum before the background fit is performed If this is not the first time the region has been fitted a weighted least squares fit is used with data below the current background level weighted more heavily than data above the current background This gives a better estimate of the background in the presence of peaks Coefficients are calculated for linear quadratic and cubic fits and the polynomial that gives the smallest value of y is returned Sparse peak regions If the peaks in a multiplet overlap by only a few channels the background is fitted as a polynomial It is also appropriate to fit small peaks at low energies with a polynomial background At high energies if this is a refit points with a background above the array value are weighted more heavily than points with background belo
341. the variance of the measurement can be determined by summing the counts in channels 1000 to 1100 in the error spectrum Or shown another way the counts in channel i can be expressed as N i y V i with a 1 sigma confidence limit where N is the corrected spectral data and V is the variance error spectral data The live time is set to the real time within the analysis engine during the analysis of ZDT spectra Table 1 shows which spectra are collected in the three possible ZDT modes Table 1 ZDT Modes Mode Uncorrected ZDT Corrected ZDT Error Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum Off ZDT Disabled Yes No No NORM_CORR ZDT LTC Mode Yes Yes No CORR ERR ZDT ERR Mode No Yes Yes 89 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Choosing a ZDT Mode When the counting rate is essentially constant during the time required to acquire the spectrum the standard mode ZDT Off is the preferred mode only the uncorrected spectrum is collected and stored in the spectrum file But if the counting rate varies significantly during the measurement time the standard mode will not yield the proper dead time corrected counting rate This can be most easily understood by noting that the uncorrected mode compensates for dead time losses by extending the real counting time Hence a sample containing both a short lived high activity isotope and a long lifetime lower activity isotope will experience very high dead time losses during the first few seconds of the measurem
342. ther method can be used in simple cases however if you expect to use the materials entered here in creating absorber files for compounds Mass must be used 2 On the sidebar click on Add to open the Absorber Definition dialog 3 In the Name field enter the chemical symbol for the element or substance name for example Co 4 Inthe Constituent section enter Co and an Amount of 1 0 then click on OK to close the dialog and return to the sidebar 5 Now in the Attenuation section of the sidebar Fig 130 enter Altanuation the energy attenuation pairs for as many energies as necessary C Linear 2 718 cm 2 c to obtain a good attenuation function When entering the X ray Mass edge use energy values that are close but not equal e g E 512 1 13 420 and 13 421 keV Enter 6 Click on the Save button at the bottom of the sidebar to store the Fig 130 Adding a New table Constituent to the Database 7 Next enter the mass or density as shown in the Absorber section at the top of the sidebar Fig 127 and click on Calculate 8 Click on Save again to store the complete record in the database 5 5 1 3 Peak Background Correction The Peak Background Correction submenu is shown in Fig 131 Use Select PBC these commands to load a new working PBC file and to create or edit Edit PBC PBC files The PBC files are organized by nuclide then by peaks for Fig 131 PBC each nuclide Menu 129 ScintiVision
343. time preset to t seconds SET PRESET UNCERTAINTY lt limit gt lt low chan high chan Sets the statistical preset to the uncertainty based on the counts in the region between the low and high channels Not valid on all MCBs SMOOTH Smooths the spectrum in the buffer START Starts the selected Detector START OPTIMIZE Starts the optimize function for the Detector for DSPEC only 216 10 JOB FILES START PZ Starts the PZ function for the Detector It is automatically included in the optimize function STOP Stops the selected Detector STOP PZ Stops the PZ function for the detector STRIP lt factor gt file Strips a spectrum file from the buffer UNLOCK Pwd This command unlocks the current Detector using Pwd as the password VIEW i This command moves the 66599 1 th stored spectrum to position 0 WAIT lt seconds gt Waits a fixed number of seconds or until the active detector stops counting if no seconds specified WAIT program Waits until the named program e g started by the RUN command stops execution WAIT_AUTO Waits until the optimize function is complete for DSPEC only WAIT_CHANGER Waits until the sample ready signal on the rear panel is present WAIT_PZ Waits until the PZ function is complete WAIT_QA This command waits until QA is complete WAIT_SERIAL This command is used to control serial devices such as sample changers 217 S
344. tinued Not enough memory for COMPARE The COMPARE mode could not be executed due to insufficient memory for the second spectrum 271 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 OK to overwrite A file output function discovered that the specified filename already exists and will only overwrite the file after you confirm that it should be overwritten See also File already exists OK to save changes You are being prompted to allow the system to save a modified library file table file or sample type defaults file etc OK to use it anyway A new configuration was applied but failed due to some conflict with the Detectors physically present it is possible to use the configuration anyway by answering Yes to this query OS 2 Application WinExec error 12 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Out of Memory WinExec error 0 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Path Not Found WinExec error 3 Error encountered trying to spawn GSA EXE or some other application program Peak rejected for asymmetry Peak statistics could not be obtained for the function due the calculated non Gaussian asymmetry of the obtained peak Preset already reached Acquisition START was attempted on a Detector or Segment which had already satisfied the preset condition s in some way Presets can t be changed during acquisition Changes in the preset condition
345. tion Live Time in Seconds CountRate SQL REAL Background CPS only for Background measurement Activity SOL REAL Total Activity PeakShift SQL REAL Average Peak Shift FWHMRatio SQL REAL Average FWHM Ratio B 2 4 P dmmmm Peaks Table s Where d is the detector number in decimal mmmwm is the measurement number to 4 places There is one of these tables for each measurement in the table above but only if the output of actual centroid energies is enabled Field Name SOL Data Type Description PeakNumber SQL INTEGER Peak No counter Primary key Measurement SQL INTEGER PeakFlags SOL INTEGER Analysis Results Flags Nuclide SQL CHAR 8 Library Nuclide Name this peak belongs to Energy SQL REAL Library Energy Centroid SQL REAL Actual Centroid Energy CalFWHM SQL REAL Expected Calibrated FWHM at this energy FWHM SQL REAL Actual FWHM Area SOL REAL Net counts in peak Background SOL REAL Background counts B 3 Program Examples The following examples show how to read cHN data files and ROI region of interest files These are simple program segments to illustrate the programming details needed B 3 1 FORTRAN Language This section contains two routines one to access the CHN files and one to access the or files 258 APPENDIX B FILE FORMATS B 3 1 1 CHN Files C This program prints the header data from a ScintiVision data file C and the contents of a channel C INTEGER 2 TYPE MCA SEG STRTCH LNGTDT SPCOUI
346. tor is warm or you have chosen the wrong shutdown mode Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage 70 The shutdown can be ORTEC TTL or SMART The ORTEC mode is used for all ORTEC detectors except SMART 1 detectors Use the SMART option for those detectors Check with the detector manufacturer for other detectors The TTL mode is used for most non ORTEC detectors The high voltage in the DSPEC jr 2 0 is supplied by the SMART 1 module or in a separate DIM The recommended HV for SMART 1 is displayed on the dialog For other detectors see the detector manual or data sheet for the 5 MENU COMMANDS Properties for RANDT266 MCB 132 a x Amplifier Ampliier2 AmplifierPRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset Target 0 Volts Of Actual 0 Volts r Shutdown al TTL Sodium lodide Detector Off Overload Fig 74 DSPEC jr 2 0 High Voltage Tab correct voltage The polarity is determined by the DIM or SMART 1 module To use a Sodium Iodide Detector mark the checkbox This changes the gain and zero stabilizers to operate in a faster mode For the DIM 296 the HV is controlled by the adjustment in the Model 296 and not here About This tab Fig 75 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected DSPEC jr 2 0 as well as
347. trometers operate well above the peak of the throughput curve Operating there allows these instruments to handle an even higher rate of 9 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 00 o I Throughput cps thousands E 22 1 5 9 15 20 30 50 75 95 105 120 130 140 Count Rate kcps Fig 89 An Example of the Tradeoff Between Throughput and Count Rate incoming counts but with less data into memory and therefore longer counting time to the same detection limit It is possible to move the peak of the curve to the right more counts to memory with higher input count rate by reducing the pulse rise and fall time thereby trading off resolution for maximum count rate Table 2 is a guide to choosing a count rate that will ensure that the most efficient operation of your digital spectrometer over the range of anticipated input count rates for your application that 1s at or below the throughput peak while achieving the best resolution obtainable from the detector consistent with that requirement Enter the rise time that best matches your dynamic range of count rate note that the available rise time settings will vary by instrument this chart is a general guide only 92 Table 2 Rise Time Selection Guide Input Count Rate Maximum Dynamic Range Throughput us 59 us 8 ome 359 34 ow 37000 24 16 EE ON 06 ess 100000 oa oo 120000 02 2 4 2 4 1 6 0 4 0 2
348. tton menu If the Detector is already started or if ScintiVision is in buffer mode this entry is grayed 5 2 3 Start Save Report This function performs all three functions without user intervention The Start is the same as the Start above Save is the same as File Save using the filename in the Acquire Acquisition Settings dialog and Report is the same as Analyze Entire spectrum in memory 5 2 4 Stop Stop terminates data collection in the selected Detector The display must be in Detector mode If the Detector is not active the entry is grayed The Detector can also be stopped with the accelerator lt Alt 2 the Stop Acquisition button on the Toolbar and the Stop command on the right mouse button menu 5 2 5 Clear Clear erases the Detector spectral data and the descriptors e g real time live time start time for the selected Detector The presets are not altered This function might not operate on some types of Detectors when they are collecting data The data can also be cleared with lt Alt 3 gt the Clear Spectrum button on the Toolbar or the Clear command on the right mouse button menu 5 2 6 Copy to Buffer The Copy to Buffer function transfers the data and descriptors e g live time real time from the selected Detector to a buffer window This function can also be performed with Alt 5 gt or the Copy to Buffer command on the right mouse button menu 5 2 7 QA This is explained in Chapter 8
349. tween the actual spectrum and the calculated spectrum based on the analysis and the calibration peak shape An example marked with an arrow is shown in Fig 143 5 ScintiVision Buffer SvDemol Spc File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window EC s z Pulse Ht Analysis B Analysis Results Table M Energy FWHM Ara Background Nucide Bg 5 7 98 88 53 32 53 125006 638245 Unknown 122 07 12 13 468591 110440 Co 57 0 0000 Real 503 54 661 62 46 63 230138 67267 Cs 137 0 0000 Live 300 00 911 90 62 26 3822 72365 Unknown gt Dead 4112 amp AAA 74117 44667 Co 60 0 0000 1332 50 71 05 71370 35486 Co 60 0 0000 Anal EG r1 L Iv Show Residuals lt t Buffer SvDemol Spc 9 DRTEC 10 22 27 AM Wed 5 1 02 Marker 357 1 172 02 keV 4423 Cnts Analysis Results ESC or Close Sidebar to Cancel Fig 143 Spectrum Residuals Display arrow 137 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Figure 144 shows the Analysis Results Table window a TT Results Table FWHM e 53 32 53 125006 638245 eie i 122 07 12 13 468591 110440 Co 57 0 0000 661 62 46 63 230138 67267 Cs 137 0 0000 TETI 30 62 26 3822 172365 lt Unknown gt 73 24 FIND 74117 44667 Co 60 i 0000 EEE 50 71370 35486 0000 Fig 144 Analysis Results Table The Analysis Sidebar s control menu is shown in Fig 145 click the rs Analysis Al EA sidebar s icon to o
350. use 1 maximize full screen 238 10 JOB FILES ZOOM x y w h Changes the position and size of the Scinti Vision window The arguments are x position of upper left corner of window 0 is left y position of upper left corner of window 0 is top width of window in pixels starting at x and going right height in pixels starting at y and going down met x Since these arguments are in pixels experimentation is the best way to determine the desired size 239 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 240 11 UTILITIES 11 1 WINPLOTS This program makes a hardcopy output of any type of ORTEC spectrum file in a fixed format with many user set optional variations such as grid lines available The plotting output devices include the full range of graphics capable printing devices supported by Windows 1 e hardcopy is not limited only to plotters WINPLOTS allows you to select and set up the printer In the interactive mode a preview of the spectrum plot is automatically displayed on the screen and updated as changes are made to the display parameters You can select the start and stop channels or energy range for the plot the printer to be used whether the plot will be in logarithm mode or linear mode and whether to specify the scale maximum in linear mode or use automatic scaling If a color printer is used the colors of the different parts of the plot can be selected The sample detector and acquisition descriptio
351. ve As Creation Edition Description Presets Decay Correction Analysis Range A From 10 To e000 Collection date 04May2002 time 12 05 52 Background Type iP C3PR C 5PR During Acquisition Nuclide Library Calibration Internal v Internal v jg Browse Browse Cancel Help Fig 122 The Sample Tab The Description is used to identify the sample type file and can be 64 characters long Mark the check boxes in the Decay Correction section to enable or disable decay correction During Acquisition and decay correction to a given date and time Both of these affect the report of the analysis of the total spectrum The Collection date and time can also be entered under Acquire Acquisition Settings Clicking on the Presets button opens the Presets dialog for the selected Detector see the Detector s corresponding entry in Section 5 2 10 or the ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual so you can enter the values to be used as defaults in the Acquire Acquisition Settings dialog Remember that these presets are used as the defaults if the appropriate Ask on Start box is checked under Acquire Acquisition Settings see Section 5 2 1 for more information 118 5 MENU COMMANDS The Analysis Range in channels can be entered This is usually used to eliminate analysis of the ends of the spectrum that do not contain usefu
352. w the array value In the example shown below the background is a parabola B 169 242 1 87175 x C C 0 002288748 x C C yan 18 where B background in channel C C channel C start channel 111 Start The constant values are calculated by the program based on the fit to the spectrum data 6 2 2 The Peak Fit Before the peaks are fitted the background is subtracted from the spectrum The error in the peak fit can be represented by Ne Fpi bY po ern 19 i Min Wi where F is the spectrum data at channel i b i is the fit to the background p i is the fit to the peak and w is the weight The sum is over the entire fitting region The peaks are represented by Gaussians so 172 6 ANALYSIS METHODS Y x x 26 2 p ce P S 20 j 1 where N is the number of peaks in the multiplet The best values of the constant c position x and FWHM 2 530 of each peak are those that minimize X The uncertainties of the constant position and FWHM are also calculated Starting with the values found in the peak search the background and peak fit is repeated at most three times If the region has been fitted to the noise level the fit is saved Otherwise peaks are added or removed at the channel with the largest residual 6 2 2 1 Adding and Removing Peaks The channel with the largest residual value is found and if the residual is positive and if adding a peak improves the fit a peak will be ad
353. what as extra processing must be done on the spectrum therefore if the gamma ray flux is not changing as a function of time but absolute highest throughput is desirable you may wish to store only the LTC spectrum in the MCB memory U S Patent 6 327 549 88 5 MENU COMMANDS NORM_CORR ZDT and Uncorrected Spectra Stored When the ZDT mode is set to NORM_CORR the two spectra stored are the LTC spectrum and the ZDT spectrum corrected for the dead time losses real time only Unfortunately in the analysis of the ZDT spectrum the uncertainty of the measurement cannot be determined using either spectrum NOTE This mode is not useful for quantitative analysis if the counting rate varies significantly during the measurement time particularly if the user desires an accurate counting rate and standard deviation calculation When you select the NORM_CORR mode GammaVision ignores the ZDT spectrum and analyzes the LTC spectrum as it would for the Off ZDT mode CORR_ERR ZDT and Error Spectra Stored In the CORR_ERR mode the estimation of the statistical uncertainty is stored in place of the LTC spectrum and is referred to as the error spectrum ERR In this mode the ZDT spectrum is used to measure the counts in a peak and the error spectrum is used to determine the uncertainty of the measurement made in the corrected spectrum For example if the area of a peak is measured in the corrected spectrum by summing channels 1000 to 1100
354. will default to analyzing the LTC spectrum and will ignore the ZDT spectrum More Information Visit our website or contact your ORTEC representative for more detailed information Application note AN56 Loss Free Counting with Uncertainty Analysis Using ORTEC s Innovative Zero Dead Time Technique http www ortec online com pdf an56 paf e General gamma spectroscopy technical papers http www ortec online com papers reprints htm General 5 2 10 7 Setting the Rise Time in Digital MCBs To achieve the best results for your application when using a digital spectrometer such as the DSPEC Pro DSPEC jr 2 0 DSPEC jr digiDART DSPEC Plus or DSPEC we recommend that you Set the rise time of the pulses being processed by the digital filter to the minimum value for the resolution needed The pulse rise time and also fall time is based on the time required for each pulse to reach its peak value This peaking time is about twice that indicated by the conventional time constants displayed on the front panel of commercial analog amplifiers For example germanium detectors are often specified at a 6 us time constant this setting is equivalent to 12 us peaking rise time in our digital spectrometers Up to some value of rise time one can expect improved resolution with increasing rise time there will however be a tradeoff in maximum throughput to memory Figure 89 illustrates an example of this tradeoff ORTEC digital spec
355. x aetas watt pto eek at 83 detector A et nocd het 3 background QA 2c e ee eee 189 database DA cu iaces cete pa ex Eth 189 detector table 2s senate p e niles 256 Detector Buber 3h icv are sir selects 159 Sts astra t Molt cek whoa aie Mati bap abut S donk 250 OCs o Mace x dot ate eaten nk tds aha s 153 DICES unde secca oe ER a 32 157 SEO S GL adeat Metis tk at ha eds 25 status sidebar ex exacte paw hee hobs 33 o god sore deca acta ek aude aa dh 153 Detector list atar ote pto x 32 157 dBASE s sak coh alone ate ou RENE RAO E a T1 ADC setup iu tl d Slack be 78 amplifier settings sie ace ete en x ghe T1 conversion gain 42 fice ace eate pter ge ide 78 ALT doe Lob Maia lat ate ath tata rado en TI gatti SCabillZer oae tre pne deoa 79 SNS 5 sedi k Nor Dac adeot a atis putat ae deo 78 gating Enable iae ote eek mat ex deos 78 gating Event lt x x toe ate iate pto ex deos 78 high voltage setup lusus 80 InSight mode e neue tette roe ae x leot 77 lower level discriminator 78 A Siete ase Ped wrk okies footy 81 Shaping GMC a da ak ak ek lee X TI Status tab Enable Counter 81 upper level discriminator 78 zero SIADINZER AA wk orae x Black bee 79 Directed Tibure x et onte EX ada Ad 173 Directories file locatiotis 5 23 sere ave teo te aO e x lat 54 Display mode points fill 160 161 spectrum colors ioc bathe eo an its 161 Display menu 0 6 2
356. xibility NOTE If your PC uses Windows XP and you wish to use or share ORTEC MCBs across a network be sure to read Section 2 1 4 Click on Done 5 At the end of the wizard restart the PC Upon restart remove the ScintiVision CD from the drive ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 Instrument Setup 23 Instrument Families Please check all items in this USB based instruments list that are connected to or O Dual Port Memory plug in cards ISA slot installed in this computer O Dual Port Memory plug in cards PCI slot Click Done when you are O TRUMP PCI cards finished O DART or any other printer port based device O DSP Scint Item Description O microBASE Click on any item in the list O 585 80 or SBS 65 to get more information a L Miniature MCA miniC4 166 2 O Maca digiDART AS232 DSPEC jr RS232 Local Instrument list 1 GRAY GC MCB 134 SN 177 v Allow other computers to use this computer s instruments Fig 1 Choose the Interface for Your Instruments 6 After all processing for new plug and play devices has finished you will be ready to configure the MCBs in your system Connect and power on all local and network ORTEC instruments that you wish to use as well as their associated PCs Otherwise the software will not detect them during installation Any instruments not detected can be configured at a later time 7 If any of the components on the
357. xing buttons lt a ex thes 39 LIB sie shes ic ee a eet d Re avt 39 204 A wie ee lace le ee ee ie ek 39 204 ROT Giese wits a cot ate wee ape meek 40 204 InSight Mode cri as 67 68 85 Mark O TOT 83 Mark types ood ence onde pere iR XR foot 84 Integration time arras 67 Job commands detailed reference 223 INDEX commands quick reference 212 GOBLEOD ins Reena daa t anos adeat iat 8 150 edit dra deg Mcd ttd tid eae we Edita a 151 examples oc ia ed idee amt ato Rc ont 219 pp we 211 file variables seo pex Rx 218 loop counter 0 2 0 0 cee eee ee eee 221 programming es oca cache eek wane 219 PTT ro 150 s bro tine xei ucc ete ue mk ae ate oe 226 Keyboard Commands sce e uet eet pacte x eit 201 Map detur rate e aot a etie an ut 203 quick reference de ace te ah da 202 O e p Qo eek 96 97 105 A nh dieat teta Mata 23 144 edit peaks aes ace ove tact bue mak ge ated ase ed 148 load t Stree af oF ces pecca eet paca es Ponts 143 M ster ee ote pta n ER PO d PORA 145 MENU or iue ach e aot as ate to taie s rats 142 nuclide dao fled ace ee eo te ah aces 147 Old ons cern alas dan lis 143 149 photon flags miso ratto er dores 148 POEM T PP vm 150 show peaks cid es key So e x Roots 143 Working ont oh dat CORR aU RR 143 145 working library oo ooooo 119 LIC 0d 103 Linear seal 6a ds ea 35 Live tie oua aie dood en ne en eed x RARE Bes 75 Dock detec 44x case eet Rp e es 1
358. xls 3 50 360200 Microsc Microsoft FoxPro Driver dbf 3 50 360200 Microsc Microsoft Text Driver txt csv 3 50 360200 Microsc SQL Server 2 65 0213 Microsc n Advanced lt Back Cancel Fig 197 Second QA Database Wizard Screen Figure 198 shows the setup summary on the final wizard screen Click on Finish Create New Data Source When you click finish you will create the data source which you have just configured The driver may prompt you for more information User Data Source GYGA Driver Microsoft Access Driver mdb iu Cancel Fig 198 Final Wizard Screen The last setup screen is shown in Fig 199 Click on OK the Quality Assurance Settings dialog Fig 195 will open At this point the database is ready and QA setup and measurements can proceed 194 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE ODBC Microsoft Access 97 Setup x Data Source Name Description Scintivision 32 QA Database Database Database C User SvQa32 Mdb Select Create Repair Compact System Database None C Database OK Cancel Help Advanced dd Fig 199 Select Database Options gt gt 8 2 Measure Background This command opens the dialog in Fig 200 which tells you to remove all sources from the Detector before proceeding Confirm that all sources have been removed for a background measurement click on OK Start The
359. xt The loop count will be inserted with leading zeros suppressed The following is an example SET DETECTOR 1 SET PRESET LIVE 20 LOOP 3 SET DETECTOR 1 CLEAR START WAIT 2 WAIT FILL BUFFER SET DETECTOR 0 SAVE TEST CHN END LOOP The above commands run three 20 second acquisitions and store the data on a disk in TEST001 CHN TEST002 CHN and TEST003 CHN If the SAVE command is replaced with SAVE TEST Loop CHN then the following files will be saved TESTO CHN TEST1 CHN and TEST2 CHN 228 10 JOB FILES LOOP SPECTRA END LOOP This executes the commands within the loop once for each spectrum stored in the Detector hardware This command only works for hardware that supports Field Mode MARK PEAKS This does a Mariscotti type peak search on the spectrum in the selected data memory The peak search sensitivity is selected in the Calculate menu Each peak found is marked with an ROI If the selected data memory is calibrated the width of the ROI is three times the calculated FWHM of the peak If the selected data memory is not calibrated the width of the ROI equals the width of the peak as determined by the peak search function Overlapping or close peaks could have contiguous ROIs Existing ROIs are not cleared This command has the same function as Peak Search in the Calculate menu The following is an example of the MARK PEAKS command used with REPORT MARK PEAKS REPORT TESTDAT RPT The above procedu
360. y Peak dialog Fig 26 which will show the current values and allow you to change the energy and gammas per disintegration of the 1332 5 keV line Editing SvDemo Lib Creation 4 13 88 10 58 04AM Co60 Cobalt Edition 4 5 95 8 19 53 AM Hal Lite 1825 Days Uncertainty 0 0390 Edit Co 60 Peaks Edit aa REEI 9900F 235 3 y 998 rop Cut Insert Paste Fig 25 Edit Nuclide Library with ScintiVision Editor Click on the Gammas per 100 disintegrations field and change the value then click on OK You will see that the Gammas per 100 Disintegrations value for this peak has been changed to the number you just entered Now click on the Editing dialog s Close button to leave the library editor When asked if you want to save the modified library click on No to ignore the change you just made in the Gammas per 100 Disintegrations field The ScintiVision library editor is explained in detail in Section 5 6 Note that ScintiVision can also use NuclideNavigator III libraries as master libraries 24 Edit Library Peak x Associated Nuclide Co 60 Energy keV EEE Gammas per 100 Disintegrations p 3382E 00 Photon Flags Gamma Ray G C X Ray C Positron Decay P C Single Escape 5 C Double Escape D Peak Flags KeyLine K Not In Average A Cancel Fig 26 Edit Nuclide Peak 3 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL
361. y Total v Library peak list v Library peak matrix Confidence level v Nuclide abundance 6 1 C 2 C 3Sigma Dutput Printer Display Analysis Results o C File F Browse GEHENO writer Browse Fig 124 Report Tab Select one or more Reporting Options If it is not possible for all the requested options to be printed because information is lacking Scinti Vision might print another option if there is enough information for it For example suppose a nuclide activity report is the only report option selected If the spectrum has not been efficiency calibrated the activities cannot be calculated In this case Scinti Vision will instead print the library peak list because there is sufficient information to do that Next choose the Uncertainty Reporting options The Confidence level multiplier shown here is used on the report only All internal checks on peak uncertainty are done at the 1 sigma level See Chapter 6 for details on the total uncertainty calculation The uncertainty can be in Activity e g 200 Bq 10 Bq or Percent e g 200 Bq 5 If Counting is selected counting uncertainty will be printed If Total is selected both the counting and total uncertainty will be printed When ScintiVision performs an analysis it simultaneously writes the results to a uFo file and an ASCII format RPT file each assigned the spectrum filename Use the Output section of the 121 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32
362. your PC or do not wish to share your instruments this section does not apply to you If you have installed Windows XP Service Pack 2 and have fully enabled the Windows Firewall as recommended by Microsoft the default firewall settings will prevent other computers from accessing the CONNECTIONS 32 MCBs connected directly to your PC To share your locally connected ORTEC instruments across a network you must enable File and Printer Sharing on the Windows Firewall Exceptions list To do this 1 From the Windows Control Panel access the Windows Firewall entry File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q Back P P Search gt Folders C Depending on the appearance of your Address e Network Connections Control Panel there are two ways to LAN or High Speed Internet do this Either open the Windows Network Tasks Firewall item if displayed or open Create a new connection the Network Connections item then e Coe wixbes Erma choose Change Windows Firewall Settings as illustrated in Fig 2 This Fig 2 Change the Firewall Settings will open the Windows Firewall dialog 2 Goto the Exceptions tab then click to mark the File and Printer Sharing checkbox Fig 3 NOTE This affects only the ability of other users on your network to access your MCBs You are not required to turn on File and Printer Sharing in order to access networked MCBs as long as those PCs are configured to grant remote access 3 To
363. ype sizeof int 1 f pointer if f type CHN printf Not a valid fileWMn exit 1 261 ScintiVision 32 v2 A35 B32 fread amp mca num sizeof int 1 f pointer MCA number fread amp segment sizeof int 1 f pointer segment fread acq time 12 sizeof char 2 f pointer start time fread amp realtime sizeof long 1 f pointer 20ms ticks fread amp livetime sizeof long 1 f pointer 20ms ticks fread acq time sizeof char 2 f pointer start date fread acq times2 sizeof char 3 f pointer start month fread acq times5 sizeof char 3 f pointer start year fread acq times8 sizeof char 2 f pointer start hour fread acq time 10 sizeof char 2 f pointer start mins fread amp chan offset sizeof int 1 f pointer offset fread amp num chans sizeof int 1 f pointer channels printf TYPE 4i MCA 2i n f type mca num printf SEGMENT 3i n segment printf REALTIME 101i SECONDS n realtime 50 printf LIVETIME 101i SECONDS n livetime 50 printf DATA COLLECTED AT fwrite acq time 8 sizeof char 2 stdout putchar fwrite acq time 10 sizeof char 2 stdout putchar fwrite acq time 12 sizeof char 2 stdout printf ON fwrite acq time sizeof char 2 stdout putchar fwrite acq time 2 sizeof char 3 stdout putchar fwrite acq time 5 sizeof
364. zero setting The dead time per pulse is 3 x Rise Time 2 x Flattop Width In the Pole Zero section the Start button performs a pole zero at the specified rise time and other shaping values Unlike the optimize feature it performs a pole zero for only the one rise time The pole zero Stop button aborts the pole zero and is normally not used When you are satisfied with the settings Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data Once data acquisition is underway the advanced user may wish to return to MCB Properties and click on the Insight section s Start button to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well Amplifier PRO This tab Fig 71 contains the LFR filter x control which is discussed in detail in High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset hardware manual To enable Low Amplifier Ampifier2 AmplifierPRO ADC Stabilizer Frequency Rejector mode mark the checkbox Unmark the checkbox to turn off the LFR filter NOTE You cannot optimize or pole zero the DSPEC jr 2 0 while in LFR mode The Optimize feature should be used with the LFR filter off Subsequent measurements can then be taken with the LFR filter on Fig 71 DSPEC jr 2 0 ADC Tab 68 ADC This tab Fig 72 contains the Gate ZDT Mode Conversion Gain Lower Level Discriminator and Upper Level Discriminator controls In a

A35 - Ortec

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents